Yamaha S559 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: S559

Categoría: Instrumentos musicales

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Este manual también es adecuado para

Owner’s Manual

DIGITAL WORKSTATION

2 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter).

DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other

than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or speciﬁcally

recommended by Yamaha.

This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a

cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is

used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom-

pany the accessory product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the

time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or mod-

ify any of the speciﬁcations without notice or obligation to update exist-

ing units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an ampliﬁer and head-

phones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that

could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods

of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you

experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult

an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before

damage occurs.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a

function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not

covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners

responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your

dealer before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and envi-

ronmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the pro-

duction methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping

with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of

the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if

applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of

battery is approximately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes neces-

sary, contact a qualiﬁed service representative to perform the replace-

ment.

This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these

may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a

rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being

charged.

When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batter-

ies of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mis-

matches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery

case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all bat-

teries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as

regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of

household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some rea-

son its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local,

state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that

contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist

you, please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model

number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this

plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date

of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a

permanent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

92-BP (bottom)

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 3

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-

tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modiﬁcations not

expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by

the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/

or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s

supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital

devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-

able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-

tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies

and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in

the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation

of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does

not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If

this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be

determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-

nate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of

product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact

Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600

Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

(class B)

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den

ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,

sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også

selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko

laitetta verkosta.

(standby)

This product contains a high intensity lamp

that contains a small amount of mercury.

Disposal of this material may be regulated

due to environmental considerations.

For disposal information in the United States, refer to

the Electronic Industries Alliance web site:

www.eiae.org

(mercury)* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accor-

dance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus

may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the ter-

minals in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the ter-

minal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal

of the three pin plug.

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble

Music (U.K.) Ltd.

(2 wires)

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.

90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard

Model Name : PSR-S550/S550B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is

suspected.

(FCC DoC)

4 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

(3)-12 1/2

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The required

voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use the speciﬁed adaptor (page 135) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in

damage to the instrument or overheating.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have

accumulated on it.

• Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,

and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects

on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll

anything over it.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into

any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the

power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have

the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

• If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a

sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or

smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,

disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord.

• Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during

electrical storms.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the

outlet.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or

heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal

components.

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,

mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio

may generate noise.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is

easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off

the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power

switch is turned off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the product at the minimum

level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug

the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

• Use only the stand speciﬁed for the instrument. When attaching the stand or

rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the

internal components or result in the instrument falling over.

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Location

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 5

(3)-12 2/2

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all

components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes

of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume

controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,

solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

• Do not insert a ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel

or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the

power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed

Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might

discolor the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not

use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument or headphones for a long period of time at a high or

uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you

experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

Saving and backing up your data

• The panel settings and some other types of data are not retained in memory

when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save data you want to keep to the

Registration Memory (page 85).

Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save

important data to a USB storage device/external device such as a computer

(page 98).

Backing up the USB storage device/external media

•To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you

save your important data onto two USB storage devices/external media.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still ﬂowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long

time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

● Trademarks

• The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.

•Windows is the registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation.

• The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Saving data

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on

your instrument.

6 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music

data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM

mark is afﬁxed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level.

XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha speciﬁcally to

provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects, and to

ensure compatibility of data well into the future.

The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and

open-ended expandability for the future. The instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF ﬁle con-

taining lyric data is played.

STYLE FILE

The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style ﬁle format which uses a unique conversion system to pro-

vide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types.

USB

USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with

peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the com-

puter is on).

Logos

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it

has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style ﬁles, MIDI

ﬁles, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use

is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE

ILLEGAL COPIES.

Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited

except for your personal use.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 7

Congratulations and thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PSR-S550!

Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument

in order to take full advantage of its various features.

Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you

ﬁnish reading, and refer to it often when you need to better understand

an operation or function.

The instrument package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all.

• Music rest

• Accessory CD-ROM

• Owner’s manual (this book)

•AC Power Adaptor (May not be included depending on your particular area.

Please check with your Yamaha dealer.)

Accessories

8 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Special Features of the PSR-S550

■ Play a Variety of Instrument Voices Page 17

The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be

changed to violin, ﬂute, harp, or any of an extensive range of Voices. You

can change the mood of a Song written for piano, for example, by using

violin to play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety.

■ Play Along with Styles Page 23

Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment

Styles. The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing

band covering wide variety of Styles from waltzes to 8-beat to samba …

and much more. What’s more, you can create and save your own original

Styles for even greater versatility.

■ Save and Recall Panel Settings to Registration Memory Page 77

This convenient function lets you save a ‘snapshot’ of your custom panel

settings—up to 64 complete “Registrations.” These can be called up

instantly any time you need them—perfect for making broad sound/effect

changes when playing live!

8 banks x 8 presets = 64 Registrations

■ Easy Performance with Music Notation Display Page 30

When you play back a Song, the corresponding score will be shown on the

display as the Song plays. This is a great way to learn how to read music. If

the Song contains lyric and chord data*, the lyrics and chords will also

appear on the score display.

* No lyrics or chords will appear on the display if the Song you are using with the score display func-

tion does not contain the appropriate lyric and chord data.

■

Save and Load Data to USB Flash Memory or Computer

Pages 83 and 94

These data organization tools let you store your original User Songs or cus-

tom panel settings (Registration Memory) to a USB Flash Memory device

or a computer, then load the data back to the instrument as needed.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 9

Logos........................................................................................ 6

Accessories .............................................................................. 7

Special Features of the PSR-S550 .......................................... 8

Setting Up 10

Power Requirements.............................................................. 10

Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) ............. 10

Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)............................. 10

Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal)............................ 11

Turning the Power On ............................................................ 11

Changing the Display language ............................................. 12

Adjusting the LCD CONTRAST control.................................. 12

Panel Controls and Terminals 14

Front Panel............................................................................. 14

Rear Panel ............................................................................. 15

Quick Guide

Playing Songs 16

Try playing a variety of Instrument Voices 17

Select and Play a Voice ......................................................... 17

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL.......................... 18

Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands

—LEFT .............................................................................. 19

Playing Drum Kits................................................................... 21

Playing Styles 22

Select a Styles Rhythm .......................................................... 22

Playing Along with a Style ...................................................... 23

Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords .................................... 25

Playing with the Music Database 26

Using Songs 27

Selecting and Listening to a Song.......................................... 27

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ...................... 28

Types of Songs ...................................................................... 29

Displaying the Song Score ..................................................... 30

Displaying the Lyrics............................................................... 31

Recording Your Own Performance 32

Track Configuration ................................................................ 32

Quick Recording Procedure ................................................... 33

Multi-track Recording Procedure............................................ 34

Song Clear—Deleting User Songs......................................... 37

Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track From a User Song. 38

Backup and Initialization 39

Backup ................................................................................... 39

Initialization............................................................................. 39

Basic Operation and Displays 40

Basic Operation...................................................................... 40

The Displays........................................................................... 42

MAIN Display Items................................................................ 43

Reference

Playing with the Effects 44

Adding Harmony..................................................................... 44

Changing the Reverb Type .................................................... 45

Changing the Chorus Type .................................................... 46

Panel Sustain ......................................................................... 47

Adding DSP............................................................................ 47

Pitch Bend .............................................................................. 48

Using Various Functions 49

Playing with the metronome ................................................... 49

Using Tap Start ...................................................................... 51

Touch Response .................................................................... 51

EQ settings............................................................................. 52

Pitch Controls ......................................................................... 53

Changing the pitch of the instrument in octaves .................... 54

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions 55

Pattern Variation (sections) ....................................................55

One Touch Setting..................................................................58

Variation Change and OTS (OTS LINK)................................. 58

Setting the Split Point .............................................................59

Playing a Style with Chords but without Rhythm

(Stop Accompaniment) ...................................................... 60

Adjusting the Style Volume.....................................................60

Chord Basics ..........................................................................61

User Style ...............................................................................63

Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard ..............................63

Creating Original Styles (Style Creator) 64

Style Structure ........................................................................64

Main Display of the Style Creator ...........................................64

Follow the Style Creator instructions. .....................................65

Basic Operation ......................................................................66

Parameter Settings, Recording and Saving ...........................67

Song Settings 72

Song Volume ..........................................................................72

Changing the Tempo ..............................................................72

A-B Repeat .............................................................................73

Muting Independent Song Parts .............................................74

MIXER 75

Mixer Display ..........................................................................75

Basic operation....................................................................... 75

Track ON/OFF and other parameter controls......................... 76

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 77

Saving to the Registration Memory ........................................77

Recalling a Registration Memory............................................ 78

Registration Clear—Deleting a Specified Registration

Memory.............................................................................. 79

The Functions 80

Selecting and Setting Functions .............................................80

Using USB Flash Memory 83

Using USB Flash Memory ......................................................83

Formatting USB Flash Memory ..............................................84

Saving the Registration Data.................................................. 85

Saving a User Song or User Style.......................................... 86

Loading Registration Files, Style Files, Song Files or

MDB Files .......................................................................... 87

Deleting Data from USB Flash Memory .................................88

Playing Songs or Styles Saved to USB Flash Memory ..........89

Connections 90

Connectors .............................................................................90

Connection to a USB Storage Device ....................................90

Connecting a Personal Computer ..........................................92

Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer .......94

Initial Send.............................................................................. 95

Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument..... 96

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide 99

Important Notices about the CD-ROM.................................... 99

Contents of the CD-ROM .....................................................100

Software Installation .............................................................101

Appendix

Troubleshooting.................................................................... 107

Messages ............................................................................108

Voice List ..............................................................................110

Drum Kit List .........................................................................116

Style List ...............................................................................121

Music Database List .............................................................122

Voice Effect Type List........................................................... 125

MIDI Implementation Chart................................................... 132

MIDI Data Format .................................................................134

Specifications .......................................................................135

Index..................................................................................... 136

Contents

10 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Be sure to do the following operations

BEFORE turning on the power.

 Make sure that the [STANDBY/ON] switch of the

instrument is set to STANDBY.

 Connect the power adaptor’s DC plug to the power

supply jack.

 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.

Make all necessary connections below

BEFORE turning the power on.

The instrument speakers are automatically shut off

when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/

OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. You

can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a keyboard

ampliﬁer, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other

line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output

signal to that device.

The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain

as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the Yamaha

FC4 or FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch

sustain on and off.

Power Requirements

• Use the speciﬁed adaptor (page 135) only. The use of other

adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor

and the instrument.

• Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument,

or during electrical storms.

CAUTION

AC outlet





Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)

Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)

•Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long peri-

ods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be

damaging to your hearing.

•To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external

devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to

observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment

damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their

minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while

playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

CAUTION

• Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUS-

TAIN jack before turning on the power.

• Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this

changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed

footswitch operation.

NOTE

Setting Up

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 11

Connect the instrument’s USB terminal to the USB ter-

minal of a computer, and you can transfer performance

data and Song ﬁles between the two (page 96). To use

the USB data-transfer features you’ll need to do the fol-

lowing:

• First, make sure the POWER switch on the instru-

ment is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to con-

nect the instrument to the computer. After making

the connections, turn the instrument’s power on.

• Install the USB MIDI driver on your computer from

CD-ROM (see page 101).

• Install the MusicSoft downloader on your com-

puter from the website (see page 103)

Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOL-

UME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON]

switch to turn on the power. Press the [STANDBY/ON]

switch again to turn the power OFF.

Backup data in the ﬂash memory is loaded to the instru-

ment when the power is turned on. If no backup data

exists on ﬂash memory, all instrument settings are

restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is

turned on.

Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal) Turning the Power On

• Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is

still ﬂowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are

not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the

AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

CAUTION

•Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Writing..” message is

shown in the display. Doing so can damage the ﬂash memory and

result in a loss of data.

CAUTION

Setting Up

12 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

This instrument allows you to select English or Japa-

nese as the display language. The default display lan-

guage is English, but if you switch to Japanese the

lyrics, ﬁle names and some messages will be displayed

in Japanese where appropriate.

 Press the [FUNCTION] button.

 Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons a number

of times until the “Language” item appears.

The currently selected display language will appear

below the “Language” item.

 Select a display language.

The [+] button selects English and the [-] button

selects Japanese.

The language selection will be stored in the internal

ﬂash memory so that it is retained even when the

power is turned off.

 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN dis-

play.

Adjust the LCD CONTRAST control on the rear panel

of the instrument for optimum display legibility.

Changing the Display language

< >

The currently

selected lan-

guage

Language item

Adjusting the LCD CONTRAST control

• Looking at the display for a long period of time in the dark may

cause eyestrain or damage to your eyesight. Make sure to use the

instrument with as much ambient light as possible and also take

adequate breaks and rest from use.

CAUTION

Setting Up

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 13

● Music Rest

Insert the music rest

into the slots as

shown.

14 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Panel Controls and Terminals

q [STANDBY/ON] switch .................... page 16

w [MASTER VOLUME] control.... pages 16, 40

e [DEMO] button................................. page 16

r [SONG MODE] button ..................... page 27

t SONG

[PRESET], [USER] buttons .......... page 27

[SCORE] button ............................ page 30

[LYRICS] button ............................ page 31

y [USB] button .................................... page 27

u [REC] button .................................... page 33

i STYLE............................................... page 22

o STYLE CONTROL

[OTS LINK] button ........................ page 58

[AUTO FILL IN] button.................. page 55

[ACMP] button .............................. page 23

INTRO [I]–[III] buttons .................. page 55

MAIN VARIATION [A]–[D] buttons

..................................................... page 55

ENDING/rit. [I]–[III] buttons .......... page 55

[SYNC STOP] button .................... page 57

[SYNC START] button .......... pages 23, 56

[START/STOP] button........... pages 22, 41

!0 SONG CONTROL

[r] button.................................... page 28

[f] button .................................... page 28

[A B] button .............................. page 73

[] button..................................... page 28

[>/■] button...........................pages 28, 41

!1 TRANSPOSE [+] and [-] buttons.... page 53

!2 [METRONOME] button.................... page 49

!3 [TAP TEMPO] button ....................... page 51

!4 TEMPO [+] and [-] buttons.............. page 49

!5 [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] button..... page 74

!6 [MEMORY] button ........................... page 77

!7 REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons.. page 77

!8 Style Part/Song Part [1/9]–[8/16]/

REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8]

buttons............................................. page 77

!9 Display ......................................pages 12, 42

@0 [EXIT] button ................................... page 42

@1 Dial ................................................... page 41

@2 [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons............. page 41

Front Panel

t i

!2 !3

y u

Panel Controls and Terminals

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 15

@3 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons ..... page 41

@4 [EXECUTE] button........................... page 68

@5 [MDB] button ................................... page 26

@6 [FILE MENU] button ........................ page 83

@7 [FUNCTION] button ......................... page 80

@8 ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4]

buttons ............................................. page 58

@9 VOICE ............................................... page 17

#0 VOICE CONTROL

[LEFT] button................................ page 19

[DUAL] button ............................... page 18

[HARMONY] button ...................... page 44

[TOUCH] button ............................ page 51

[SUSTAIN] button ......................... page 47

[DSP] button.................................. page 47

#1 UPPER OCTAVE [+] and [-] buttons

.......................................................... page 54

#2 [PITCH BEND] wheel....................... page 48

#3 Drum Kit ........................................... page 21

#4 SUSTAIN jack................................... page 10

#5 USB TO HOST and TO DEVICE

terminals.......................................... page 90

#6 CONTRAST knob ............................ page 12

#7 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ................... page 10

#8 DC IN 16V jack................................. page 10

@4 @5

@6 @7

#4 #5 #6 #7 #8

Rear Panel

< >

Rear Panel

16 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Playing Songs

This instrument include a Demonstration Song. Let’s start by playing

the Demonstration Song.

Press the [STANDBY/ON] button until it locks in the ON

position.

The Main display appears in the LCD.

Press the [DEMO] button to start the Demo.

The Demo display appears in the LCD.

Gradually raise the [MASTER VOLUME] control while playing the

instrument to set the desired listening level.

The Demo Song will restart when playback reaches the end.

Press the [>>

/■] button to stop Demo.

Operation automatically returns to the Main display.

STYLE name

SONG name

Music Database name

VOICE name

• The [DEMO] button doesn’t

function when the Demo Cancel

function is set to enable. (See

page 82.)

NOTE

Quick Guide

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 17

Try playing a variety of Instrument Voices

In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments,

this instrument has a large range of realistic Voices—including guitar,

bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects, and a

wide variety of other musical sounds.

In this operation, you’ll select a Main Voice and play it on the keyboard.

Select and press the desired Voice category button in the

Voice section.

The Main Voice selection display will appear.

The currently selected category name, Voice number and name will be

highlighted.

For this example, select the “Flute&Woodwind” category.

Select the Voice you want to play.

Look at the highlighted Voice name and rotate the dial. The available

Voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The Voice selected

here becomes the Main Voice.

For this example, select the “010 Flute” Voice.

Play the keyboard.

Try selecting and playing a variety of Voices.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Select and Play a Voice

•To change the Voice category,

press another category button.

NOTE

MAIN VOICE

selection display

Current

selected Voice

category

1 Use category buttons to select a CATEGORY.

● Song category

Select the Song category you want to play

● Style category

Select the Style category you want to play

● Voice category

Select the Voice category you want to play

* If you want to change the category, press another category button or use the Category [ ], [ ] button.

< >

USB

● USB

Select the Song, or Style in the USB mem-

ory.

Basic Operation and Displays

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 41

3 Starting/stopping a Song or Style.

Press the [START/STOP] button after selecting the Song cate-

gory or Style category to start playback of the selected Song or

Style (rhythm).

● Category buttons [ ], [ ]

You can change the category after

you’ve selected a Song, Style or

Voice category.

Pressing these buttons allow you to

step in sequence through the catego-

ries.

< >

2 Use the dial to select an item or value.

When you select the category such as Song, Style or Voice, the selected category name and item is

shown on the display. The item can be changed by using the dial or the [+/YES], [-/NO] buttons.

● Dial

Rotate the dial clockwise to

increase the value of the

selected item, or counter-

clockwise to decrease its

value. Rotate the dial to con-

tinuously increase or decrease

the value.

Currently selected category name

Currently selected item

● [+/YES], [-/NO] buttons

Press the [+/YES] button

brieﬂy to increment the value

by 1, or press the [-/NO] button

brieﬂy to decrement the value

by 1. Press and hold either but-

ton to continuously increment

or decrement the value in the

corresponding direction.

Decrease Increase

Press

brieﬂy to

decrement.

Press

brieﬂy to

increment.

In most procedures described throughout this owner’s manual, the dial is recommended for selection sim-

ply because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection method. Please note however, that most items or

values that can be selected using the dial can also be selected using the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons.

Example: Voice selection display

Previous category Next category

Basic Operation and Displays

42 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

● Display names

The display provides important, easy-to-understand indications for performing all operations.

The name of the current display appears at the top of the display.

You can see the “MAIN” indication at the top on the display.

● MAIN Display

● FUNCTION display (page 80)

The FUNCTION display provides access to 51 utility functions. The FUNCTION display appears when the

[FUNCTION] button is pressed.

In the FUNCTION display you can use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons (page 41) to select 51 differ-

ent function items.

Press the CATEGORY button(s) as many times as necessary until the required function appears. You can

then use the dial or the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons to adjust the value of the function as required.

The Displays

Call up the Main display

Most basic operations are carried out from the

instrument’s MAIN display.

You can return to the MAIN display from any other

display by pressing the [EXIT] button near the lower

right corner of the display panel.

Title

Function item

Value

Basic Operation and Displays

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 43

The MAIN display shows all of the current basic settings: Song, Style, Voice.

It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions.

MAIN Display Items

Tempo

(page 49, 51)

Transpose

(page 53)

Measure number

(page 36)

OCTAVE

(page 54)

REGISTRATION memory /

Song track indication

Shows currently selected item:

REGIST., TR 1–8, TR 9–16

(page 74)

A-B Repeat

Appears when the Repeat

function is on for Song play-

back. (page 73)

USB status

(page 83)

Chord Display

(page 25)

Registration memory

bank status

(page 77)

Song track status

(page 74)

Main Voice (page 17)

Dual Voice (page 18)

Left Voice (page 19)

Style (page 22)

Song (page 27)

Music Database (page 26)

44 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Playing with the Effects

This feature adds Harmony, Tremolo or Echo effects to the Main Voice.

Press the [HARMONY] button to turn

the Harmony function on.

The [HARMONY] button lights indicating that

Harmony is on.

To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY]

button again.

Press and hold the [HARMONY] button

for longer than a second.

The currently selected Harmony type will be

displayed.

Use the dial to select a Harmony type.

Refer to the Effect Type List on page 125 for

information about the available Harmony

types.

Try playing the keyboard with the Harmony

function. The effect and operation of each Har-

mony type is different—for details, refer to the

section below “How to sound each Harmony

Type” as well as the Effect Type List.

Adding Harmony

• When you press the [HARMONY] button to turn this feature on, the

appropriate Harmony type for the currently selected Main Voice is

automatically selected.

NOTE

Hold for longer

than a second

Currently selected

Harmony type.

• The Harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to

Dual or Left Voices.

• The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no Harmony

notes when the Auto Accompaniment is on (ACMP ON lights).

• When chord ﬁngering is set to Full Keyboard, the Harmony function

is turned off automatically.

NOTE

● How to sound each Harmony Type

• Harmony types 01 to 14

• Harmony types 15 to 18 (Echo)

Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the

Auto Accompaniment range of the keyboard when the

Auto Accompaniment is on (page 23).

Keep holding down the keys.

• Harmony types 19 to 22 (Tremolo)

• Harmony types 23 to 26 (Trill)

You can adjust the Harmony Volume in

the Function Settings (page 82).

Keep holding down the keys.

Hold down two keys.

Reference

Playing with the Effects

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 45

Reverb enhances the sound of the Voices with the rich ambience of a concert hall.

When you select a Style or Song the optimum reverb type for the Voice used is automatically selected. If

you want to select a different reverb type, use the operation described below.

Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up

the FUNCTION display.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to call

up Reverb Type.

The currently selected Reverb Type will be dis-

played.

Use the dial to select a Reverb Type.

You can check the sound of the selected Reverb

Type by playing the keyboard.

Refer to the Effect Type List on page 126 for

information about the available Reverb Types.

● Adjusting the Reverb Level

You can individually adjust the amount of reverb

that is applied to the Main, Dual, and Left Voices.

(See page 81).

Changing the Reverb Type

< >

Reverb Type

Selected Reverb Type

Playing with the Effects

46 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

The Chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same Voices being played in unison.

When you select a Style or Song the optimum Chorus Type for the Voice used is automatically selected. If

you want to select a different Chorus Type, use the procedure described below.

Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up

the FUNCTION display.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to call

up Chorus Type.

The currently selected Chorus Type will be dis-

played.

Use the dial to select a Chorus Type.

You can check the sound of the selected Chorus

Type by playing the keyboard.

Refer to the Effect Type List on page 127 for

information about the available Chorus Types.

● Adjusting the Chorus Level

You can individually adjust the amount of Chorus

that is applied to the Main, Dual, and Left Voices.

(See page 81).

Changing the Chorus Type

< >

Chorus Type

Selected Chorus Type

Playing with the Effects

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 47

This function adds sustain to the keyboard Voices. Use it when you want to add sustain to the Voices at all

times, regardless of footswitch operation. The sustain function does not affect the Left Voice.

Press the [SUSTAIN] button to turn the

sustain function on.

The [SUSTAIN] button lights indicating that

Sustain is on.

A total of 178 DSP effects can be added to the Main, Dual and Left Voices. These range from reverb-like

ambience effects to distortion and other dynamic processing tools that let you enhance the sound, or com-

pletely transform it.

Use the [DSP] button to turn the DSP

function on.

The [DSP] button lights indicating that DSP is on.

To turn DSP off, press the [DSP] button again.

Press and hold the [DSP] button for

longer than a second.

The currently selected DSP type will be dis-

played.

Use the dial to select a DSP type.

Refer to the DSP Type List on page 128 for

information about the available DSP types.

Panel Sustain

•For certain Voices, the sustain effect may not be obvious or audible,

even when the panel sustain function is turned on.

NOTE

Adding DSP

• DSP is term of abbreviated form of Digital Signal Processor and it uses a

micro processor to change the audio in various ways.

NOTE

[DSP] button lights

when DSP is on.

• When DSP is turned on, the optimum DSP type for the current Voice

is automatically selected.

• The volume of the currently playing Voice changes when turning

DSP on or off. This is not a malfunction. The amount of change dif-

fers depending on the selected Voice.

• The DSP type is an overall setting—only one type can be selected.

For this reason, when you play a newly loaded Song or Style, for

example, the currently playing Voices may not sound as expected.

This is normal, since the Song or Style has its own DSP type which

replaces any selection you’ve made before loading. A similar phe-

nomenon occurs when you use the [

], [

] buttons or A-B

Repeat function during Song playback.

NOTE

Hold for longer

than a second

DSP Type

Currently selected DSP type.

Playing with the Effects

48 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll

the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. If you use this feature with a Voice

such as the “042 Overdrive” guitar Voice (page 17), you can produce remarkably realistic string-bending

effects.

You can change the amount of pitch bend produced by the wheel, as described on page 81.

Pitch Bend

• Pitch Bend is not applied to the Left Voice when accompaniment is

turned on.

NOTE

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 49

Using Various Functions

This instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature. Play and set the tempo

that is most comfortable for you.

■Turn the metronome on● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Press the [METRONOME] button to start

the metronome.

To stop the metronome, press the [METRO-

NOME] button again.

■Set the metronome tempo ● ● ● ● ●

Press the TEMPO [+]/[-] buttons to call

up the tempo setting and use the but-

tons to raise or lower the tempo.

Use the dial to select a tempo from 5 to

280.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Main

display.

■Mute the bell ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

You can mute the Metronome bell which sounds at

the ﬁrst beat of each measure.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to call

up “Bell.”

Rotate the dial and select ON (sound) or

OFF (mute).

Playing with the metronome

Beat numberTempo

Time

Signature

Tempo value

• The tempo can be changed by either pressing the TEMPO [+]/[-]

buttons repeatedly or holding them down.

NOTE

< >

Using Various Functions

50 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

■Changing the Time Signature ● ● ●

In this example we’ll set up a 3/8 time signature.

Press and hold the [METRONOME] but-

ton for longer than a second.

The currently selected time signature is dis-

played.

Use the dial to select the number of

beats per measure.

When the Bell setting is on, the Bell will sound

on the ﬁrst beat of each measure, while a met-

ronome “click” will sound on all others. You

can set the time signature from 01 to 60. Select

3 for this example.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] button once to

call up the Time Signature Denominator

display.

Use the dial to select a beat length.

Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8,

or 16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or

16th note). For this example, select 8. The time

signature should now be set to 3/8.

Press the [METRONOME] button to conﬁrm

the settings.

■Adjusting the Metronome Volume

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to call

up Metronome Volume.

Use the dial to set the metronome vol-

ume.

Hold for longer

than a second

Note value (the note value

or length of one beat)

Number of beats

per measure

• When playing the Song or Style the beat value cannot be changed,

since the beat is synchronized to the selected Song or Style.

NOTE

< >

Metronome volume

Using Various Functions

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 51

You can also set the tempo by simply tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button at the required tempo—four times

for time signatures in 4, and three times for time signatures in 3.

You can change the tempo during Song or Style playback by pressing the button just twice.

■

Turning Touch Response on/off

● ●

Keyboard Touch Response can be turned on by

pressing the [TOUCH] button.

When Touch Response is on you can control the

volume of notes according to how hard you play

the keys.

The [TOUCH] button lights indicating Touch

Response is turned on.

To turn Touch Response off, press the [TOUCH]

button again.

When Touch Response is off, the same volume will

be produced no matter how hard or soft you play

the keys.

■Adjusting the Touch Response

Sensitivity

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

The sensitivity of the keyboard’s Touch Response

can be adjusted in three steps (1–3). The higher the

number, the greater the volume variation produced

by the variation in how hard you play the keys—

i.e., the keyboard becomes more “sensitive.”

Press and hold the [TOUCH] button for

longer than a second.

Use the dial to select a Touch Sensitiv-

ity setting between 1 and 3. Higher val-

ues produce greater (easier) volume

variation in response to keyboard

dynamics—i.e., greater sensitivity.

Using Tap Start

Touch Response

[TOUCH] button lights

indicating when Touch

Response is turned on.

Touch Sensitivity

• The initial default setting is 2.

NOTE

Using Various Functions

52 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Five pre-programmed EQ settings are available. Settings 1 and 2 are best for listening via the instrument’s

built-in speakers, setting 3 is for headphones, and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for listening via external speak-

ers or when connecting to an external mixer.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

The currently selected function will appear in

the display.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to call

up Master EQ Type.

Use the dial to select an EQ Setting for

the best sound.

EQ settings

< >

The currently selected EQ type will appear.

Using Various Functions

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 53

◆ Large Pitch Changes (Transpose)

The overall pitch of the instrument can be shifted

up or down by a maximum of one octave in semi-

tone increments.

Press one of the TRANSPOSE [+]/[-]

buttons.

The value is shown in the display, indicating

the amount of transposition over or below the

normal value.

Use the dial to set the transpose value

between -12 and +12 as required.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Main

display.

Pressing the TRANSPOSE [+]/[-] buttons

allows single-step changes. Pressing and hold-

ing either TRANSPOSE [+]/[-] button continu-

ously increases or decreases the value.

◆ Small Pitch Changes (Tuning)

The overall tuning of the instrument can be shifted

up or down by a maximum of 1 semitone. The

default setting is 440 Hz.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to call

up Tuning.

Use the dial to set the tuning value

between 415.3–466.2Hz as required.

Pitch Controls

Current value

• This setting does not affect Drum Kit Voices.

NOTE

< >

The range is 415.3–466.2 HzTuning

• This setting does not affect Drum Kit Voices.

NOTE

Using Various Functions

54 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

You can change the playing pitch of the Main and Dual Voices in octave intervals.

Press the UPPER OCTAVE [+] button to

raise the pitch by one octave.

The newly changed value is shown in the LCD.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Main

display.

Press the UPPER OCTAVE [-] button to

lower the pitch by one octave.

The newly changed value—now one octave

lower—is shown in the LCD.

Press the UPPER OCTAVE [-] button again to

lower the pitch one more octave.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Main

display.

Changing the pitch of the instrument in octaves

● In the case of UPPER OCTAVE +1

One octave up

• When a Drum Kit is selected, each percussion Voice assigned to the

keyboard are shifted in location but not pitch.

NOTE

● In the case of UPPER OCTAVE -1

One octave down

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 55

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

Basic operation of the Style (Auto Accompaniment) feature is described on page 22 of

the Quick Guide.

Included here is information on how you can play the Styles in various ways, how to

adjust the Style volume, how you can play chords using the Styles, and more.

The instrument features a wide variety of Style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the

accompaniment to match the Song you are playing.

●INTRO section

This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro ﬁnishes playing, accompani-

ment shifts to the main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on

the selected Style.

●MAIN VARIATION section

This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern,

and repeats indeﬁnitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are four variations

on the basic pattern (A–D), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on

the chords you play with your left hand.

●ENDING section

This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is ﬁnished, the Auto Accompani-

ment stops automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the

selected Style.

●AUTO Fill-in section

This is automatically added before the current section changes to a newly selected section.

Pattern Variation (sections)

Main variationIntroFill-in Ending

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

56 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Select the desired Style. (See page 22.)

Press the [ACMP] button to turn Auto

Accompaniment on.

Press the [AUTO FILL IN] button to turn

the Auto Fill In function on.

The initial default setting for Auto Fill In is

“on.”

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn

Synchro Start on.

Press one of the MAIN VARIATION [A]–

[D] buttons.

The selected Main Variation button ﬂashes.

Press one of the INTRO [I]–[III] buttons.

The selected Intro button lights.

Play a chord in the accompaniment

range and start the Intro section.

Try playing a C major chord. (See “Playing

Auto-accompaniment Chords” on page 25.)

● Synchro Start

When Synchro Start is on you, can start the

Style by playing any key in the accompani-

ment range of the keyboard.

The [ACMP] button

lights when ACMP

is turned on.

The [SYNC START] button

ﬂashes indicating Synchro

Start is engaged.

Auto Accompa-

niment range

Split Point

• The Baroque Air Style in the MOVIE & SHOW category does not have a

Rhythm part, so there is no rhythm sound for this Style.

NOTE

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 57

Press one of the MAIN VARIATION [A]–

[D] buttons.

When the ﬁll-in is ﬁnished, it leads smoothly

into the selected Main section A–D.

Press one of the ENDING/rit. [I]–[III] but-

tons.

This switches to the Ending section.

When the Ending is ﬁnished, the Auto Accom-

paniment stops automatically.

You can have the Ending gradually slow down

(ritardando) by pressing one of the ENDING/

rit. [I]–[III] buttons again while the Ending is

playing back.

● Synchro Stop

When this function is selected, the accompa-

niment Style will only play while you are

playing chords in the accompaniment range

of the keyboard.

Style playback will stop when you release the

keys. To turn the function on, press the

[SYNC STOP] button.

The Style will play while

you are playing the keys

Style playback will stop

when you release the keys

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

58 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Sometimes selecting the ideal Voice to play with a Song or Style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting

feature automatically selects four ideally matched Voices for the Style you’ve selected.

Select the desired Style. (See page 22.)

Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING

[1]–[4] buttons.

Play the chord in the accompaniment

range and start the Style.

Try selecting other ONE TOUCH SETTING

[1]–[4] buttons and listen to the results.

When change the MAIN VARIATION [A]–[D] to other MAIN VARIATION [A]–[D] during OTS LINK is

on, OTS 1–4 automatically change the number according to the selected variation number. (see below)

Press the [OTS LINK] button to turn on

the OTS link.

One Touch Setting

Auto Accompani-

ment range

Split Point

Variation Change and OTS (OTS LINK)

Automatically

change

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 59

The initial default Split Point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the

procedure described below.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

as many times as necessary to call up

Split Point.

Use the dial to set the Split Point to any

key from 036 (C1) through 096 (C6).

Setting the Split Point

< >

Split Point (54: F#2)

Main Voice

Left Voice

• Changing the Split Point here also changes the Auto Accompaniment

Split Point.

• The Left Voice sounds when the split-point key is played.

NOTE

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

60 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

When Auto Accompaniment is on (ACMP button lights) and Synchro Start is off, you can play chords in

the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the Style is stopped and still hear the accompani-

ment chords. This is called “Stop Accompaniment,” and any of the chord ﬁngerings recognized by the

instrument can be used (page 25).

Select a Style, then press the [ACMP] but-

ton to turn Auto Accompaniment on.

If the instrument is in the Song mode,

press one of the Style category buttons to

enter the Style mode. (page 22)

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

as many times as necessary to call up

Style Volume.

Use the dial to set the Style Volume

between 000 and 127.

Playing a Style with Chords but without Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment)

Auto Accompa-

niment range

[ACMP] button lights

Adjusting the Style Volume

< >

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 61

Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”.

The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the

root, third, and ﬁfth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major

triad, for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third

note of the C major scale), and G (the ﬁfth note of the C major scale).

In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the

chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for the lowest note results in “inver-

sions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and anchors the other chord notes.

The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third.

The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the

triad is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce

two additional chords, as shown below.

The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to

create different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for

example, by choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”).

● Reading Chord Names

Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a

chord (other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what

the root of the chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished

chord, whether it requires a major or ﬂatted seventh, what alterations or

tensions it uses ... all at a glance.

● Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by the PSR-S550.)

Chord Basics

3rd

Root

Major third–four half steps (semitones) Minor third–three half steps (semitones)

CM Cm Caug Cdim

Major chord Minor chord Augmented chord Diminished chord

Minor 3rd

Major 3rd

Minor 3rd

Major 3rd

Minor 3rd

Root note Chord type

Csus4 C7 Cm7 CM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

C7sus4

CmM7

Suspended 4

Minor 7

Major 7

, suspended 4

Minor 7

, ﬂatted 5

Minor/major 7

Perfect 5

Perfect 4

Flatted 7

Major chord Flatted 7

Minor chord Major 7

Major chord

Major 7

Minor chord Flatted 5

chord

Flatted 5

Minor 7

chord

Flatted 7

Suspended

chord

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

62 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

■Recognized Standard Chords● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords.

Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Display

Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5 C

Add ninth [(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 Cadd9

Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6

Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6

Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7

Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7

Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)]

1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7

CM7

#11

Flatted ﬁfth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5C

Major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7

Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 Csus4

Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5Caug

Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug

Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm

Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm add9

Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6

Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7Cm7

Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7Cm7

Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7

Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7

Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7

Minor seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7Cm7

Minor major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7

Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5Cdim

Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7

Seventh [7]

1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - b7

Seventh ﬂatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7

Seventh add ﬂatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7C7

b13

Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7

Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)]

1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7

#11

Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7C7

Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7

Seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7C7

Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7C7aug

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 - b7C7sus4

Suspended second [sus2] 1 - 2 - 5 Csus2

(

)

(

)

CM7

(

)

CM7

(

#11

)

(

)

CM7

(

)

Csus4

Caug

CM7aug

(

)

Cm6

Cm7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

CmM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

CmM7

(

)

Cdim

Cdim7

(

)

(

b13

)

(

)

(

#11

)

(

)

(

)

C7b5

C7aug

C7sus4

Csus2

• Notes in parentheses can be omitted.

• Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompa-

niment based only on the root.

•A perfect ﬁfth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment based only on the root

and ﬁfth which can be used with both major and minor chords.

NOTE

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 63

This instrument features 11 internal Style categories, but it also allows you to import additional Styles

(only those with an “.sty” extension) that you’ve downloaded from the Internet or gotten from other

sources, and load them into a User Style and use them in the same way as the internal Styles.

For details on loading a Style ﬁle, see “

Loading Registration Files, Style Files, Song Files or MDB Files

”

on page

In order to load a Style ﬁle it is necessary to ﬁrst either transfer the Style ﬁle to the instrument from a com-

puter, or connect a USB ﬂash memory containing the Style ﬁle to the USB TO DEVICE connector. Refer to

“Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument” on page 96 for details on the ﬁle transfer proce-

dure.

If you are using a USB ﬂash memory device, refer to “Loading Registration Files, Style Files, Song Files or

MDB Files” on page 87.

You can directly play the User Style in the USB memory without loading (page 89).

In “Playing Along with a Style” on page 23 we described two methods of playing Styles (Multi, Full Key-

board) in which chords were either detected only to the left of the keyboard Split Point or over the entire

keyboard. By making the settings described below, chord detection for Style accompaniment occurs over

the entire range of the keyboard, allowing for even more dynamic Style performance. In this mode only

chords played in the normal way (page 25) can be detected.

Press the [ACMP] button for longer than

a second.

Use the dial to select 2 “FullKeyboard”.

User Style

Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard

Hold for longer

than a second

64 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Creating Original Styles (Style Creator)

This instrument has a Style Creator feature that lets you record and save your own

original Styles.

Recorded Styles can be played in the same manner as the preset Styles.

Style data consists of eighteen sections, each of which has eight separate Parts.

The following display appears when entering the Style Creator function.

Style Structure

Main Display of the Style Creator

MAIN A–DINTRO 1–3 ENDING 1–3

Part 1

x 8

8 Parts in each

section

FILL IN A–D

Sections: INTRO 1–3, MAIN A–D, FILL IN A–D,

ENDING 1–3

Currently selected function

by category [ ]/[ ] buttons

< >

For example, set the beat number

by using the dial

Speciﬁed measure and

beat

Current selected section and

selected Part in the section.

Current section

When playing or recording, the

current measure number

appears

Current tempo

Creating Original Styles (Style Creator)

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 65

* Press the [EXIT] button whenever you want to exit from the Style Creator (except during recording).

Follow the Style Creator instructions.

Select a preset Style which is most similar to the Style you want to record.

* If you are creating a Style from scratch, this step is not necessary.

Enter the Style Creator.

*A conﬁrmation message appears asking if you want to create a Style from scratch.

Entire settings

• Beat: 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4

* If you want to change the beat settings, you should clear all the previous data.

Section settings

• Section: INTRO 1–3, MAIN A–D, FILL IN A–D, ENDING 1–3.

• Measure Length: 1–32

Part Settings

• Recording Part: RHY 1–2, BASS, CHD 1–2, PAD, PHR 1–2

• Voice: Select the recording Voice.

• Part Volume: Determines the Part volume.

• Pan: Determines the pan position.

• Reverb level

• Chorus level

Recording the Part

• Recording start/stop

• Clear the recorded drum Voice

Editing

• Quantize: 1/4, 1/6, 1/8, 1/12, 1/16, 1/24, 1/32

• Part clear

Saving

• Save the Style data

Exit from the Style Creator

Record another section

Record another Part

Creating Original Styles (Style Creator)

66 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Press one of the [STYLE CATEGORY]

buttons.

Select a [STYLE CATEGORY] button which is

most similar to the Style you want to create.

Select a Style which is most similar to

the Style you want to create.

You can also select a Style from the User

Styles.

If you are creating a Style from scratch, go on

to the next step.

Press [REC] and enter the Style Creator

operation.

A conﬁrmation message appears.

Select the production manner of Style

Creator.

If you are creating a Style from scratch, press

the [YES] button.

If you are creating a Style by using a speciﬁed

Style (step 2), press the [NO] button.

Set the desired measures and beats,

and then record the Style for each Part

and for each section.

Save the recorded Style data to a User

Style.

Press [EXIT] to exit from the Style Cre-

ator.

Basic Operation

• If there is not enough capacity left on the instrument to save the

data, an appropriate message will appear in the display. Erase

unwanted data from the instrument to make more memory available.

NOTE

● Adjust individual track volumes before record-

ing.

You can use the mixer function (page 75) to adjust

individual track volumes before proceeding with

step 3.

Creating Original Styles (Style Creator)

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 67

Select the production manner of Style Creator (refer steps 1–4 on page 66) and go on to the next instruc-

tions.

■Entire settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

If you change the Beat value, you will need to clear

all data and then make a new Style from scratch.

Press the CATEGORY[ ]/[ ] button repeat-

edly until “Beat” appears in the display.

Rotate the dial and select the Beat number.

Range: 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4

Press the [EXECUTE] button to set the Beat.

When you create a Style based on another

Style, the following message appears.

If you want to clear the Style and make a new

one, press the [+/YES] button.

■Section Settings:● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Press the CATEGORY[ ]/[ ] button repeat-

edly until “Section” appears in the display.

Rotate the dial or directly press the [SEC-

TION] button in the STYLE CONTROL area

to select a recorded section.

Settings: INTRO 1–3, MAIN A–D, FILL IN

A–D, ENDING 1–3

Press the [EXECUTE] button to set the sec-

tion.

Press the CATEGORY[ ]/[ ] button repeat-

edly until “Length” appears in the display.

Rotate the dial and select the Measure

Length.

Range: 1–32

Press the [EXECUTE] button to set the Mea-

sure Length.

Parameter Settings, Recording and Saving

Beat

< >

Select a section

Measure Length

< >

•You can also select the FILL IN A–D section by pressing the [AUTO

FILL IN] button and then select FILL IN A–D by using the dial.

NOTE

< >

• If you set a length smaller than that of the previous one, any data

existing beyond the new length will be deleted.

NOTE

Creating Original Styles (Style Creator)

68 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

■Part Settings:● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Press the CATEGORY[ ]/[ ] button repeat-

edly until “Part” appears in the display.

Rotate the dial and select a recorded Part.

Range: RHYTHM 1–2, BASS, CHORD 1–2,

PAD, PHRASE 1–2

Press the [EXECUTE] button to set the Part.

Press the CATEGORY[ ]/[ ] button repeat-

edly until “Voice” appears in the display.

Press a desired [VOICE CATEGORY] button

to select the Voice category.

Rotate the dial to select a Voice.

Range: When RHY 1 is selected as the Part, all

Voices can be selected.

When RHY 2 is selected as the Part,

drum Voices can be selected.

When other Part is selected, all Voices

excepting drums can be selected.

Press the CATEGORY[ ]/[ ] button repeat-

edly until “Part Volume” appears in the dis-

play.

Rotate the dial and set the Part Volume.

Range: 0–127

Press the CATEGORY[ ]/[ ] button repeat-

edly until “Pan” appears in the display.

Rotate the dial and set the Pan position.

Range: 0–64–127

Press the CATEGORY[ ]/[ ] button repeat-

edly until “Reverb Level” appears in the dis-

play.

Rotate the dial and set the Reverb depth.

Range: 0–127

Press the CATEGORY[ ]/[ ] button repeat-

edly until “Chorus Level” appears in the

display.

Rotate the dial and set the Chorus depth.

Range: 0–127

■Recording a Part ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Conﬁrm that desired section name appears at the

upper right area in the display, and then follow the

instructions below.

Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button

and press a [RHY 1] or [RHY 2] button in the

rhythm Part.

“RHYTHM1” or “RHYTHM2” appears in the

display.

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

A REC mark appears at the recorded Part on

the display. In this condition, the [PART] but-

ton also changes to red.

Play the keyboard to check that the appropriate

drum Voices can be heard. You can mute the

Parts during recording (except for the Part

you’re recording), by simply pressing the

[PART] button so that the mute mark is indi-

cated at the Part. In this condition, the [PART]

button also changes from green to unlit.

Select a Part

Select a Voice

Part Volume

Pan

Reverb Level

Chorus Level

< >

Rhythm Part recording

Lit in Red, recorded Part

Lit in Green, contains data and selected

as playing Part

Unlit, does not contain data or is

a non-playing Part (mute)

Part buttons indication

Current measure number

Contains data, but is muted (Part OFF)

Contains data, sounds (Part ON)

Contains no data

Recorded part

Creating Original Styles (Style Creator)

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 69

If you want to rehearse a part before recording,

press the [EXECUTE] button. The REC mark

for the Part in the display will turn off.

In this situation, you can start rehearsing by

pressing the [START/STOP] button.

Return to the Part record standby mode, after

stopping rehearsal by pressing the [START/

STOP] button, and then press the [EXECUTE]

button again.

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin

recording.

Play the keyboard and record the drum

Voices.

Since the entire Style plays repeatedly, you can

record at any point you like.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop

recording.

To clear the recorded drum Voices, after starting

recording (refer to step 3 of the recording opera-

tion), follow the instructions below.

Only the rhythm Part can be cleared in this opera-

tion; other Parts (e.g., bass or chord) cannot be

cleared.

Press and hold the [-] button and play the

key or keys that correspond to the cleared

Voice.

Press the [START/STOP] button to exit from

the clear operation.

Press and hold the [REC] button and press

the appropriate [PART] button to which you

want to record.

Press the [EXECUTE] button and check that

the REC mark appears at the Part in the dis-

play. In this condition, the [PART] button

also changes to red.

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin

recording.

Play the keyboard and record your playing.

● Rules for recording to non-rhythm Parts:

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop

recording.

Record to other Parts in other sections.

Save the Style data (page 71)

Clear the recorded drum Voices

Bass, Chord, Pad and Phrase Part record-

ing

• Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording

the Bass and PHRASE Parts (i.e., C, D, E, G,

A, and B).

• Use only the C chord tones when recording

the CHORD and PAD Parts (i.e., C, E, G, and

B).

Using the data recorded here, the auto accom-

paniment (Style playback) is appropriately con-

verted depending on the chord changes you

make during your performance.

CRC CRC

C = Chord notes

C, R = Recommended notes

•Any desired chord or chord progression can be used for the INTRO

and ENDING sections.

NOTE

Creating Original Styles (Style Creator)

70 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

■Editing (Quantize and part clear) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

This function allows you to automatically align the

timing of all recorded notes.

Press the CATEGORY[ ]/[ ] button repeat-

edly until “Quantize” appears in the display.

Rotate the dial and select the value.

Settings: 1/4, 1/6, 1/8, 1/12, 1/16, 1/24, 1/32

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

The “UNDO” message appears.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again if you

want to replace with the previous Quantize

value.

Select a desired section for clearing, and then fol-

low the instructions below.

Press the CATEGORY[ ]/[ ] button repeat-

edly until “Part Clear” appears in the dis-

play.

Press and hold a desired [PART] button for

longer than a second.

A conﬁrmation message appears.

Press the [+/YES] button to clear the

selected Part.

Quantize

1/2 3/41/4

1/41/8

1/21/4

Actual recorded

note

When Quantize

is set to 1/8

When Quantize

is set to 1/4

1 measure

< >

• If the recorded Part is not speciﬁed, Quantize cannot be set. Specify

the Part for recording and then use the quantize function.

• The undo icon on the display will disappear if you exit from the cur-

rent display.

NOTE

Clearing a recorded Part

< >

•You can also select a Part by rotating the dial. In this case, press the

[EXECUTE] button to clear.

NOTE

Creating Original Styles (Style Creator)

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 71

Saving the recorded data

Press the CATEGORY[ ]/[ ] button repeat-

edly until “Save” appears in the display.

A new user Style number is applied automati-

cally and indicated in the display.

If you want to change the user Style num-

ber, select the number by using the dial.

Press [EXECUTE] button to save the data.

A conﬁrmation message appears.

Press [+/YES] button to save the data.

The following display appears when saving is

complete.

You can go back and set other sections with the

Section Settings (page 67) and then record

additional parts.

To save the Style to USB ﬂash memory, refer to

the “Saving a User Song or User Style” section

on page 86.

Saving the data

< >

• If you select a User Style Number that already contains data,

the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data.

CAUTION

• If you want to exit from the Style Creator without saving, press the

[EXIT] button.

•A maximum of 50 Style ﬁles can be saved.

NOTE

● Deleting a User Style

1 Conﬁrm that USB ﬂash memory is not con-

nected to the [TO DEVICE] terminal.

2 Press the [FILE MENU] button.

3 Use the Dial to select the user style data you

want to delete.

4 Press the [EXECUTE] button.

5 Press the [+/YES] button to delete the ﬁle.

• If you select a User Style Number that already contains data, an

“Overwrite?” conﬁrmation prompt appears. If you wish to save and

overwrite, press the [+/YES] button.

NOTE

72 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Song Settings

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

as many times as necessary to call up

Song Volume.

Use the dial to set the Song volume

between 000 and 127.

When playing the Song you can change the tempo as required. Press the TEMPO [+]/[-] buttons. The tempo

display will appear and you can use the dial or the TEMPO [+]/[-] buttons to set to tempo to anywhere from

5 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute.

You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing both the TEMPO [+] and [-] buttons.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Main display.

Pressing the TEMPO [+]/[-] buttons allows single-step changes. Pressing and holding either button contin-

uously increases or decreases the value.

Song Volume

< >

Can be set between 000 and 127Song Volume

• Song volume can be adjusted while a Song is selected.

NOTE

Changing the Tempo

Song Settings

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 73

You can specify a section of a Song—“A” is the start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback.

The A-B Repeat function is also very convenient for practicing when used along with the score display fea-

tures of the instrument (page 30).

Play the Song (page 27) and press the

[A B] button at the beginning of the

section you want to repeat (the “A”

point).

Press the [A B] button a second time

at the end of the section you want to

repeat (the “B” point).

The speciﬁed A-B section of the Song

will now play repeatedly.

You can cancel A-B repeat playback at any

time by pressing the [A B] button.

A-B Repeat

Point A

Point B

• The current measure number is shown in the display during play-

back.

• If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the

Song press the [A B] button before starting playback of the Song.

NOTE

Song Settings

74 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Each “track” of a Song plays a different part of the Song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc.

You can mute individual tracks and play the muted part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute tracks

other than the ones you want to listen to.

Use the [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] button to select the TR 1–8, TR 9–16 and use the SONG PART [1/9]–

[8/16] buttons to mute or un-mute the corresponding tracks ([1]–[8], [9]–[16]). Each track button is lit in

green when that track is not muted, and is unlit when the track is muted. Furthermore, the border around the

track number in the display disappears when that track is muted.

Refer to page 32 for information about the Song track conﬁguration.

Press the [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] but-

ton until the desired track is shown on

the display.

The following items appear on the display

when you press the [REGIST/PART [MIXER]]

button.

“REGIST”

➝ “TR 1–8” ➝ “TR 9–16”.

Press the desired TRACK [1/9]–[8/16]

buttons to set the mute track.

To cancel the mute, press the appropriate REG-

ISTRATION MEMORY [1/9]–[8/16] buttons

again.

Muting Independent Song Parts

Track number without border ... Track contains data but is muted.

Track number with border ... Track contains data and is not muted.

No track number ... No data.

REGIST.

TR 1 – 8

TR 9 – 16

Display Setting

TR 1–8

Specify the mute tracks of 1–8 by press-

ing the [1/9]–[8/16] buttons.

TR 9–16

Specify the mute tracks of 9–16 by

pressing the [1/9]–[8/16] buttons.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 75

MIXER

This instrument has a MIXER feature that lets you control the Part Volume, Pan, Reverb

Level and Chorus Level during playing of the Song or Style.

In the Song mode: Determine the group of track numbers, 1–8 or 9–16, then control the functions below.

In the Style mode: Directly control the functions below.

• Track ON/OFF

• Select the Mixer Parameter (Volume, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level)

Current track and its value are highlighted on the display.

In this example, Track 1 is selected and is set to ON, and its volume is 110.

Press and hold the [REGIST/PART

[MIXER]] button for longer than a sec-

ond so that the Mixer display appears.

To exit the mixer operation, press the [EXIT]

button.

When in the Song mode, press the

[REGIST/PART [MIXER]] button and

select the desired group of tracks, 1–8

or 9–16.

The button toggles between tracks 1–8 and 9–

16.

In the Style mode, tracks 9–16 are selected

automatically.

Mixer Display

Basic operation

Current track ON/

OFF and Value

Track number

Parameter

Control the parameter by using the

dial or the [+/YES], [-/NO] buttons.

When track 1–8

is selected

When track 9–

16 is selected

MIXER

76 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Press the desired [TRACK] button you

want to control.

The selected track will be changed to ON auto-

matically.

Control the Parameter ON/OFF or other

parameters in each track.

(Refer to the following instructions.)

Repeat steps 2–4 and set other tracks if neces-

sary.

Press [EXIT] to exit from the mixer oper-

ation.

■Track ON/OFF ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Determines whether each is track ON or OFF

(unmuted or muted)

Select the track you want to set ON/OFF (refer to

steps 1–3 of basic operation on page 75), and then

follow the instructions below.

The selected track will be changed to ON automat-

ically.

Press the [TRACK] button again to set it

to OFF.

The button toggles between ON and OFF, and

the [TRACK] button also changes between

Green to unlit.

■Parameter controls ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Enter the Mixer mode (refer to steps 1–3 of basic

operation on page 75), and then set the Volume,

Pan, Reverb Level and Chorus Level.

Press the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] button to

select the desired item.

Rotate the dial and set the parameter.

Repeat steps 1–2 and set other tracks if neces-

sary.

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the

mixer operation.

Track ON/OFF and other parameter controls

Volume Determines the Part volume. Range: 0–127

Pan Determines the Pan position. Range: 0–64–127

Reverb

Level

Determines the Reverb depth. Range: 0–127

Chorus

Level

Determines the Chorus depth. Range: 0–127

< >

Current

volume

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 77

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings

This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite set-

tings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 64 complete setups can be saved

(8 banks of 8 setups each).

Color is used to indicate the status of individual memory buttons for the selected bank.

• Lit in Green .......Contains data

• Unlit ..................Does not contain data

• Lit in Red ..........Currently set button

Set the panel controls as required—

select a Voice, accompaniment Style,

etc.

Press the REGIST BANK [+]/[-] buttons

until the desired bank number is shown

on the display.

You can also use the dial in the Bank Select

display.

To store the current panel settings,

simultaneously hold down the [MEM-

ORY] button and press one of the REG-

ISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons.

The button corresponding to the stored Regis-

tration lights in Red.

Saving to the Registration Memory

8 Banks

Memory 1

Up to 64 presets (eight banks of eight each) can be memorized.

Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4 Memory 5 Memory 6 Memory 7 Memory 8

Bank number

• Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during Song play-

back.

NOTE

•You can also save your panel settings memorized to registration

memory button into USB ﬂash memory as a user ﬁle (see page 85).

NOTE

• If you select a Registration Memory number that already con-

tains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the

new data.

CAUTION

• Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registra-

tion memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost.

CAUTION

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings

78 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Make sure that “REGIST” appears in the display (press the [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] button until it is

shown).

Press the REGIST BANK [+]/[-] button to

select the desired bank.

You can also use the dial to select the bank

number.

Press the REGISTRATION MEMORY

button, [1]–[8], containing the settings

you want to recall. The panel controls

will be instantly set accordingly.

The button to which the data is stored lights in

green and the currently set button is in red.

Recalling a Registration Memory

Bank number

● Settings that can be saved to the Regis-

tration Memory

• Style settings*

Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF,

Split Point, Style settings (Main A–D, INTRO 1–

3, ENDING 1–3), Style Volume, Tempo, Chord

Fingering, Upper Octave

•Voice settings

Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume,

Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP

Level, Dry Level), Dual Voice settings (Dual ON/

OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan,

Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP Level, Dry

Level), Left Voice settings (Left ON/OFF, Voice

number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,

Chorus Level, DSP Level, Dry Level)

• Effect settings

Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Panel Sustain ON/

OFF, DSP ON/OFF, DSP Type

• Harmony settings

Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type, Harmony

Volume

• Other settings

Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Upper Octave

*Style settings are not available for Registration Memory

when using the Song features.

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 79

Keep in mind that groups of data cannot be deleted or cleared from the instrument at a single time.

Press the [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] but-

ton a number of times until the “REG-

IST.” item appears.

The item changes in order from “REGIST.” to

“TR 1–8” to “TR 9–16”.

Press the REGIST BANK [+]/[-] button a

number of times until the desired bank

number appears.

The Registration Memory button is lit in green

if Registration data is stored to the memory.

Press and hold the REGISTRATION

MEMORY button corresponding to the

Registration you want to clear for

longer than a second.

A conﬁrmation message will appear in the dis-

play.

Press the [+/YES] button to clear a Reg-

istration Memory.

A conﬁrmation message will appear again in

the display.

Use the [-/NO] button to cancel the clear opera-

tion.

Press the [+/YES] button again to clear

the Registration Memory.

The clear-in-progress message will appear

brieﬂy on the display while the Song is being

cleared.

Registration Clear—Deleting a Specified Registration Memory

Hold for longer

than a second

80 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

The Functions

The “Functions” provide a wide range of both detailed and overall instrument parame-

ters, such as adjusting the tuning, setting the split point, and editing the voices and

effects.

There are 51 function parameters in all.

Find the function you want to set in the

list that begins on page 81.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Select a function. Press the CATEGORY

[] and [ ] buttons as many times as

necessary until the function’s display

name appears in the display.

Take a look at the function list starting on page

81.

The name of the previous item in the list

appears to the upper left, and the name of the

next item in the list appears to the upper right

of the currently selected item.

Use the dial or the [+/YES] and [-/NO]

buttons, to set the parameters.

The [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons are used to

make ON/ OFF type settings: [+/YES] = ON,

[-/NO] = OFF.

In some cases, pressing the [+/YES] button

will execute the selected function, and press-

ing [-/NO] will cancel the selection.

Press the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simulta-

neously to recall the default setting (excepting

the initial setup of MIDI).

Selecting and Setting Functions

< >

Previous item

Function

group

Next item

Current selected item

Parameter

• Increment value by 1.

•ON

•Execute

• Decrement value by 1.

• OFF

• Cancel

Press these simulta-

neously to recall the

default setting.

The Functions

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 81

■ Function Setting List

Group Function Item

Display

Indication

Range/Settings Description

VOLUME Style Volume Style Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style.

Song Volume Song Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song.

OVERALL Tuning Tuning 415.3–466.2 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound.

Pitch Bend

Range

Pitch Bend

Range

01–12 Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments.

Split Point Split Point 036–096

(C1–C6)

Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets

the Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates

the Split (lower) and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point

setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are auto-

matically set to the same value.

Touch Sensitivity Touch Sensitivity 1 (Soft),

2 (Medium),

3 (Hard)

Determines the sensitivity of the feature.

Chord Fingering Chord Fingering 1 (Multi Finger),

2 (FullKeyboard)

Sets the chord detection mode. In the Multi Finger mode

both normal chords and simple chords played to the left of

the split point are detected. In the Full Keyboard mode

normal chords played anywhere on the keyboard will be

detected, and the notes played will sound as well.

MAIN

VOICE

Volume Main Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main Voice.

Octave Main Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main Voice.

Pan Main Pan 000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Main Voice in the ste-

reo image. The value “0” results in the sound being

panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being

panned full right.

Reverb Level Main Reverb

Level

000–127 Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to

the Reverb effect.

Chorus Level Main Chorus

Level

000–127 Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to

the Chorus effect.

DSP Level Main DSP Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to

the DSP effect.

Dry Level Main Dry Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Main Voice’s unprocessed

signal sounds (no Reverb, Chorus or DSP effect process-

ing).

DUAL

VOICE

Volume Dual Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual Voice.

Octave Dual Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice.

Pan Dual Pan 000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Dual Voice in the ste-

reo image. The value “0” results in the sound being

panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being

panned full right.

Reverb Level Dual Reverb

Level

000–127 Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to

the Reverb effect.

Chorus Level Dual Chorus

Level

000–127 Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to

the Chorus effect.

DSP Level Dual DSP Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to

the DSP effect.

Dry Level Dual Dry Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s unprocessed

signal sounds (no Reverb, Chorus or DSP effect process-

ing).

LEFT VOICE Volume Left Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Left Voice.

Octave Left Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Left Voice.

Pan Left Pan 000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Left Voice in the stereo

image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned

full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned

full right.

Reverb Level Left Reverb

Level

000–127 Determines how much of the Left Voice’s signal is sent to

the Reverb effect.

Chorus Level Left Chorus

Level

000–127 Determines how much of the Left Voice’s signal is sent to

the Chorus effect.

DSP Level Left DSP Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Left Voice’s signal is sent to

the DSP effect.

Dry Level Left Dry Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Left Voice’s unprocessed

signal sounds (no Reverb, Chorus or DSP effect process-

ing).

The Functions

82 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

* All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simultaneously. (The exception

to this is Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.)

EFFECT Reverb Type Reverb Type 01–36 Determines the Reverb type, including off (36). (See the

list on page 126)

Chorus Type Chorus Type 1–45 Determines the Chorus type, including off (45). (See the

list on page 127)

DSP Type DSP Type 001–239 Determines the DSP type, including off (239). (See the list

on page 128)

Master EQ Type Master EQ Type

1 (Speaker 1),

2 (Speaker 2),

3 (Headphones),

4 (Line Out 1),

5 (Line Out 2)

Sets the equalizer applied to the instrument output

(including speakers, headphones or other output) for opti-

mum sound in different listening situations.

HARMONY Harmony Type Harmony Type 01–26 Determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 125)

Harmony Vol-

ume

Harmony

Volume

000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect.

PC MODE PC Mode PC Mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings for connecting to a computer

(page 95).

MIDI Local ON/OFF Local ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls

the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 94)

External Clock

ON/OFF

External Clock ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the

internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 94)

Keyboard Out Keyboard Out ON/OFF Determines whether keyboard performance data of the

instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF).

Style Out Style Out ON/OFF Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via

USB TO HOST or not (OFF) during Style playback.

Song Out Song Out ON/OFF Determines whether Song data is transmitted (ON) via

USB TO HOST or not (OFF) during Song playback.

Initial Setup Initial Setup YES/NO Allows you to instantly send a data ‘snapshot’ of all panel

settings to a computer or sequencer. Press [+/YES] to

send, or press [-/NO] to cancel.

METRO-

NOME

Time Signature

Numerator

Time Signature

Numerator

00–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome.

Time Signature

Denominator

Time Signature

Denominator

2, 4, 8, 16 Sets the length of each metronome beat.

Bell ON/OFF Bell ON/OFF Determines whether the Metronome bell sounds at the

ﬁrst beat in each measure or not.

Volume Metronome

Volume

000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome.

SCORE Quantize Quantize

1 (1/4 note),

2 (1/4 note triplet),

3 (1/8 note),

4 (1/8 note triplet),

5 (1/16 note),

6 (1/16 note triplet),

7 (1/32 note),

8 (1/32 note triplet)

Depending on the Song data, you can make the score

more readable by adjusting the timing of the notes. This

determines the minimum timing resolution used in the

Song. For example, if there are both quarter notes and

eighth notes in the Song, you should set this value to

“eighth note.” Any notes or rests shorter than this value

will not be shown in the score.

Right-Part Right-Part GuideTrack 1–

Determines the guide track number for your right hand

lesson. The setting is effective for Songs except for preset

Songs.

Left-Part Left-Part GuideTrack 1–

Determines the guide track number for your left hand les-

son. The setting is effective for Songs except for preset

Songs.

UTILITY Demo Cancel Demo Cancel ON/OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not.

When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even

if the [DEMO] button is pressed.

TG Mode TG Mode XG/Normal Determines whether the external Song is played accu-

rately in XG format or not. When it is set to XG, the exter-

nal Song is played accurately in XG format, but the Song

data may cause changes in the sound of your keyboard-

played parts.

LANGUAGE Language Language English/Japa-

nese

Determines the display language for the demo displays,

Song ﬁle names, lyrics and certain display messages. All

other messages and names are displayed in English.

When this is set to Japanese, the ﬁle names are displayed

in the Japanese font. The lyrics display follows the lan-

guage setting originally made in the Song data; however,

when no such setting exists, the setting here is used.

Group Function Item

Display

Indication

Range/Settings Description

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 83

Using USB Flash Memory

USB ﬂash memory is a memory medium used for storing data. When a USB ﬂash mem-

ory device is inserted in this instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, user Songs and

user Styles created on the instrument and the registered settings can be saved to or

loaded from the device. USB ﬂash memory can also be used to transfer Song, Style

MDB data downloaded from the Internet to the instrument. Furthermore, user Songs

saved to USB ﬂash memory in MIDI ﬁle format can also be used with these features.

In this section we’ll look at the procedures for setting up and formatting USB ﬂash

memory devices, as well as for saving and loading data to and from them.

Before using a USB device, read through the “Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal”

section on page 93. For information about USB devices compatible with the instrument, see “Connection to

a USB Storage Device” on page 90.

Connect a USB ﬂash memory to the

USB TO DEVICE terminal, being careful

to insert it in the proper direction. (Do

not try to force an improper connec-

tion.)

Check that the “CONNECT” message is

shown in the MAIN display.

You can go to the FILE CONTROL display

from which you can access USB ﬂash memory

operations by pressing the [FILE MENU] but-

ton from this display.

(Do not press this button now, but only when

instructed to in the sections below.)

* This particular menu item has no relation to USB opera-

tions, but it can be used to delete a User Song.

If you don’t have a USB ﬂash memory device, you will need to purchase one (or more, as

needed).

The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB storage

devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB storage devices that you purchase.

Before purchasing a USB storage device, please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an autho-

rized Yamaha distributor (see list at end of the Owner’s Manual) for advice.

Using USB Flash Memory

• No sound will be produced if you play the keyboard while the FILE

CONTROL display is showing. Also, in this state only buttons related

to ﬁle functions will be active.

NOTE

• The FILE CONTROL display will not appear in any of the following

cases:

• During style or song playback.

• While data is being loaded from a USB ﬂash memory.

NOTE

Menu Reference Page

USB Format 84

Load 87

Regist Save 85

User Song Save 86

User Style Save 86

USB Delete 88

*User Delete 88

A message (information or conﬁrmation dialog)

sometimes appears in the display to facilitate

operation. Refer to the “Messages” section on

page 108 for an explanation of each message.

CONNECT

Using USB Flash Memory

84 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

A new USB ﬂash memory device must be formatted before it can be used by this instrument.

After connecting the USB ﬂash memory

to be formatted to the instrument’s USB

TO DEVICE terminal, check that the

“CONNECT” message is shown in the

MAIN display.

Press the [FILE MENU] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

to select the USB Format item.

The display prompts you for conﬁrmation.

Press the [EXECUTE] button and the

display prompts you for conﬁrmation.

You can press the [-/NO] button at this point to

cancel the operation.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+/YES] button, and the format oper-

ation will begin.

A message appears in the display indi-

cating that the operation is complete.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Formatting USB Flash Memory

• If you format a USB ﬂash memory that already contains data, all of

the data will be erased. Be careful not to erase important data

when using the format function.

CAUTION

< >

• Once the format-in-progress message appears in the display,

the format operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the

power or remove the USB ﬂash memory device during this

operation.

CAUTION

• If the USB ﬂash memory device has been write-protected, an appro-

priate message will appear in the display and you will not be able to

execute the operation.

NOTE

Using USB Flash Memory

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 85

The registration data you created in the instrument can be saved to a USB ﬂash memory device.

Make sure that a appropriately format-

ted USB ﬂash memory device has been

properly connected to the instrument’s

USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that a

“CONNECT” message is shown in the

MAIN display.

Press the [FILE MENU] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

to locate the Regist Save item.

A default ﬁle name will automatically be cre-

ated.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor

will appear below the ﬁrst character in

the ﬁle name.

Change the ﬁle name as necessary.

• The [1] button moves the cursor to the left,

and the [2] button moves it to the right.

• Use the dial to select a character for the cur-

rent cursor location.

• The [8] button deletes the character at the cur-

sor location.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-

play prompts you for conﬁrmation.

You can cancel the save operation at this point

by pressing the [-/NO] button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+/YES] button, and the save opera-

tion will begin.

The Registration data will be stored to the

USER FILE folder in the USB ﬂash memory

device.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the

MAIN display.

Saving the Registration Data

● To Overwrite an Existing File

If you want to overwrite a ﬁle that already exists

on the USB ﬂash memory device, use the dial or

the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons to select the

ﬁle, then skip ahead to step 6.

< >

• If the USB ﬂash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate

message will appear in the display and you will not be able to exe-

cute the operation.

• If there is not enough capacity left on the USB ﬂash memory device

to save the data, an appropriate message will appear in the display

and you will not be able to save the data. Erase unwanted ﬁles from

the USB ﬂash memory device to make more memory available

(page 88), or use a different USB device.

• Refer to the “Messages” list on page 108 for other possible errors

that might prevent you from completing the operation.

NOTE

Cursor

right

Delete

character

Cursor

left

Select

characters

• Once the save-in-progress message appears in the display, the

operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or

remove the USB ﬂash memory device during this operation.

CAUTION

• If an existing ﬁlename is speciﬁed the display prompts you for conﬁr-

mation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+/YES] if it is OK to overwrite the ﬁle,

or [-/NO] to cancel.

• The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation

depends on the particular USB ﬂash memory device you are using.

NOTE

Using USB Flash Memory

86 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

This operation saves user Songs (Song numbers 001–005) or user Styles to USB ﬂash memory. Songs are

saved in SMF Format 0.

Make sure that a properly formatted

USB ﬂash memory device has been

properly connected to the instrument’s

USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the

“CONNECT” message is shown in the

MAIN display.

Press the [FILE MENU] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

to locate the User Song or User Style

Save item.

The SOURCE FILE—a user Song name or a

user Style name—will be highlighted.

Use the dial to select the source user

Song or Style.

You can press the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons

simultaneously to select the ﬁrst user Song or

Style.

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

The destination Song or Style will be high-

lighted, and a default name will appear for the

converted Song or Style ﬁle.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor

will appear below the ﬁrst character in

the ﬁle name.

Change the ﬁle name as necessary.

Refer to “Saving the Registration Data” on

page 85 for ﬁlename entry.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-

play prompts you for conﬁrmation.

You can cancel the save operation at this point

by pressing the [-/NO] button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+/YES] button, and the save opera-

tion will begin.

The user Song will be stored to the USER FILE

folder in the USB ﬂash memory device.

A message appears in the display indi-

cating that the operation is complete.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the

MAIN display.

Saving a User Song or User Style

● What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)?

The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the

most common and widely compatible sequence

formats used for storing sequence data. There are

two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large

number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF

Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI

sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0.

< >

The source user Song name.

● To Overwrite an Existing File

If you want to overwrite a ﬁle that already exists

on the USB ﬂash memory device, use the dial or

the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons to select the

ﬁle, then skip ahead to step 8.

The name of the ﬁle to be savedCursor

• Once the save-in-progress message appears in the display, the

operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or

remove the USB ﬂash memory during this operation.

CAUTION

• If an existing ﬁlename is speciﬁed, the display prompts you for con-

ﬁrmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+/YES] if it is OK to overwrite the

ﬁle, or [-/NO] to cancel.

• The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation

depends on the particular USB ﬂash memory device you are using.

NOTE

Using USB Flash Memory

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 87

Registration ﬁles, Style ﬁles, Song ﬁles and MDB ﬁles residing on a USB ﬂash memory can be loaded to

the instrument.

You can also play the Song or Style ﬁle directly without loading (see page 89).

With the USB ﬂash memory device con-

taining the ﬁle you want to load con-

nected to the USB TO DEVICE

connector, check that the “CONNECT”

message is shown in the MAIN display.

Press the [FILE MENU] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

to locate the Load item.

Use the dial to select the Registration,

Style, Song or MDB ﬁle you want to

load.

All user ﬁles in the USB ﬂash memory device

will be displayed ﬁrst, followed by the Regis-

tration ﬁles.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-

play prompts you for conﬁrmation.

You can cancel the load operation at this point

by pressing the [-/NO] button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+/YES] button, and the load opera-

tion will begin.

A message appears in the display indi-

cating that the operation is complete.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Loading Registration Files, Style Files, Song Files or MDB Files

• If the same ﬁle name already exists in the instrument’s internal

memory, it will be overwritten.

CAUTION

< >

• The instrument will not recognize the style ﬁle if it is moved out of

the USER FILES folder.

NOTE

• Once the load-in-progress message appears in the display, the

operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or

remove the USB ﬂash memory during this operation.

CAUTION

Using USB Flash Memory

88 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

This procedure deletes selected Registration ﬁles, Song ﬁles and Style ﬁles from a USB ﬂash memory

device.

Make sure that the USB ﬂash memory

device containing the ﬁle(s) you want to

delete has been properly connected to

the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE termi-

nal, and that the “CONNECT” is shown

in the MAIN display.

Press the [FILE MENU] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

to locate the USB Delete item.

Select the ﬁle you want to delete.

You can press the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons

simultaneously to select the ﬁrst Song or user

ﬁle on the USB ﬂash memory.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-

play prompts you for conﬁrmation.

You can cancel the delete operation at this

point by pressing the [-/NO] button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+/YES] button, and the delete oper-

ation will begin.

A message appears in the display indi-

cating that the operation is complete.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Deleting Data from USB Flash Memory

< >

● User Delete

This procedure deletes the selected User Songs in

the instrument’s internal memory.

1 Press the [FILE MENU] button.

2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to

locate the User Delete item.

3 Follow the procedure described above from step

• Once the delete-in-progress message appears in the display,

the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or

remove the USB ﬂash memory during this operation.

CAUTION

• If the USB ﬂash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate

message will appear in the display and you will not be able to exe-

cute the operation.

NOTE

< >

Using USB Flash Memory

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 89

Make sure that the USB ﬂash memory

device containing the Song or Style you

want to play has been properly con-

nected to the instrument’s USB TO

DEVICE terminal, and that the “CON-

NECT” is shown in the MAIN display.

To play a Song ﬁle, press the [SONG

MODE] button so that it lights. To play a

Style ﬁle, press the [SONG MODE] but-

ton so that it is unlit.

Press the [USB] button.

Use the dial to select a Song or a Style

you want to play.

Songs can be saved in a hierarchy when saved

to USB ﬂash memory using a computer (refer

to page 91).

You can move the directory in the USB mem-

ory by pressing the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] but-

ton.

Press the [>>

/■] button.

Playing Songs or Styles Saved to USB Flash Memory

< >

90 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Connections

q USB TO HOST terminal

This terminal allows direct connection to a per-

sonal computer. Refer to “Connecting a Per-

sonal Computer” on page 92 for more

information.

w USB TO DEVICE terminal

This terminal allows connection to USB stor-

age devices. Refer to “Connection to a USB

Storage Device” below.

By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you can save data you’ve created, as well as read or

play the data from the connected device.

■Compatible USB storage

devices

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A USB storage device, such as a ﬂoppy disk drive

and ﬂash memory can be connected to the USB TO

DEVICE terminal. Other USB devices such as a

computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used.

Before purchasing USB storage devices, please

consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized

Yamaha distributor (see list at end of the Owner’s

Manual) for advice.

■Connection to a USB storage

device

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Connectors

Connection to a USB Storage Device

•Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage

device, or connecting/disconnecting the cable too often. Doing so

may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hang-

ing up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as in the

Save and Delete operations), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do

NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the

power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either

or both devices.

CAUTION

• Some USB memory devices may require more current than the

instrument can supply, causing the instrument’s over-current pro-

tection function to be activated and making it impossible to use

the device. If this occurs “OverCurrent” will appear in the lower-

right area of the MAIN display. To restore normal operation remove

the USB device from the USB TO DEVICE connector and turn the

instrument’s power off and then back on again.

CAUTION

Connections

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 91

Backing up the instrument data to a computer

Once you’ve saved data to a USB ﬂash memory

device, you can copy the data to the hard disk of

your computer, then archive and organize the ﬁles

as desired. Simply reconnect the device as shown

below.

Copying ﬁles from a computer hard disk to

USB ﬂash memory and then playing back the

Songs on the instrument

Files on a computer’s hard disk can be transferred

to the instrument by ﬁrst copying them to a USB

ﬂash memory device, then connecting/inserting the

media to the instrument. User ﬁles, Style ﬁles and

MIDI Songs can be copied to a USB ﬂash memory

device from the hard disk of the computer. Once

you’ve copied the data, connect the device to the

USB TO DEVICE terminal of the instrument and

play back the MIDI Songs, or load the user ﬁle or

Style ﬁle on the instrument.

Saves internal data to a USB ﬂash memory.

USB TO DEVICE terminal

Instrument

USB ﬂash

memory

Disconnect the USB ﬂash memory device from the

computer and connect it to the instrument.

Backing up data to a computer and

organizing ﬁles/folders

USB terminal

Computer

USB ﬂash

memory

Copying ﬁles from the computer’s hard disk to

the USB storage device

Instrument

Disconnect the USB storage device from the

computer and connect it to the instrument.

USB ﬂash

memory

USB ﬂash

memory

Computer

USB TO DEVICE terminal

Reading ﬁles on the USB storage device

from the instrument

USB terminal

• In order to play Songs or Styles copied to a USB ﬂash memory

from a computer or other device, the ﬁles must be stored either

in the USB ﬂash memory’s root directory or a ﬁrst, second, or

third level folder. Songs stored here can be selected and played

as USB Song (page 28). Songs stored in fourth-level-folders

created inside a third-level folder cannot be selected and

played by this instrument.

IMPORTANT

USB ﬂash memory (Root)

Can be

selected/

played.

Cannot be

selected/

played.

Song

File

Song

Folder

root

The directory can be moved using

the CATEGORY [ ]/[ ] buttons.

< >

Song

File

Song

Folder

Song

File

Song

Folder

Song

File

Song

Folder

Connections

92 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer.

● Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 94).

● Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 96).

The connection procedure is as follows:

Install the USB-MIDI driver on your

computer.

The USB-MIDI driver is included on the CD-

ROM.

Installation of the USB MIDI driver is

described on pages 101–102.

Connect the USB terminal of the com-

puter to the USB terminal on the instru-

ment using a standard USB cable (USB

cable sold separately).

The supplied CD-ROM includes instructions on

how to download the Musicsoft Downloader appli-

cation from the Internet. This application lets you

transfer Song ﬁles from your computer to the

instrument’s ﬂash memory. For instructions about

how to install Musicsoft Downloader and how to

transfer Song ﬁles, see pages 103, 96.

■ Precautions when using the [USB TO

HOST] terminal

When connecting the computer to the [USB TO

HOST] terminal, make sure to observe the follow-

ing points. Failing to do so risks freezing the com-

puter and corrupting or losing the data. If the

computer or the instrument freezes, restart the

application software or the computer OS, or turn

the power to the instrument off then on again.

Connecting a Personal Computer

USB cable

Instrument

Computer

USB TO HOST terminal

• Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters.

• Before connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal,

exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as sus-

pended, sleep, standby).

• Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the com-

puter to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.

•Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument

on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the [USB TO

HOST] terminal.

• Quit any open application software on the computer.

• Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instru-

ment. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the key-

board or playing back a Song.)

• While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should

wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when

turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when

alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.

CAUTION

Connections

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 93

■ Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal

This instrument features a built-in [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure

to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below.

● Compatible USB devices

• USB storage devices (ﬂash memory, ﬂoppy disk drive,

hard disk drive, etc.)

The instrument does not necessarily support all commer-

cially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee

operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before pur-

chasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please

visit the following web page:

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

● Connecting USB device

• When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO

DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on the

device is appropriate and that it is connected in the

proper direction.

• Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard,

you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with

the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is

that of USB 1.1.

● Using USB Storage Devices

By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you

can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as

well as read data from the connected device.

The number of USB storage device to be used

Up to one USB storage device can be connected to the

[USB TO DEVICE] terminal.

Formatting USB storage media

When a USB storage device is connected or media is

inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format

the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation (page

84).

To protect your data (write-protect)

To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased,

apply the write-protect provided with each storage device

or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device,

make sure to disable write-protect.

Connecting/removing USB storage device

Before removing the media from the device, make sure that

the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save,

Copy and Delete operations).

•For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device.

NOTE

• Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot

be used.

NOTE

• Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instru-

ment, they cannot be used for saving data.

NOTE

• The format operation overwrites any previously existing data.

Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain

important data.

CAUTION

•Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage

device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often.

Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freez-

ing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data

(such as during Save, Copy, Delete, Load and Format opera-

tions) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the

connection), do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT

remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power

off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or

both devices.

CAUTION

Connections

94 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the com-

puter, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument.

● When the instrument is connected with computer,

it transmits/receives performance data.

■MIDI settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY

[] and [ ]

buttons

to select the item you want to change its

value.

Use the dial to select ON or OFF.

Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer

Item Range/Settings Description

Local ON/OFF

Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal

tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when

local control is off.

External Clock ON/OFF

These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to

a clock signal from an external device (ON).

Keyboard Out ON/OFF

These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or

not (OFF).

Style Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback.

Song Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Song data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback.

USB cable

USB terminalUSB terminal

Instrument

Computer

• If Local is set to OFF, the instrument will not produce any sound

when the keyboard is played.

CAUTION

• If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from

an external device, the Song, Style, and Metronome functions will

not start.

CAUTION

< >

Connections

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 95

■PC Mode ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A number of MIDI settings need to be made when

you want to transfer performance data between the

computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item

can conveniently make multiple settings for you in

one operation. Three settings are available: PC1,

PC2, and OFF.

This setting is not necessary when transferring

Song or backup data between the computer and the

instrument.

* Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Note-

book.

Press and hold the [DEMO] button for

longer than a second so that the PC

Mode item appears.

Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF.

This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a

sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to ﬁrst send and record the panel setup

data before the actual performance data.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

to select the Initial Setup item.

Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO]

to cancel.

PC1 PC2* OFF

Local OFF OFF ON

External Clock ON OFF OFF

Song Out OFF OFF OFF

Style Out OFF OFF OFF

Keyboard Out OFF ON ON

Hold for longer

than a second

• When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s Style, song, demo,

song recording, and lesson features cannot be used.

NOTE

•You can also access the PC Mode item by ﬁrst pressing the [FUNC-

TION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to

locate it (page 80).

< >

NOTE

Initial Send

< >

Connections

96 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

MIDI Songs and Style ﬁles stored to a computer

can be transferred to the instrument.

Backup data can also be transferred from the

instrument to the computer and back.

In order to transfer Songs between your computer

and the instrument you will need to install the USB

MIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM

on your computer, and then install the Musicsoft

Downloader from the Internet. Refer to Installation

Guide on page 99 for details.

■With the Musicsoft Downloader

You Can

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

●Transfer MIDI Songs and Style ﬁles you have

downloaded from the Internet or created on your

computer from the computer to the instrument’s

ﬂash memory.

⇒ Refer to the procedure described

below.

●Backup data can be transferred from the instru-

ment to a computer and back.

⇒ Refer to the procedure described on

page 98.

■Use Musicsoft Downloader to

Transfer Songs from the Com-

puter to the Instrument’s Flash

Memory

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Install the Musicsoft Downloader and

USB MIDI driver to your computer, then

connect the computer and the instru-

ment (pages 103, 101).

After selecting the language, double-

click the Musicsoft Downloader short-

cut icon that is created on the desktop.

This will launch the Musicsoft Down-

loader application and the main window

will appear.

Click the “Add File” button and the Add

File window will appear.

Click the button to the right of “Look in”

and select the folder from the drop-

down menu that appears. Double-click

the “SongData” Folder on the window.

Select the ﬁle you want to transfer to

the instrument, and click “Open”.

Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument

● Data that can be transferred from a computer

• Data capacity (max): 1,895 KB

• The number of ﬁles that can be shown on the dis-

play is as follows:

100 Songs

50 Styles

50 MDBs

• Data Format: SMF format 0, SMF format 1,

Style ﬁle (extension: .sty), Backup

data

Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with

Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher.

•Even if the number of Songs transferred is less than 100, if the amount

of data exceeds 1,895 KB, the Song data cannot be transferred to the

instrument.

NOTE

• If a Song or Style is being played, stop playback before proceeding.

NOTE

• The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader

is running.

NOTE

q Click a Song ﬁle

w Click “Open”

Connections

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 97

A copy of the selected MIDI Song ﬁle

will appear in the “List of ﬁles stored

temporarily” at the top of the window.

The memory medium will also be dis-

played at the bottom of the window to

specify the destination for the transfer.

Click “Instrument,” and then “Flash

memory.”

“Flash memory” here refers to the internal

memory of the instrument.

After selecting the ﬁle in the “List of

ﬁles stored temporarily,” click the down-

ward [Move] button and a conﬁrmation

message will appear. Click [OK] and the

Song will be transferred from the “List

of ﬁles stored temporarily” to the

instrument’s memory.

Close the window to close the Music-

soft Downloader.

To playback a Song stored in the mem-

ory of the instrument, press the [USER]

button. Use the dial to select the Song

you want to play, then press the [

/■]

button to start playback.

q Click “Electronic Musical Instruments”,

and then “Flash Memory”

• Before playing back the Song transferred from your computer, make

sure to close the Musicsoft Downloader program.

NOTE

• Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only will

the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the mem-

ory media may become unstable and its contents may disappear.

CAUTION

• Stored data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or improper

operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a copy of all

important data stored on your computer.

CAUTION

Connections

98 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

■Transferring Backup data from

the Instrument to a Computer

● ●

You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer

Backup data (page

) to a computer. If you click

“Electronic Musical Instruments” in the Musicsoft

Downloader display, and then “System Drive,” a

ﬁle named “PSR-S550.BUP” will appear in the

lower right corner of the Musicsoft Downloader

display. This is the backup data. For details about

how to transfer backup data using the Musicsoft

Downloader application, refer to the Online help in

the application.

• Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument.

NOTE

• The backup data, including the ﬁve User Songs’ is transmitted/

received as a single ﬁle. As a result, all backup data will be over-

written every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when

transferring data.

CAUTION

• Do not rename the backup data on the computer. If you do so it

will not be recognized when transferred to the instrument.

CAUTION

● Using Songs with Notation

In order to use Songs with notation (SMF format 0

only) transferred from a computer for lessons and

practice, you’ll need to specify which channels are

to be played back as the right-hand and left-hand

parts.

1 Press the [USER] button and select the Song

residing in internal memory for which you want

to set the guide track.

2 Press the [FUNCTION] button.

3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to

select the R-Part or L-Part item.

4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to

play back as the speciﬁed right- or left-hand

part.

We recommend that you select channel 1 for the

right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part.

< >

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 99

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

• The software and this Installation Guide are exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation.

• Use of the software and this guide is governed by the SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT which the purchaser

fully agrees to upon breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the AGREEMENT at the

end of this guide before installing the application.)

• Copying of the software or reproduction of this guide in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden with-

out the written consent of the manufacturer.

•Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and can-

not be held responsible for the results of the use of this guide and the software.

• Copying of the commercially available music data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use.

• Software such as the USB-MIDI driver may be revised and updated without prior notice. Make sure to check and

download the latest version of the software from the following site.

http://music.yamaha.com/download

• Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in speciﬁcations and functions will be

announced separately.

● Data Types

This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 101 for software installation instructions.

● Operating System (OS)

The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems.

■

CD-ROM Installation Procedure

● ●

Before breaking the seal of the software packaging, please

read carefully the Software License Agreement at the end

of this guide.

Check the system requirements to make sure

that the software will run on your computer

(page 100).

Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM

drive.

The Start window should appear automatically. (Users

of Windows Vista will need to click [Start.exe] to open

the Start window after inserting the CD-ROM.)

Connect the instrument to the computer

(page 92).

Install the USB-MIDI driver to the computer

(pages 101–102).

Install the software (page 103).

Start up the software.

For subsequent operations, refer to the owner’s manual for

each software program (online help/PDF manual).

If you have any problems in driver installation, refer to the

“Troubleshooting” on page 104.

SPECIAL NOTICES

Important Notices about the CD-ROM

• This CD-ROM is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD

player, DVD player, etc.). Never attempt to use the disk on equip-

ment other than a computer.

CAUTION

•To view PDF ﬁles, you must install Adobe Reader on your computer.

If you do not have Adobe Reader, you can download the application

from the Adobe website at the following URL:

http://www.adobe.com

NOTE

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

100 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

The start window as shown below will appear automatically when you insert the included CD-ROM. (Users of Windows

Vista will need to click [Start.exe] to open the Start window after inserting the CD-ROM.) By clicking each menu on the

Start window, you can access the User Registration page on the Internet and download some of the wide variety of applica-

tion software available.

* All the applications listed above are supplied with online/PDF manuals.

■Minimum System Requirements● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Contents of the CD-ROM

Application / Data Name Folder Name Contents

USB-MIDI Driver

(Windows 2000/XP)

USBdrv2k_

This software is necessary when using your instrument with a computer via a

USB connection. It enables MIDI communication and control between the

instrument and the computer.

USB-MIDI Driver

(Windows Vista/XP x64)

USBdrvVista_

Digital Music Notebook DMN_

Digital Music Notebook is a combination music learning program and online

service that makes it easy and fun to practice and master your favorite Songs.

You can use the convenient and powerful Digital Music Notebook functions

with the demo song after installing Digital Music Notebook.

Digital Music Notebook

Flash Demo

DMN_FlashDemo

Full-motion demo software which introduces all features of the Digital Music

Notebook, from within the program.

Musicsoft Downloader

(Available at Yamaha

website.)

Utilizing a connection between the instrument and a computer, this

application allows you to directly download Song data to the instrument.

Microsoft Downloader can be downloaded from the Internet.

Application/Data OS CPU Memory Hard Disk Display

USB Driver for Windows

2000/XP

Windows 2000/XP Home

Edition/XP Professional

166 MHz or higher; Intel

Pentium

/Celeron

Processor family

32 MB or more

(64 MB or more is

recommended)

at least 3 MB

of free space

USB Driver for Windows

Vista/XP x64

Windows Vista/XP

Professional x64 Edition

800 MHz or higher; Intel

Pentium

/Celeron

Processor family or Intel

compatible processor

512 MB or more

at least 3 MB

of free space

Digital Music Notebook

Windows XP Home/

Professional Edition, Service

Pack 1a (SP1a) more/

Windows Vista

* Only 32-bit is supported.

400 MHz or higher processor

clock speed (Intel

Pentium

/Celeron

Processor family, or

compatible processor

recommended)

128 MB or more

(256 MB or more

is recommended)

at least 150

MB of free

space

1024 x 768

HighColor

(16-bit)

Digital Music Notebook

(Requirements for

playing content with

video included.)

Windows 2000/XP Home

Edition/XP Professional/

Vista

* Only 32-bit is supported.

1 GHz or higher; Intel

Pentium

/Celeron

Processor family (1.4 GHz or

more is recommended)

256 MB or more

•For the System Requirements of the other software available in the CD-ROM, see the respective download page on the web. The download page can be dis-

played by clicking the software menu on the Start window and the “download” button in the next page.

NOTE

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 101

■

USB-MIDI Driver

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

To operate the instrument from your computer via USB,

you’ll need to install the appropriate driver software.

The USB-MIDI driver is software that transfers MIDI data

back and forth between sequence software and the instru-

ment via a USB cable.

• For Windows XP: See below.

• For Windows 2000: See page 102.

• For Windows Vista: See page 102.

Installing the driver on Windows XP

Start the computer and use the “Administra-

tor” account to log on to Windows XP.

Select [Start] ➔ [Control Panel].

If the control panel appears as “Pick a category”, click

“Switch to Classic View” in the upper left of the win-

dow. All control panels and icons will be displayed.

Go to [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver Sign-

ing Options] and check the radio button to the

left of “Ignore” and click [OK].

Click the [OK] button to close System Proper-

ties, and then click “X” in the upper right of

the window to close the Control Panel.

Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM

drive.

The Start window will appear automatically.

First, make sure the POWER switch on the

instrument is set to OFF, then use a USB

cable to connect the USB connector of the

computer to the USB TO HOST connector of

the instrument. When the instrument is turned

on, the computer automatically displays the

“Found New Hardware Wizard.”

If the Wizard window is not displayed automatically,

refer to “Troubleshooting.”

If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in the

lower right corner, wait until “Found New Hardware

Wizard” is displayed. (The Wizard window may take a

while to display on some computers.)

If the Wizard window prompts you to specify whether

or not to connect to Windows Update, select the radio

button for “No, not this time,” then click [Next].

Check the radio button to the left of “Install

the software automatically (Recommended).”

Click [Next]. The system starts the installa-

tion.

When the installation is complete, the system

displays “Completing the Found New Hard-

ware Wizard.” Click [Finish].

(The Wizard window may take a while to display on

some computers.)

Restart the computer.

If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in the

lower right corner, wait until “System Settings

Change” is displayed. (The Wizard window may take a

while to display on some computers.)

When using Windows XP Professional x64

Edition, the Support Module must be

installed.

After installing the USB-MIDI drivers for all the con-

nected USB devices, select “My Computer” from the

Start menu. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select

“Open” from the pop-up menu. Select

“USBdrvVista_” → “XPx64SupportModule” →

“Setup.exe” and launch “Setup.exe.” Follow the on-

screen directions.

The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.

Software Installation

Check the drive name of the CD-ROM drive you will

be using (D:, E:, Q:, etc.) The drive name is displayed

beside the CD-ROM icon in your “My Computer”

folder. The root directory of the CD-ROM drive will

be D:\ , E:\ , or Q:\ , respectively.

Driver

USB Cable

PSR-S550

Computer

Sequence

software

• See the Yamaha Download page at the following URL for up-to-date

news on USB-MIDI driver:

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

NOTE

• If during the installation the system displays “...has not passed Win-

dows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP,” click

[Continue Anyway].

NOTE

• This Wizard window will not appear when using Windows XP Profes-

sional x64 Edition. There is no need to restart the computer.

NOTE

• Once the Support Module is installed, this step is not necessary,

even if you’ve connected a new USB device or updated the USB-

MIDI driver.

NOTE

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

102 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Installing the driver on Windows 2000

Start the computer and use the “Administra-

tor” account to log on to Windows 2000.

Select [My Computer] ➔ [Control Panel] ➔

[System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver Signing] ➔

[File Signature Veriﬁcation], and check the

radio button to the left of “Ignore-Install all

ﬁles, regardless of ﬁle signature” and click

[OK].

Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM

drive.

The Start window will appear automatically.

First, make sure the POWER switch on the

instrument is set to OFF, then use a USB

cable to connect the USB connector of the

computer to the USB TO HOST connector of

the instrument. When the instrument is turned

on, the computer automatically displays the

“Found New Hardware Wizard.” Click [Next].

(The Wizard window may take a while to display on

some computers.)

If the Wizard window is not displayed automatically,

refer to “Troubleshooting” (page 104).

Check the radio button to the left of “Search

for a suitable driver for my device (Recom-

mended).” Click [Next].

Check the “CD-ROM drives” box and uncheck

all other items. Click [Next].

Click [Next].

When the installation is complete, the system

displays “Completing the Found New Hard-

ware Wizard.” Click [Finish].

(The Wizard window may take a while to display on

some computers.)

Restart the computer.

The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.

Installing the driver on Windows Vista

Start the computer and use the “Administra-

tor” account to log on to Windows Vista.

Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM

drive.

The AutoPlay window will appear.

Click [Run Start.exe].

The Start window will appear automatically.

First, make sure the POWER switch on the

instrument is set to OFF, then use a USB

cable to connect the USB connector of the

computer to the USB TO HOST connector of

the instrument. When the instrument is turned

on, the computer automatically displays the

“Found New Hardware” window. Click “Locate

and install driver software (recommended)”.

If the window is not displayed automatically, refer

page 104 for “Troubleshooting.” (Some computers

may take a while to display the window.)

If a message allowing Windows to search

online for driver software appears, click

“Don’t search online.”

If a message prompting you to insert the disk

that came with your device appears, click

[Next].

The system starts the installation.

When the installation is complete, the system

displays the message “The software for this

device has been successfully installed.” Click

[Close].

(Some computers may take a while to display the win-

dow.)

The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.

• The system may ask you to insert a Windows CD-ROM while it

checks for the driver. Specify the “USBdrv2k_” folder of the CD-ROM

drive (such as D:\USBdrv2k_\) and continue the installation.

NOTE

• If the Wizard panel informs you that “The software you are about to

install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature,” click [Yes].

NOTE

• If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue].

NOTE

• If the “Windows Security” window appears, conﬁrm this software is

authored by Yamaha Corporation then click [Install].

NOTE

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 103

■Digital Music Notebook● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM

drive of the computer.

The Start window appears on the screen. Each menu

on the window indicates the application or data con-

tained in the Accessory CD-ROM.

Click “DIGITAL MUSIC NOTEBOOK” on the

Start window.

Click the “Install” button, and follow the on-

screen instructions to install the software.

For Digital Music Notebook operating instructions see

the help menu: launch the Digital Music Notebook

application and click “Help”.

■Musicsoft Downloader ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM

drive of the computer.

The Start window appears on the screen. Each menu

on the window indicates the application or data con-

tained in the Accessory CD-ROM.

Click “Musicsoft Downloader” on the Start

window.

The page which explains the details about Musicsoft

Downloader is displayed on the window.

Click “Musicsoft Downloader Download” but-

ton at the bottom of the window.

The Download page on the web is displayed. Verify

that your system meets the requirements before install-

ing the software.

• When installing Digital Music Notebook to Windows XP, or

Vista, make sure to log on to the Administrator account.

• When installing the Digital Music Notebook, make sure that

Internet Explorer 6.0 (with SP1) or higher is installed to your

computer.

• Credit card settlement is required to purchase Digital Music

Notebook content. Credit card processing may not be possible

for some areas, so please check with your local authorities to

make sure that your credit card can be used.

IMPORTANT

• Use of the DMN (Digital Music Notebook) is governed by the SIBEL-

IUS SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT, which the purchaser fully

agrees to when using the application. Please read carefully the

AGREEMENT on page 106 in English, before using the application.

NOTE

● Uninstall (Removing the installed applica-

tion)

To remove any installed application software:

Select [START] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] →

[Add/Remove Programs] → [Install/Uninstall],

then select the application to be removed and click

[Add/Remove...].

Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the

application.

• When installing Musicsoft Downloader to Windows XP, 2000 or

Vista, make sure to log on to the Administrator account.

•To install Musicsoft Downloader, your computer must be con-

nected to the Internet and be online.

• For the instrument including this Accessory CD-ROM, you can

use only the Musicsoft Downloader as a ﬁle transfer application

software. Other applications such as File Utility and Song Filer

cannot be used.

IMPORTANT

• The button names or menus may differ depending on the com-

puter OS.

•For instructions on uninstalling the USB-MIDI driver, refer to “How

can I remove the driver?” in the “Troubleshooting” section (page

104).

NOTE

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

104 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

■Troubleshooting ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● The driver cannot be installed.

• Is the USB cable connected correctly?

Check the USB cable connection.

Disconnect the USB cable, then connect it again.

• Is the USB function enabled on your computer?

When you connect the instrument to the computer for

the ﬁrst time, if the “Add New Hardware Wizard” does

not appear, the USB function on the computer may be

disabled. Perform the following steps.

Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware]

➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows XP/2000), or

select [Control Panel] ➔ [Device Manager] (for

Windows Vista).

* Classic View only in Windows XP.

Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear at “Uni-

versal serial bus controller” or “USB Root Hub.” If

you see an “!” or “x” mark, the USB controller is

disabled.

• Is any unknown device registered?

If driver installation fails, the instrument will be marked

as an “Unknown device,” and you will not be able to

install the driver. Delete the “Unknown device” by

following the steps below.

Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware]

➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows XP/2000), or

select [Control Panel] ➔ [Device Manager] (for

Windows Vista).

* Classic View only in Windows XP.

Look for “Other devices” in the menu “View

devices by type.”

If you ﬁnd “Other devices,” double-click it to

extend the tree to look for “Unknown device.” If

one appears, select it and click the [Remove] but-

ton.

Remove the USB cable from the instrument, and

make the connection again.

Install the driver again. (See pages 101–102.)

● When controlling the instrument from

your computer via USB, the instrument

does not operate correctly or no sound

is heard.

• Did you install the driver (pages 101–102)?

• Is the USB cable connected correctly?

•Are the volume settings of the instrument, playback

device, and application program set to the appropri-

ate levels?

•Have you selected an appropriate port in the

sequence software?

•Are you using the latest USB-MIDI driver?

The latest driver can be downloaded from the web

site (page 101).

● Playback response is delayed.

• Does your computer satisfy the system requirements?

• Is any other application or device driver running?

● Cannot suspend or resume the computer

correctly.

• Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI appli-

cation is running.

•You may not be able to suspend/resume normally,

depending on the particular environment (USB Host

Controller, etc.). Even so, simply disconnecting and

connecting the USB cable will allow you to use the

instrument functions again.

● How can I remove the driver?

Start the computer and use the “Administrator”

account to log on to Windows.

Close all applications and windows that are open.

Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM

drive.

Select [Start] ➔ [My Computer] (for Windows XP),

or select [My Computer] (for Windows 2000), or

select [Start] ➔ [Computer] (for Windows Vista).

Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select “Open”

from the pop-up menu.

Select “USBdrvVista_” or “USBdrv2k_” folder ➔

“uninstall” folder ➔ “uninstall.exe” ﬁle and

launch the “uninstall.exe.” ﬁle.

Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the

driver.

• When using a 64-bit OS, click “uninstall_x64.exe.” from the

“USBdrvVista_” folder.

• If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue].

NOTE

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 105

ATTENTION

SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE ONLY

PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT IS BETWEEN YOU

(AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”).

BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH

THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE USE THIS SOFTWARE.

1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT

Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s)

and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term

SOFTWARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and

data. The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is

protected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While

you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of

SOFTWARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant

copyrights.

• You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer.

• You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form

for backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such

backup copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce

Yamaha’s copyright notice and any other proprietary legends that were

on the original copy of the SOFTWARE.

• You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the

SOFTWARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the

recipient reads and agrees to the terms of this Agreement.

2. RESTRICTIONS

• You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation

or otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any

method whatsoever.

• You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the

SOFTWARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the

SOFTWARE.

• You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one

computer to another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other

computers.

• You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that

violates public policy.

• You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE

without permission by Yamaha Corporation.

Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained by

means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which you

must observe.

• Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any

commercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner.

• Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated,

transferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in

public without permission of the copyright owner.

• The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be

removed nor may the electronic watermark be modiﬁed without permission

of the copyright owner.

3. TERMINATION

This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFTWARE

and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provisions of this

Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate automatically and

immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such termination, you must

immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accompanying written

documents and all copies thereof.

4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA

As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible

media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in

materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days

from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire

liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media if

it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days

with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media

damaged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT

PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED

WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON

SOFTWARE

You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your sole

risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS” and

without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER

PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS

ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND IMPLIED,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND

NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SPECIFICALLY, BUT

WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YAMAHA DOES NOT

WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR

REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE

UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE

SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED.

6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PERMIT

USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO EVENT

SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR

ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EXPENSES,

LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF

THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall Yamaha’s total liability

to you for all damages, losses and causes of action (whether in contract, tort or

otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFTWARE.

7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE

Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be

attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data

accompanying the Software, Yamaha identiﬁes any software and data as THIRD

PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must abide by the

provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE

and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is responsible for

any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD PARTY

SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD PARTY

SOFTWARE or your use thereof.

•Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY

SOFTWARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR

A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

•Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the

THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

•Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including,

without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential

damages, expenses, lost proﬁts, lost data or other damages arising out of the

use, misuse or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

8. GENERAL

This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese law

without reference to principles of conﬂict of laws. Any dispute or procedure

shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a court

of competent jurisdiction ﬁnds any portion of this Agreement to be

unenforceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and

effect.

9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT

This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with

respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and

supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written

or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or

revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a

fully authorized representative of Yamaha.

106 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

SIBELIUS SCORCH LICENSE

AGREEMENT

By installing and/or using this Product you (an individual or legal entity) agree with the Licensor to be bound by the terms of this License which will govern your use

of the Product. If you do not accept these terms, do not install or use this Product.

1. Deﬁnitions

In this License the following words and expressions have the following

meanings:

“License”: this agreement between you and the Licensor and, if permitted by the

context, the conditional license granted to you in this agreement.

“Licensor”: Avid Technology, Inc., of Avid Technology Park, One Park West,

Tewksbury, MA 01876 USA, through its division Sibelius Software, of 20-23

City North, Fonthill Road, London N4 3HF, UK “Product”: the Software and the

Documentation.

“Software”: the Sibelius Scorch web browser plug-in, Opus, Helsinki, Inkpen2

and Reprise font families, any other programs or ﬁles supplied by the Licensor

which are included in or with the Sibelius Scorch installer, and the Sibelius

Scorch installer.

“Documentation”: any documentation in any form relating to the Software

supplied to you with the Software or by the Licensor.

2. License

2.1 The Licensor grants to you a non-exclusive non-transferable license to use

this Software in accordance with the Documentation on any number of

computers. Title to the Product is not transferred to you. Ownership of the

Product remains vested in the Licensor and its licensors, subject to the

rights granted to you under this License. All other rights are reserved.

2.2 You may make one printout for your own use of any part of the

Documentation provided in electronic form. You shall not make or permit

any third party to make any further copies of any part of the Product

whether in eye or machine-readable form.

2.3 You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to,

(1) translate, enhance, modify, alter or adapt the Product or any part of it

for any purpose (including without limitation for the purpose of error

correction);

(2) create derivative works based on the Product, or cause the whole or any

part of the Product to be combined with or incorporated into any other

program, ﬁle or product, for any purpose; or

(3) use the Software to create ﬁles in any format (other than temporary

ﬁles created and required by your computer’s operating system or web

browser), including without limitation screen capture ﬁles, ﬁles

generated from the Software’s playback, graphics ﬁles and print ﬁles,

for any purpose, except for creating MIDI ﬁles (if permitted by the

Software) for private non-commercial use.

2.4 You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to, decompile,

decode, disassemble or reverse engineer the Software in whole or in part for

any purpose.

2.5 You shall not, and shall not cause any third party to, translate, convert,

decode or reverse engineer any ﬁle capable of being read by any copy or

version of the Software or any data transmitted to or from any copy or

version of the Software, in whole or in part for any purpose.

2.6 The Product or any part of it must not be used to infringe any right of

whatsoever of any other person or entity.

3. Copyright

3.1 You acknowledge that copyright in the Product as a whole and in the

components of the Product as between you and the Licensor belongs to the

Licensor or its licensors and is protected by copyright laws, national and

international, and all other applicable laws.

4. Disclaimer of Liability

4.1 In consideration of the fact that the Product is licensed hereunder free of

charge, (a) the Licensor disclaims any and all warranties with respect to the

Product, whether expressed or implied, including without limitation any

warranties that the Product is free from defects, will perform in accordance

with the Documentation, is merchantable, or is ﬁt for any particular

purpose, and (b) the Licensor shall not have or incur any liability to you for

any loss, cost, expense or claim (including without limitation any liability

for loss or corruption of data and loss of proﬁts, revenue or goodwill and

any type of special, indirect or consequential loss) that may arise out of or

in connection with your installation and use of the Product.

5. Termination

5.1 This License shall terminate automatically upon your destruction of the

Product. In addition, the Licensor may elect to terminate this License in the

event of a material breach by you of any condition of this License or of any

of your representations, warranties, covenants or obligations hereunder.

Upon notiﬁcation of such termination by the Licensor, you will

immediately delete the Software from your computer and destroy the

Documentation.

6. Miscellaneous

6.1 No failure to exercise and no delay in exercising on the part of the Licensor

of any right, power or privilege arising hereunder shall operate as a waiver

thereof, nor shall any single or partial exercise of any right, power or

privilege preclude any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of

any other right, power or privilege. The rights and remedies of the Licensor

in connection herewith are not exclusive of any rights or remedies provided

by law.

6.2 You may not distribute, loan, lease, sub-license, rent or otherwise transfer

the Product to any third party.

6.3 You agree to the use of your personal data in accordance with the

Licensor’s privacy policy (available from the Licensor or on

www.sibelius.com), which may change from time to time.

6.4 This License is intended by the parties hereto to be a ﬁnal expression of

their agreement with respect to the subject matter hereof and a complete

and exclusive statement of the terms of such agreement. This License

supercedes any and all prior understandings, whether written or oral,

between you and the Licensor relating to the subject matter hereof.

6.5 (This section only applies if you are resident in the European Union:) This

License shall be construed and governed by the laws of England, and both

parties agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts.

6.6 (This section only applies if you are not resident in the European Union:)

This License shall be construed and enforced in accordance with and

governed by the laws of the State of California. Any suit, action or

proceeding arising out of or in any way related or connected to this License

shall be brought and maintained only in the United States District Court

for the Northern District of California, sitting in the City of San Francisco.

Each party irrevocably submits to the jurisdiction of such federal court over

any such suit, action or proceeding. Each party knowingly, voluntarily and

irrevocably waives trial by jury in any suit, action or proceeding (including

any counterclaim), whether at law or in equity, arising out of or in any way

related or connected to this License or the subject matter hereof.

(License v5.0 (DMN), 30 July 2007)

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 107

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping

sound is temporarily produced.

This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical

power.

When using a mobile phone, noise is produced.

Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may pro-

duce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it

further away from the instrument.

There is no sound even when the keyboard is

played or when a song or style is being played

back.

Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on

the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack,

no sound is output.

Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 94.)

Is the FILE CONTROL display showing? The instrument’s keyboard,

etc., will not produce any sound while the FILE CONTROL display is

showing. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

The style or song does not play back when the

[START/STOP] button is pressed.

Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF;

refer to “External Clock” on page 94.

The style does not sound properly.

Make sure that the Style Volume (page 81) is set to an appropriate

level.

Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the chords you are play-

ing? Set the split point at an appropriate key (page 59).

Is the [ACMP] button lit? If it is not lit, press the [ACMP] button so it

lights.

No rhythm accompaniment plays when the

[START/STOP] button is pressed after selecting

the BaroqueAir Style in the MOVIE & SHOW cate-

gory.

This is not a malfunction. Style BaroqueAir Style does not have a

Rhythm part, so there is no rhythm sound for this Style. Also, this

Style does not have a Fill-In section. The other parts will begin play-

ing when you play a chord in the accompaniment.

Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound

seems to be cut off.

The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the

Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing

back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “sto-

len”) from the accompaniment or song.

The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the

opposite effect. For example, pressing the

footswitch cuts off the sound and releasing it sus-

tains the sounds.

The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the

footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before

turning on the power.

The sound of the voice changes from note to note.

This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple

recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the key-

board; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different

from note to note.

The Demo display is shown in Japanese, and/or

there are Japanese characters in the display mes-

sages.

Make sure the Language setting in the FUNCTION display is set to

English. (See page 12)

The ACMP indicator does not appear when the

[ACMP] button is pressed.

Always press desired style category button ﬁrst when you are going

to use any style-related function.

There is no harmony sound.

The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their

type. Types 01–05 function when style playback is on, chords are

played in the accompaniment range of the keyboard, and a melody is

played in the right-hand range. Types 06–26 will function whether

style playback is on or off. For types 06–12 you need to play two

notes at the same time.

Appendix

108 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Messages

LCD Message Comment

Access error!

Indicates the failure in reading or writing from/to the media, USB ﬂash mem-

ory or the internal ﬂash memory.

All Memory Clearing...

Displayed while erasing all data in the ﬂash memory. Never turn the power

off during data transmission.

Are you sure? Conﬁrms whether Song Clear or Track Clear is executed or not.

Backup Clearing... Displayed while clearing the back-up data in the ﬂash memory.

Cancel Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send is cancelled.

Can’t clear TrackA. Displayed when a track clear error occurs.

Clearing... Displayed while executing Song Clear or Track Clear of the user songs.

Com Mode

Displayed when the Musicsoft Downloader is started on the PC connected

to the keyboard. This will not be displayed while the instrument is played

back.

Completed

Indicates the speciﬁed job completion such as data saving and transmis-

sion.

Create Directory Displayed while creating a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader application.

Data Error! Displayed when the user song contains illegal data.

Delete File Displayed while deleting a ﬁle in the Musicsoft Downloader.

Delete OK ? Conﬁrms whether the Delete job is executed or not.

Delete Directory Displayed while deleting a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader.

Deleting... Displayed while the delete function is engaged.

End Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send has been completed.

Exit.

Displayed when the record standby mode is exited because an inappropri-

ate style has been selected during style record standby.

“File information area is not large enough.”

Indicates that saving data in the media cannot be executed since the total

number of ﬁles have become too many.

File is not found. Indicates there is no ﬁle.

“File too large. Loading is impossible.”

Indicates that loading data cannot be executed since the ﬁle data is too

large.

Flash Clearing...

Displayed while clearing the song or style data transmitted to the internal

ﬂash memory.

Format OK ? [EXECUTE] Conﬁrms whether formatting the media is executed or not.

Formatting... Displayed while formatting.

Load OK ? Conﬁrms whether loading is executed or not.

Loading... Displayed while loading data.

Media is not inserted. Displayed when accessing the media while it is not inserted.

Media capacity is full.

Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the media memory

becomes full.

Memory Full Displayed when the internal memory becomes full during recording.

“MIDI receive buffer overﬂow.”

Displayed when too much MIDI data was received at one time and failed to

proceed.

Move File Displayed while moving a ﬁle in the Musicsoft Downloader.

“Now Writing...

(Don’t turn off the power now, otherwise

the data may be damaged.)”

Displayed while writing data in the memory. Never turn the power off while

writing. Doing so may result in data loss.

Messages

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 109

OverCurrent

Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the

overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO

DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument.

Overwrite ? Conﬁrms whether overwriting is executed or not.

Please Wait...

Displayed when executing the jobs that take some time, such as displaying

scores and lyrics, or stopping recording.

Rename File Displayed while rewriting the ﬁle name in the Musicsoft Downloader.

Save OK ? Conﬁrms whether saving is executed or not.

Saved data is not found. Displayed when the data to be saved doesn’t exist.

Saving...

Displayed while saving data in the memory. Never turn the power off while

saving. Doing so may result in data loss.

Send OK? Conﬁrms whether the data transmission is executed or not.

Sending... Displayed while transmitting data.

“Since the media is in use now, this

function is not available.”

Indicates that the ﬁle control function is currently unavailable since the

media is being accessed.

Sure ? [YES/NO] Reconﬁrms whether each operation is executed or not.

“The limit of the media has been reached.”

Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the folder/directory

structure has become too complicated.

The media is not formatted. Indicates the inserted media has not been formatted.

“The media is write-protected.”

Indicates that the inserted media cannot be written since it is write-pro-

tected. Set to the write-protect switch to the “overwrite” position before use.

“The song data is too large to be

converted to notation.”

Indicates that the score cannot be displayed since the song data is too

large.

There are too many ﬁles.

Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the total number of ﬁles

exceeds the capacity.

“This function is not available now.”

Indicates the designated function is not available since the instrument is

executing another job.

[nnn] “ﬁle name”

Indicates the ﬁle name of the currently transmitting. “nnn” indicates the

receiving block.

LCD Message Comment

• Not all the messages are listed in the table: the messages neces-

sary to be explained only.

NOTE

110 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Voice List

■ Maximum Polyphony ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

The instrument has 64-note maximum polyphony. This means

that it can play a maximum of up to 64 notes at once, regard-

less of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a

number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment

is used the total number of available notes for playing on the

keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the

Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is

exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most

recent notes have priority (last note priority).

● Panel Voice List

• The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for

each voice. Use these program change numbers when

playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device.

• Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Pro-

gram Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program Num-

bers and Program Change Numbers differ by a value of 1.

Remember to take this into consideration.

• Some voices may sound continuously or have a long

decay after the notes have been released while the sus-

tain pedal (footswitch) is held.

NOTE

Voice

No.

Voice

No.

(category)

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Piano

110113 1 Live! Grand Piano

220112 2 Live! Bright Piano

3301141Live! WarmGrand

440112 7 Harpsichord

550113 7 GrandHarpsi

660112 4 HonkyTonk

770112 3 MidiGrand

880113 4 Oct.Piano1

990114 4 Oct.Piano2

10 10 0 113 3 CP80

E.Piano

11 1 0 114 5 Cool! GalaxyEP

12 2 0 118 5 Cool! SuitcaseEP

13 3 0 115 5 PolarisEP

14 4 0 118 6 JazzChorus

15 5 0 113 6 HyperTines

16 6 0 119 5 Cool! E.Piano

17 7 0 120 5 PhaseEP

18 8 0 116 6 NewTines

19 9 0 112 5 FunkEP

20 10 0 112 6 DX Modern

21 11 0 116 5 VintageEP

22 12 0 114 6 VenusEP

23 13 0 115 6 ModernEP

24 14 0 113 5 TremoloEP

25 15 0 117 6 SuperDX

26 16 0 117 5 StageEP

27 17 0 112 8 Clavi

28 18 0 113 8 WahClavi

Strings

29 1 0 117 50 Live! Strings

30 2 0 116 50 Live! Orchestra

31 3 0 122 50 Allegro Strings

32 4 0 114 49 Symphon.Str

33 5 0 113 41 Sweet! Violin

34 6 0 112 49 Strings

35 7 0 113 49 OrchStrings

36 8 0 112 52 AnalogStrs

37 9 0 112 50 ChamberStrs

38 10 0 116 49 BowStrings

39 11 0 113 50 SlowStrings

40 12 0 112 45 TremoloStrs

41 13 0 115 50 MarcatoStrs

42 14 0 112 51 SynStrings1

43 15 0 112 46 PizzStrings

44 16 0 125 49 Watariyat

45 17 0 112 42 Viola

46 18 0 112 43 Cello

47 19 0 112 44 Contrabass

48 20 0 113 111 Er Hu

49 21 0 112 47 Harp

50 22 0 113 47 Hackbrett

51 23 0 113 108 Kanoun

52 24 0 112 111 Fiddle

53 25 0 112 106 Banjo

54 26 0 112 108 Koto

55 27 0 112 107 Shamisen

56 28 0 113 106 Oud

57 29 0 112 105 Sitar1

58 30 0 113 105 Sitar2

59 31 0 119 106 Pi Pa

60 32 0 112 41 SoloViolin

61 33 0 112 56 Orch.Hit

Guitar&Bass

62 1 0 116 25 Dynamic Nylon

63 2 0 117 26 Live! SteelGuitar

64 3 0 115 27 Cool! JazzGuitar

65 4 0 114 29 Cool! Elec.Gtr

66 5 0 114 26 Sweet! Mandolin

67 6 0 118 26 Live! SlideSteel

68 7 0 117 29 Cool! SlideClean

69 8 0 125 28 Cool! VintageLead

70 9 0 113 26 Live! 12StringGtr

71 10 0 115 31 Cool! PowerLead

72 11 0 116 26 Live! DynamicSteel

73 12 0 117 30 Cool! BluesGuitar

74 13 0 112 28 Cool! CleanGuitar

75 14 0 115 25 Classic Guitar

76 15 0 115 28 PedalSteel

77 16 0 116 30 RockGuitar

78 17 0 126 28 VintageStrum

79 18 0 117 31 PowerChord

80 19 0 117 28 60’sClean

81 20 0 119 27 SmoothLead

82 21 0 115 30 VintageAmp

83 22 0 113 31 CrunchGtr

84 23 0 115 26 CampﬁreGtr

85 24 0 118 28 SolidGuitar

86 25 0 123 28 VintageOpen

87 26 0 115 29 VintageMute

88 27 0 114 30 LeadGuitar

89 28 0 124 28 ChorusGtr

90 29 0 120 28 VintageTrem

91 30 0 113 27 OctaveGtr

92 31 0 114 28 DeepChorus

93 32 0 113 28 TremoloGtr

94 33 0 114 31 HeavyStack

95 34 0 122 28 WahGuitar

96 35 0 112 31 Distortion

97 36 0 119 28 Elec.12Str

98 37 0 113 30 FeedbackGtr

99 38 0 112 29 MutedGuitar

100 39 0 113 29 FunkGuitar

101 40 0 116 31 VodooLead

102 41 0 112 26 FolkGuitar

103 42 0 112 30 Overdrive

104 43 0 114 34 Cool! ElectricBass

Voice

No.

Voice

No.

(category)

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 111

105 44 0 112 33 Aco.Bass

106 45 0 112 35 PickBass

107 46 0 112 36 Cool! Fretless

108 47 0 112 37 SlapBass

109 48 0 114 40 SubBass

110 49 0 114 39 HardBass

111 50 0 112 39 ResoBass

112 51 0 113 36 SuperFretless

113 52 0 113 37 FusionBass

114 53 0 114 33 Bass&Cymbal

115 54 0 112 40 AnalogBass

116 55 0 116 40 DrySynBass

117 56 0 115 40 80’sSynBass

118 57 0 113 39 HiQBass

119 58 0 112 38 FunkBass

120 59 0 115 39 ClickBass

121 60 0 112 34 MellowFinger

Saxophone

122 1 0 117 67 Sweet! TenorSax

123 2 0 114 66 Sweet! AltoSax

124 3 0 113 65 Sweet! SopranoSax

125 4 0 118 67 GrowlSax

126 5 0 112 68 BaritoneSax

127 6 0 112 65 SopranoSax

128 7 0 112 67 TenorSax

129 8 0 112 66 AltoSax

130 9 0 113 67 WoodwindEns

Flute&Woodwind

131 1 0 114 74 Sweet! Flute

132 2 0 114 72 Sweet! Clarinet

133 3 0 113 76 Sweet! PanFlute

134 4 0 112 70 EnglishHorn

135 5 0 112 71 Bassoon

136 6 0 115 74 Sweet! Class.Flute

137 7 0 112 73 Piccolo

138 8 0 112 72 Clarinet

139 9 0 112 69 Oboe

140 10 0 112 74 Flute

141 11 0 113 74 PanFlute

142 12 0 112 79 Whistle

143 13 0 112 76 EthnicFlute

144 14 0 112 78 Shakuhachi

145 15 0 112 75 Recorder

146 16 0 112 80 Ocarina

147 17 0 112 110 Bagpipe

148 18 0 114 78 Nay

149 19 0 118 74 Di Zi

150 20 0 116 110 Sheng

Organ

151 1 0 118 19 Cool! Organ

152 2 0 117 17 Cool! JazzOrgan

153 3 0 117 19 Cool! RotorOrgan

154 4 0 115 19 Cool! FullRocker

155 5 0 118 17 StadiumOrg

156 6 0 116 19 RotaryDrive

157 7 0 112 19 RockOrgan1

158 8 0 113 18 DanceOrgan

159 9 0 112 17 JazzOrgan1

160 10 0 114 19 PurpleOrg

161 11 0 118 18 Elec.Organ

162 12 0 115 17 DrawbarOrg

163 13 0 113 17 JazzOrgan2

164 14 0 113 19 RockOrgan2

165 15 0 112 18 ClickOrgan

166 16 0 119 17 GospelOrg

167 17 0 115 18 MellowDraw

168 18 0 116 17 BrightDraw

169 19 0 116 18 60’sOrgan

170 20 0 120 17 JazzOrgan3

171 21 0 114 17 Tibia 16+4

172 22 0 114 18 Tibia Full

173 23 0 113 20 ChapelOrgn1

Voice

No.

Voice

No.

(category)

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

174 24 0 114 20 ChapelOrgn2

175 25 0 115 20 ChapelOrgn3

176 26 0 112 20 PipeOrgan

177 27 0 112 21 ReedOrgan

178 28 0 114 21 Harmonium1

179 29 0 115 21 Harmonium2

Trumpet

180 1 0 115 57 Sweet! Trumpet

181 2 0 117 58 Sweet! Trombone

182 3 0 116 57 JazzTrumpet

183 4 0 112 57 SoloTrumpet

184 5 0 113 57 FlugelHorn

185 6 0 116 58 Trombone

186 7 0 115 58 SoftTromb

187 8 0 112 58 SoloTromb

188 9 0 114 58 MellowTromb

189 10 0 112 60 MutedTrump

190 11 0 113 59 BaritonHorn

191 12 0 114 59 BaritonHit

192 13 0 112 59 Tuba

193 14 0 113 34 AlpBass

Brass

194 1 0 117 63 Live! PopBrass

195 2 0 118 63 Live! HyperBrass

196 3 0 116 63 Live! OctaveBrass

197 4 0 112 61 Live! FrenchHorns

198 5 0 115 67 BrassCombo

199 6 0 112 62 BrassSection

200 7 0 125 62 Sforzando

201 8 0 121 62 BigBrass

202 9 0 113 60 BallroomBrs

203 10 0 120 62 BrightBrass

204 11 0 116 62 MellowBrass

205 12 0 113 63 80’sBrass

206 13 0 123 62 SoftBrass

207 14 0 114 62 FullHorns

208 15 0 118 58 SmoothTromb

209 16 0 115 62 HighBrass

210 17 0 113 64 OberBrass

211 18 0 122 62 TrumpetEns

212 19 0 119 62 MellowHorns

213 20 0 113 62 BigBandBrs

214 21 0 118 62 PopBrass

215 22 0 112 64 AnalogBrs

216 23 0 113 58 Trb.Section

217 24 0 117 62 SmallBrass

218 25 0 114 64 SoftAnalog

219 26 0 115 63 FunkyAnalog

220 27 0 114 63 TechnoBrass

221 28 0 112 63 SynthBrass

Choir

222 1 0 112 55 AirChoir

223 2 0 113 54 GothicVox

224 3 0 118 89 SweetHeaven

225 4 0 121 89 DreamHeaven

226 5 0 112 53 Choir

227 6 0 112 54 VoxHumana

Pad

228 1 0 113 95 Insomnia

229 2 0 115 90 NeoWarmPad

230 3 0 113 100 CyberPad

231 4 0 112 96 Wave2001

232 5 0 112 100 Atmosphere

233 6 0 112 92 XenonPad

234 7 0 112 95 Equinox

235 8 0 112 89 Fantasia

236 9 0 112 93 DX Pad

237 10 0 113 89 Symbiont

238 11 0 114 89 Stargate

239 12 0 112 90 Area51

240 13 0 113 90 DarkMoon

241 14 0 115 95 Ionosphere

Voice

No.

Voice

No.

(category)

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

112 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

● GM&XG Voice List

242 15 0 115 89 GoldenAge

243 16 0 114 95 Solaris

244 17 0 117 89 Millennium

245 18 0 114 90 Dunes

Synth.&FX

246 1 0 122 82 Oxygen

247 2 0 123 82 Matrix

248 3 0 120 82 WireLead

249 4 0 113 81 HipLead

250 5 0 117 81 HopLead

251 6 0 116 82 FireWire

252 7 0 115 82 Analogon

253 8 0 114 82 Blaster

254 9 0 115 85 Skyline

255 10 0 112 81 SquareLead

256 11 0 112 82 Saw.Lead

257 12 0 118 81 TinyLead

258 13 0 121 82 FunkyLead

259 14 0 114 85 Paraglide

260 15 0 112 85 Portatone

261 16 0 113 82 BigLead

262 17 0 117 82 Warp

263 18 0 119 82 Fargo

264 19 0 113 85 Adrenaline

265 20 0 112 99 Stardust

266 21 0 112 84 AeroLead

267 22 0 114 81 MiniLead

268 23 0 113 88 Impact

269 24 0 113 99 SunBell

270 25 0 112 88 UnderHeim

271 26 0 116 81 HiBias

272 27 0 115 81 Vinylead

273 28 126 0 1 SFXKit1

274 29 126 0 2 SFXKit2

275 30 126 0 112 AnimalKit

Accordion&Harmonica

276 1 0 112 22 Musette

277 2 0 117 22 Steirisch

278 3 0 113 22 TuttiAccrd

279 4 0 115 22 SmallAccrd

280 5 0 116 22 Accordion

281 6 0 112 24 BallroomAcc

282 7 0 113 24 Bandoneon

283 8 0 114 22 SoftAccrd

284 9 0 113 23 ModernHarp

285 10 0 114 23 BluesHarp

Percussion

286 1 0 112 12 Vibraphone

287 2 0 113 12 JazzVibes

288 3 0 112 13 Marimba

289 4 0 112 14 Xylophone

290 5 0 112 115 SteelDrums

291 6 0 112 9 Celesta

292 7 0 112 10 Glocken

293 8 0 112 11 MusicBox

294 9 0 112 15 TubularBell

295 10 0 112 109 Kalimba

296 11 0 112 16 Dulcimer

297 12 0 112 48 Timpani

Drum Kit

298 1 127 0 1 StandardKit1

299 2 127 0 2 StandardKit2

300 3 127 0 5 HitKit

301 4 127 0 33 JazzKit

302 5 127 0 41 BrushKit

303 6 127 0 9 RoomKit

304 7 127 0 17 RockKit

305 8 127 0 25 ElectroKit

306 9 127 0 26 AnalogKit

307 10 127 0 28 DanceKit

308 11 127 0 49 SymphonyKit

Voice

No.

Voice

No.

(category)

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

309 12 126 0 41 CubanKit

310 13 126 0 44 PopLatinKit

311 14 126 0 36 ArabicKit

312 15 126 0 37 ArabicKit 2

313 16 126 0 65 ArabicMixKit

314 17 126 0 115 IndianKit

315 18 126 0 125 ChineseKit

316 19 127 0 128 ChineseMixKit

Voice

No.

Voice

No.

(category)

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

317 1 0 0 1 GrandPiano

318 2 0 1 1 GrndPianoKSP

319 3 0 18 1 MellowGrPno

320 4 0 40 1 PianoStrings

321 5 0 41 1 Dream

322 6 0 0 2 BrightPiano

323 7 0 1 2 BritePnoKSP

324 8 0 0 3 ElecGrandPno

325 9 0 1 3 ElecGrPnoKSP

326 10 0 32 3 DetunedCP80

327 11 0 40 3 LayeredCP1

328 12 0 41 3 LayeredCP2

329 13 0 0 4 Honkytonk

330 14 0 1 4 HonkytonkKSP

331 15 0 0 5 El.Piano1

332 16 0 1 5 El.Piano1KSP

333 17 0 18 5 MellowEP1

334 18 0 32 5 ChorusEP1

335 19 0 40 5 HardEl.Piano

336 20 0 45 5 VXfadeEl.P1

337 21 0 64 5 60sEl.Piano1

338 22 0 0 6 El.Piano2

339 23 0 1 6 El.Piano2KSP

340 24 0 32 6 ChorusEP2

341 25 0 33 6 DXEPHard

342 26 0 34 6 DXLegend

343 27 0 40 6 DXPhaseEP

344 28 0 41 6 DX+AnalogEP

345 29 0 42 6 DXKotoEP

346 30 0 45 6 VXfadeEl.P2

347 31 0 0 7 Harpsichord

348 32 0 1 7 Harpsi.KSP

349 33 0 25 7 Harpsichord2

350 34 0 35 7 Harpsichord3

351 35 0 0 8 Clavi.

352 36 0 1 8 Clavi.KSP

353 37 0 27 8 Clavi.Wah

354 38 0 64 8 PulseClavi.

355 39 0 65 8 PierceClavi.

356 40 0 0 9 Celesta

357 41 0 0 10 Glockenspiel

358 42 0 0 11 MusicBox

359 43 0 64 11 Orgel

360 44 0 0 12 Vibraphone

361 45 0 1 12 VibesKSP

362 46 0 45 12 HardVibes

363 47 0 0 13 Marimba

364 48 0 1 13 MarimbaKSP

365 49 0 64 13 SineMarimba

366 50 0 97 13 Balimba

367 51 0 98 13 LogDrums

368 52 0 0 14 Xylophone

369 53 0 0 15 TubularBells

370 54 0 96 15 ChurchBells

371 55 0 97 15 Carillon

372 56 0 0 16 Dulcimer

Voice

No.

Voice

No.

(category)

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 113

373 57 0 35 16 Dulcimer2

374 58 0 96 16 Cimbalom

375 59 0 97 16 Santur

376 60 0 0 17 DrawbarOrgan

377 61 0 32 17 DetDrawOrgan

378 62 0 33 17 60sDrawOrg1

379 63 0 34 17 60sDrawOrg2

380 64 0 35 17 70sDrawOrg1

381 65 0 36 17 DrawbarOrg2

382 66 0 37 17 60sDrawOrg3

383 67 0 38 17 EvenBarOrg

384 68 0 40 17 16+2'2_3Org

385 69 0 64 17 OrganBass

386 70 0 65 17 70sDrawOrg2

387 71 0 66 17 CheezyOrgan

388 72 0 67 17 DrawbarOrg3

389 73 0 0 18 Perc.Organ

390 74 0 24 18 70sPercOrg1

391 75 0 32 18 DetPercOrgan

392 76 0 33 18 LightOrgan

393 77 0 37 18 Perc.Organ2

394 78 0 0 19 RockOrgan

395 79 0 64 19 RotaryOrgan

396 80 0 65 19 SlowRotary

397 81 0 66 19 FastRotary

398 82 0 0 20 ChurchOrgan

399 83 0 32 20 ChurchOrgan3

400 84 0 35 20 ChurchOrgan2

401 85 0 40 20 NotreDame

402 86 0 64 20 OrganFlute

403 87 0 65 20 Trem.OrganFl

404 88 0 0 21 ReedOrgan

405 89 0 40 21 PuffOrgan

406 90 0 0 22 Accordion

407 91 0 32 22 AccordIt

408 92 0 0 23 Harmonica

409 93 0 32 23 Harmonica2

410 94 0 0 24 TangoAccord

411 95 0 64 24 TangoAccord2

412 96 0 0 25 NylonGuitar

413 97 0 16 25 NylonGuitar2

414 98 0 25 25 NylonGuitar3

415 99 0 43 25 VelGtrHarmo

416 100 0 96 25 Ukulele

417 101 0 0 26 SteelGuitar

418 102 0 16 26 SteelGuitar2

419 103 0 35 26 12StrGuitar

420 104 0 40 26 Nylon&Steel

421 105 0 41 26 Steel&Body

422 106 0 96 26 Mandolin

423 107 0 0 27 JazzGuitar

424 108 0 18 27 MellowGuitar

425 109 0 32 27 JazzAmp

426 110 0 0 28 CleanGuitar

427 111 0 32 28 ChorusGuitar

428 112 0 0 29 MutedGuitar

429 113 0 40 29 FunkGuitar1

430 114 0 41 29 MuteSteelGtr

431 115 0 43 29 FunkGuitar2

432 116 0 45 29 JazzMan

433 117 0 0 30 Overdriven

434 118 0 43 30 GuitarPinch

435 119 0 0 31 Distortion

436 120 0 40 31 FeedbackGtr

437 121 0 41 31 FeedbackGtr2

438 122 0 0 32 GtrHarmonics

439 123 0 65 32 GtrFeedback

440 124 0 66 32 GtrHarmonic2

441 125 0 0 33 AcousticBass

442 126 0 40 33 JazzRhythm

443 127 0 45 33 VXUprghtBass

Voice

No.

Voice

No.

(category)

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

444 128 0 0 34 FingerBass

445 129 0 18 34 FingerDark

446 130 0 27 34 FlangeBass

447 131 0 40 34 Bass&DistEG

448 132 0 43 34 FingerSlap

449 133 0 45 34 FingerBass2

450 134 0 65 34 Mod.Bass

451 135 0 0 35 PickBass

452 136 0 28 35 MutePickBass

453 137 0 0 36 FretlessBass

454 138 0 32 36 Fretless2

455 139 0 33 36 Fretless3

456 140 0 34 36 Fretless4

457 141 0 96 36 Syn.Fretless

458 142 0 97 36 SmthFretless

459 143 0 0 37 SlapBass1

460 144 0 27 37 ResonantSlap

461 145 0 32 37 PunchThumb

462 146 0 0 38 SlapBass2

463 147 0 43 38 Velo.Sw.Slap

464 148 0 0 39 SynthBass1

465 149 0 18 39 SynBass1Dark

466 150 0 20 39 FastResoBass

467 151 0 24 39 AcidBass

468 152 0 35 39 ClaviBass

469 153 0 40 39 TechnoBass

470 154 0 64 39 Orbiter

471 155 0 65 39 SquareBass

472 156 0 66 39 RubberBass

473 157 0 96 39 Hammer

474 158 0 0 40 SynthBass2

475 159 0 6 40 MellowSyBass

476 160 0 12 40 SequenceBass

477 161 0 18 40 ClickSynBass

478 162 0 19 40 SynBass2Dark

479 163 0 32 40 SmoothSyBass

480 164 0 40 40 ModulrSyBass

481 165 0 41 40 DXBass

482 166 0 64 40 XWireBass

483 167 0 0 41 Violin

484 168 0 8 41 SlwAtkViolin

485 169 0 0 42 Viola

486 170 0 0 43 Cello

487 171 0 0 44 Contrabass

488 172 0 0 45 Trem.Strings

489 173 0 8 45 SlwAtTremStr

490 174 0 40 45 SuspenseStr

491 175 0 0 46 PizzicatoStr

492 176 0 0 47 Orch.Harp

493 177 0 40 47 YangChin

494 178 0 0 48 Timpani

495 179 0 0 49 Strings1

496 180 0 3 49 StereoStrngs

497 181 0 8 49 SlwAtkStrngs

498 182 0 24 49 ArcoStrings

499 183 0 35 49 60’sStrings

500 184 0 40 49 Orchestra

501 185 0 41 49 Orchestra2

502 186 0 42 49 TremOrchstra

503 187 0 45 49 Velo.Strings

504 188 0 0 50 Strings2

505 189 0 3 50 S.SlowStrngs

506 190 0 8 50 LegatoStrngs

507 191 0 40 50 WarmStrings

508 192 0 41 50 Kingdom

509 193 0 64 50 70’sStrings

510 194 0 65 50 Strings3

511 195 0 0 51 SynStrings1

512 196 0 27 51 ResoStrings

513 197 0 64 51 SynStrings4

514 198 0 65 51 SynStrings5

Voice

No.

Voice

No.

(category)

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

114 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

515 199 0 0 52 SynStrings2

516 200 0 0 53 ChoirAahs

517 201 0 3 53 StereoChoir

518 202 0 16 53 ChoirAahs2

519 203 0 32 53 MellowChoir

520 204 0 40 53 ChoirStrings

521 205 0 0 54 VoiceOohs

522 206 0 0 55 SynthVoice

523 207 0 40 55 SynthVoice2

524 208 0 41 55 Choral

525 209 0 64 55 AnalogVoice

526 210 0 0 56 OrchestraHit

527 211 0 35 56 OrchestrHit2

528 212 0 64 56 Impact

529 213 0 0 57 Trumpet

530 214 0 16 57 Trumpet2

531 215 0 17 57 BriteTrumpet

532 216 0 32 57 WarmTrumpet

533 217 0 0 58 Trombone

534 218 0 18 58 Trombone2

535 219 0 0 59 Tuba

536 220 0 16 59 Tuba2

537 221 0 0 60 MutedTrumpet

538 222 0 0 61 FrenchHorn

539 223 0 6 61 Fr.HornSolo

540 224 0 32 61 FrenchHorn2

541 225 0 37 61 HornOrchestr

542 226 0 0 62 BrassSection

543 227 0 35 62 Tp&TbSection

544 228 0 40 62 BrassSect2

545 229 0 41 62 HighBrass

546 230 0 42 62 MellowBrass

547 231 0 0 63 SynthBrass1

548 232 0 12 63 QuackBrass

549 233 0 20 63 ResoSynBrass

550 234 0 24 63 PolyBrass

551 235 0 27 63 SynthBrass3

552 236 0 32 63 JumpBrass

553 237 0 45 63 AnaVelBrass1

554 238 0 64 63 AnalogBrass1

555 239 0 0 64 SynthBrass2

556 240 0 18 64 SoftBrass

557 241 0 40 64 SynthBrass4

558 242 0 41 64 ChoirBrass

559 243 0 45 64 AnaVelBrass2

560 244 0 64 64 AnalogBrass2

561 245 0 0 65 SopranoSax

562 246 0 0 66 AltoSax

563 247 0 40 66 SaxSection

564 248 0 43 66 HyperAltoSax

565 249 0 0 67 TenorSax

566 250 0 40 67 BreathyTenor

567 251 0 41 67 SoftTenorSax

568 252 0 64 67 TenorSax2

569 253 0 0 68 BaritoneSax

570 254 0 0 69 Oboe

571 255 0 0 70 EnglishHorn

572 256 0 0 71 Bassoon

573 257 0 0 72 Clarinet

574 258 0 0 73 Piccolo

575 259 0 0 74 Flute

576 260 0 0 75 Recorder

577 261 0 0 76 PanFlute

578 262 0 0 77 BlownBottle

579 263 0 0 78 Shakuhachi

580 264 0 0 79 Whistle

581 265 0 0 80 Ocarina

582 266 0 0 81 SquareLead

583 267 0 6 81 SquareLead2

584 268 0 8 81 LMSquare

585 269 0 18 81 Hollow

Voice

No.

Voice

No.

(category)

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

586 270 0 19 81 Shroud

587 271 0 64 81 Mellow

588 272 0 65 81 SoloSine

589 273 0 66 81 SineLead

590 274 0 0 82 SawtoothLead

591 275 0 6 82 SawtoothLd2

592 276 0 8 82 ThickSaw

593 277 0 18 82 DynamicSaw

594 278 0 19 82 DigitalSaw

595 279 0 20 82 BigLead

596 280 0 24 82 HeavySynth

597 281 0 25 82 WaspySynth

598 282 0 40 82 PulseSaw

599 283 0 41 82 Dr.Lead

600 284 0 45 82 VelocityLead

601 285 0 96 82 Seq.Analog

602 286 0 0 83 CalliopeLead

603 287 0 65 83 PureLead

604 288 0 0 84 ChiffLead

605 289 0 64 84 Rubby

606 290 0 0 85 CharangLead

607 291 0 64 85 DistortedLd

608 292 0 65 85 WireLead

609 293 0 0 86 VoiceLead

610 294 0 24 86 SynthAahs

611 295 0 64 86 VoxLead

612 296 0 0 87 FifthsLead

613 297 0 35 87 BigFive

614 298 0 0 88 Bass&Lead

615 299 0 16 88 Big&Low

616 300 0 64 88 Fat&Perky

617 301 0 65 88 SoftWhirl

618 302 0 0 89 NewAgePad

619 303 0 64 89 Fantasy

620 304 0 0 90 WarmPad

621 305 0 16 90 ThickPad

622 306 0 17 90 SoftPad

623 307 0 18 90 SinePad

624 308 0 64 90 HornPad

625 309 0 65 90 RotaryStrngs

626 310 0 0 91 PolySynthPad

627 311 0 64 91 PolyPad80

628 312 0 65 91 ClickPad

629 313 0 66 91 AnalogPad

630 314 0 67 91 SquarePad

631 315 0 0 92 ChoirPad

632 316 0 64 92 Heaven

633 317 0 66 92 Itopia

634 318 0 67 92 CCPad

635 319 0 0 93 BowedPad

636 320 0 64 93 Glacier

637 321 0 65 93 GlassPad

638 322 0 0 94 MetallicPad

639 323 0 64 94 TinePad

640 324 0 65 94 PanPad

641 325 0 0 95 HaloPad

642 326 0 0 96 SweepPad

643 327 0 20 96 Shwimmer

644 328 0 27 96 Converge

645 329 0 64 96 PolarPad

646 330 0 66 96 Celestial

647 331 0 0 97 Rain

648 332 0 45 97 ClaviPad

649 333 0 64 97 HarmoRain

650 334 0 65 97 AfricanWind

651 335 0 66 97 Carib

652 336 0 0 98 SoundTrack

653 337 0 27 98 Prologue

654 338 0 64 98 Ancestral

655 339 0 0 99 Crystal

656 340 0 12 99 SynthDr.Comp

Voice

No.

Voice

No.

(category)

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 115

657 341 0 14 99 Popcorn

658 342 0 18 99 TinyBells

659 343 0 35 99 RoundGlocken

660 344 0 40 99 GlockenChime

661 345 0 41 99 ClearBells

662 346 0 42 99 ChorusBells

663 347 0 64 99 SynthMallet

664 348 0 65 99 SoftCrystal

665 349 0 66 99 LoudGlocken

666 350 0 67 99 ChristmasBel

667 351 0 68 99 VibeBells

668 352 0 69 99 DigitalBells

669 353 0 70 99 AirBells

670 354 0 71 99 BellHarp

671 355 0 72 99 Gamelimba

672 356 0 0 100 Atmosphere

673 357 0 18 100 WarmAtmos.

674 358 0 19 100 HollwRelease

675 359 0 40 100 NylonElPiano

676 360 0 64 100 NylonHarp

677 361 0 65 100 HarpVox

678 362 0 66 100 Atmos.Pad

679 363 0 67 100 Planet

680 364 0 0 101 Brightness

681 365 0 64 101 FantasyBells

682 366 0 96 101 Smokey

683 367 0 0 102 Goblins

684 368 0 64 102 GoblinsSynth

685 369 0 65 102 Creeper

686 370 0 66 102 RingPad

687 371 0 67 102 Ritual

688 372 0 68 102 ToHeaven

689 373 0 70 102 Night

690 374 0 71 102 Glisten

691 375 0 96 102 BellChoir

692 376 0 0 103 Echoes

693 377 0 8 103 Echoes2

694 378 0 14 103 EchoPan

695 379 0 64 103 EchoBells

696 380 0 65 103 BigPan

697 381 0 66 103 SynthPiano

698 382 0 67 103 Creation

699 383 0 68 103 StarDust

700 384 0 69 103 Reso&Panning

701 385 0 0 104 Sci-Fi

702 386 0 64 104 Starz

703 387 0 0 105 Sitar

704 388 0 32 105 DetunedSitar

705 389 0 35 105 Sitar2

706 390 0 96 105 Tambra

707 391 0 97 105 Tamboura

708 392 0 0 106 Banjo

709 393 0 28 106 MutedBanjo

710 394 0 96 106 Rabab

711 395 0 97 106 Gopichant

712 396 0 98 106 Oud

713 397 0 0 107 Shamisen

714 398 0 0 108 Koto

715 399 0 96 108 Taisho-kin

716 400 0 97 108 Kanoon

717 401 0 0 109 Kalimba

718 402 0 0 110 Bagpipe

719 403 0 0 111 Fiddle

720 404 0 0 112 Shanai

721 405 0 64 112 Shanai2

722 406 0 96 112 Pungi

723 407 0 97 112 Hichiriki

724 408 0 0 113 TinkleBell

725 409 0 96 113 Bonang

726 410 0 97 113 Altair

727 411 0 98 113 GamelanGongs

Voice

No.

Voice

No.

(category)

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

728 412 0 99 113 StereoGamlan

729 413 0 100 113 RamaCymbal

730 414 0 101 113 AsianBells

731 415 0 0 114 Agogo

732 416 0 0 115 SteelDrums

733 417 0 97 115 GlassPerc.

734 418 0 98 115 ThaiBells

735 419 0 0 116 Woodblock

736 420 0 96 116 Castanets

737 421 0 0 117 TaikoDrum

738 422 0 96 117 GranCassa

739 423 0 0 118 MelodicTom

740 424 0 64 118 MelodicTom2

741 425 0 65 118 RealTom

742 426 0 66 118 RockTom

743 427 0 0 119 SynthDrum

744 428 0 64 119 AnalogTom

745 429 0 65 119 ElectroPerc.

746 430 0 0 120 Rev.Cymbal

747 431 0 0 121 GtrFretNoise

748 432 0 0 122 BreathNoise

749 433 0 0 123 Seashore

750 434 0 0 124 BirdTweet

751 435 0 0 125 TelephonRing

752 436 0 0 126 Helicopter

753 437 0 0 127 Applause

754 438 0 0 128 Gunshot

755 439 64 0 1 CuttingNoise

756 440 64 0 2 CuttingNoiz2

757 441 64 0 4 StringSlap

758 442 64 0 17 Fl.KeyClick

759 443 64 0 33 Shower

760 444 64 0 34 Thunder

761 445 64 0 35 Wind

762 446 64 0 36 Stream

763 447 64 0 37 Bubble

764 448 64 0 38 Feed

765 449 64 0 49 Dog

766 450 64 0 50 Horse

767 451 64 0 51 BirdTweet2

768 452 64 0 55 Ghost

769 453 64 0 56 Maou

770 454 64 0 65 PhoneCall

771 455 64 0 66 DoorSqueak

772 456 64 0 67 DoorSlam

773 457 64 0 68 ScratchCut

774 458 64 0 69 ScratchSplit

775 459 64 0 70 WindChime

776 460 64 0 71 TelphonRing2

777 461 64 0 81 CarEngineIgn

778 462 64 0 82 CarTiresSqel

779 463 64 0 83 CarPassing

780 464 64 0 84 CarCrash

781 465 64 0 85 Siren

782 466 64 0 86 Train

783 467 64 0 87 JetPlane

784 468 64 0 88 Starship

785 469 64 0 89 Burst

786 470 64 0 90 RollrCoaster

787 471 64 0 91 Submarine

788 472 64 0 97 Laugh

789 473 64 0 98 Scream

790 474 64 0 99 Punch

791 475 64 0 100 Heartbeat

792 476 64 0 101 FootSteps

793 477 64 0 113 MachineGun

794 478 64 0 114 LaserGun

795 479 64 0 115 Explosion

796 480 64 0 116 Firework

Voice

No.

Voice

No.

(category)

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

116 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Drum Kit List

Voice No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/002 127/000/005 127/000/033 127/000/041 127/000/009

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

Group

Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Hit Kit* Jazz Kit Brush Kit Room Kit

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H

37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl

39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll Snare Roll 2

42 F# 130F# 0 Caanet

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Electro Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2

44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks

45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Kick Tight L

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot H Short Snare Pitched

47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Kick Tight Short Kick Wet

48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Kick Short Kick Tight H Kick Jazz Kick Small

49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Stick Ambient

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Snare Short Snare Ambient Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Snare Snappy

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight 2 Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Snare Tight Snappy

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Hybrid Tom 1 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Brush 1 Tom Room 1

54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Close 2

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Hybrid Tom 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Room 2

56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal 2

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Hybrid Tom 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Room 3

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open 2

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Hybrid Tom 4 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Brush 4 Tom Room 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Hybrid Tom 5 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 5 Tom Room 5

61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Hybrid Tom 6 Tom Jazz 6 Tom Brush 6 Tom Room 6

63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2

70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba While H

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba While L

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4 Claves

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open

92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree

97 C# 685C# 5

98 D 6 86 D 5

99 D# 687D# 5

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5

•“ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.

• Each percussion voice uses one note.

• The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “1:

Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0).

•Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.

•Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed

to be played alternately with each other.)

•*: XG optional kit.

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

Drum Kit List

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 117

Voice No. 1 7 8 9 10

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/017 127/000/025 127/000/026 127/000/28

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

Group

Standard Kit 1 Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Dance Kit

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute Kick Dance 1

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open Kick Dance 2

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H Scratch Dance 1

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L Scratch Dance 2

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click Dance Percussion 1

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell Reverse Dance 1

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L Dance Percussion 2

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H Hi Q Dance 1

37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap Snare Aanalog 3

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl Vinyl Noise

39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap Snare Analog 4

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll Reverse Dance 2

42 F# 130F# 0 Caanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Noisy Snare Snappy Electro Snare Noisy 4 Snare Techno

44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks Snare Dance 1

45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Kick Tight 2 Kick 3 Kick Tight 2 Kick Techno Q

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Rim Gate

47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Kick 2 Kick Gate Kick Analog Short Kick Techno L

48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Kick Analog Kick Techno

49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Side Stick Analog Side Stick Analog

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Analog Snare Clap

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap Dance Clap

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Snare Rock Rim Snare Noisy 3 Snare Analog 2 Snare Dry

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Tom Rock 1 Tom Electro 1 Tom Analog 1 Tom Analog 1

54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Analog Hi-Hat Closed Analog3

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 Tom Analog 2 Tom Analog 2

56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 Tom Analog 3 Tom Analog 3

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Analog Hi-Hat Open Analog 2

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Tom Rock 4 Tom Electro 4 Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 5 Tom Analog 5 Tom Analog 5

61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Analog Crash Analog

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 Tom Analog 6 Tom Analog 6

63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine Tambourine Analog

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog Cowbell Analog

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2

70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap Vibraslap Analog

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Analog

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H Bongo Analog H

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L Bongo Analog L

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H Conga Analog H

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Conga Analog M Conga Analog M

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Conga Analog L Conga Analog L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Maracas 2 Maracas 2

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba While H

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba While L

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Claves 2 Claves 2

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H Dance Percussion 3

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L Dance Percussion 4

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch H 2 Scratch H 2 Dance Breath 1

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch L 2 Scratch L 3 Dance Breath 2

92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree

97 C# 685C# 5

98 D 6 86 D 5

99 D# 687D# 5

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

Drum Kit List

118 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

Voice No. 1 11 12 13 14

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/049 126/000/41 126/000/44 126/000/36

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

Group

Standard Kit 1 Symphony Kit CubanKit PopLatinKit

Alternate

Group

ArabicKit

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L Hand Clap

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell Conga H Tip Conga H Tip

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L Conga H Heel Conga H Heel

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H Conga H Open Conga H Open Nakarazan Dom

37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Cabasa

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl Conga H Slap Open Conga H Slap Open Nakarazan Edge

39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap Conga H Slap Conga H Slap Hager Dom

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Conga H Slap Mute Conga H Slap Mute Hager Edge

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll Conga L Tip Conga L Tip Bongo H

42 F# 130F# 0 Caanet Conga L Heel Conga L Heel Bongo L

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Conga L Open Conga L Open Conga H Mute

44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks Conga L Mute Conga L Mute Conga H Open

45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Kick Soft 2 Conga L Slap Open Conga L Slap Open Conga L

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Conga L Slap Conga L Slap Zagrouda H

47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Gran Cassa Conga L Slide Conga L Slide Zagrouda L

48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Gran Cassa Mute Bongo H Open 1 finger Bongo H Open 1 finger Kick Soft

49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Bongo H Open 3 finger Bongo H Open 3 finger

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Band Snare Bongo H Rim Bongo H Rim Snare Soft

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap Bongo H Tip Bongo H Tip Arabic Hand Clap

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Band Snare 2 Bongo H Heel Bongo H Heel Snare

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Tom Jazz 1 Bongo H Slap Bongo H Slap

54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed Bongo L Open 1 finger Bongo L Open 1 finger

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Tom Jazz 2 Bongo L Open 3 finger Bongo L Open 3 finger

56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal Bongo L Rim Bongo L Rim

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Tom Jazz 3 Bongo L Tip Bongo L Tip

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open Bongo L Heel Bongo L Heel

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Tom Jazz 4 Bongo L Slap Bongo L Slap

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Tom Jazz 5 Timbale L Open Timbale L Open

61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Hand Cymbal

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Tom Jazz 6

63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Hand Cymbal Short

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Crash Cymbal 2

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Paila L Paila L Duhulla Dom

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine Timbale H Open Timbale H Open

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Duhulla Tak

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 Duhulla Sak

70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap Claves

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 Short Paila H Paila H Doff Dom

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H Cowbell Top Cowbell Top Katem Dom

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L Katem Tak

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Katem Sak

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Katem Tak

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Guiro Short Guiro Short Doff Tak

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H Guiro Long Guiro Long Tabla Dom

78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L Tabla Tak1

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H Tabla Tik

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L Tambourine Tambourine Tabla Tak2

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa Tabla Sak

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Tabla Roll of Edge

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba While H Tabla Flam

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba While L Maracas Maracas Sagat 1

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short Shaker Shaker Tabel Dom

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long Cabasa Cabasa Sagat 3

87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Cuica Mute Tabel Tak

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H Cuica Open Sagat 2

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L Rik Dom

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Rik Tak 2

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Rik Finger 1

92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute Rik Tak 1

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open Triangle Mute 1 Rik Finger 2

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker Triangle Open 1 Rik Brass Tremolo

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells Rik Sak

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree Bell Tree Rik Tik

97 C# 685C# 5

98 D 6 86 D 5

99 D# 687D# 5

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5

Drum Kit List

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 119

Voice No. 1 15 16 17

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 126/000/037 126/000/065 126/000/115

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

Group

Standard Kit 1 Arabic Kit 2 Arabic Mix Kit

Alternate

Group

Indian Kit

Alternate

Group

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute Zarb Back mf Conga Analog H

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open Zarb Tom f Conga Analog M Indian Hand Clap

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q Zarb Eshareh Conga Analog L Dafli Open

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap Zarb Whipping Vibraslap Dafli Slap 1

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H Tombak Tom f Kick Techno L Dafli Rim 1

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L Neghareh Tom f Side Stick Arabic Mix Duff Open

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap Tombak Back f Snare Techno Duff Slap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise Neghareh Back f Guiro Long Duff Rim

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click Tombak Snap f Kick Techno Q Hatheli Long 2

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell Neghareh Pelang f Open Rim Shot Hatheli Short 2

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L Tombak Trill Funk Snare 2 Baya ge 3

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H Khaligi Clap 1 Kick Arabic Mix Baya ke 3

37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap Arabic Zalgouta Open Funk Snare 1 Baya ghe 3

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl Khaligi Clap 2 Snare Arabic Mix Baya ka 3

39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap Arabic Zalgouta Close Hand Clap Tabla na 4

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Arabic Hand Clap Snare Tabla tin 4

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll Tabel Tak 1 Tom Electro 1 Tablabaya dha 3

42 F# 130F# 0 Caanet Sagat 1 Hi-Hat Closed Arabic Mix 1 Dhol 1 Open

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Tabel Dom Tom Electro 2 Dhol 1 Slap 5

44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks Sagat 2 Hi-Hat Half Arabic Mix 1 Dhol 1 Mute 5

45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Tabel Tak 2 Tom Electro 3 Dhol 1 Open Slap 5

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Sagat 3 Hi-Hat Open Arabic Mix 1 Dhol 1 Roll

47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Riq Tik 3 Tom Electro 4 Dandia Short 6

48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Riq Tik 2 Tom Electro 5 Dandia Long 6

49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Riq Tik Hard 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Chutki

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Riq Tik 1 Tom Electro 6 Chipri

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap Riq Tik Hard 2 Hi-Hat Open 3 1 Khanjira Open

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Riq Tik Hard 3 Reverse Cymbal Khanjira Slap

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Riq Tish Timbale L Khanjira Mute

54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed Riq Snouj 2 Conga H Open Khanjira Bendup

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Riq Roll Timbale H Khanjira Benddown

56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal Riq Snouj 1 Conga H Mute Dholak 1 Open

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Riq Sak Tambourine Dholak 1 Mute 7

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open Riq Snouj 3 Conga L Dholak 1 Slap 7

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Riq Snouj 4 Cowbell Dhol 2 Open

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Riq Tak 1 Claves Dhol 2 Slap 8

61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Riq Brass 1 Bongo H Dhol 2 Rim 8

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Riq Tak 2 Wood Block H Mridangam na 9

63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Riq Brass 2 Bongo L Mridangam din 9

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Riq Dom Wood Block L Mridangam ki 9

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Katem Tak Doff Kurdish Dohol Low f Mridangam ta 9

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine Katem Dom Cabasa Mridangam Chapu 9

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Katem Sak 1 Kurdish Dohol High f Mridangam Lo Closed 10

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Katem Tak 1 Shaker Mridangam Lo Open 10

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Katem Sak 2 Snap 1 Chimta Normal 11

70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap Katem Tak 2 Maracas Chimta Ring 11

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Daholla Sak 2 Snap 2 Dholki Hi Open 12

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H Daholla Sak 1 Khaligi Twaisat 3 3 Dholki Hi Mute 12

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L Daholla Tak 1 Khaligi Twaisat 1 3 Dholki Lo Open 13

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Daholla Dom Khaligi Twaisat 2 3 Dholki Hi Slap 12

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Daholla Tak 2 Khaligi Twaisat 5 Open 3 Dholki Lo Slide 13

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Tablah Prok Khaligi Twaisat 4 Open 3 Khol Open 14

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H Tablah Dom 2 Khaligi Tablah Small Dom 2 Khol slide

78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L Tablah Roll of Edge Khaligi Tar Barashim Group Dom Khol Mute 14

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H Tablah Tak Finger 4 Khaligi Tablah Small Snap Manjira Open 15

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L Tablah Tak Trill 1 Khaligi Tar Barashim Group Sak Manjira Close 15

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa Tablah Tak Finger 3 Khaligi Tablah Small Sak 2 Jhanji Open 16

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Tablah Tak Trill 2 Khaligi Tar Barashim Group Tak Jhanji Close 16

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba While H Tablah Tak Finger 2 Khaligi Tablah Small Tik 2 Mondira Open 17

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba While L Tablah Tak Finger 1 Khaligi Tablah Big Dom 1 Mondira Close 17

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short Tablah Tik 2 Khaligi Tar Segal Dom Indian Bhangra Scat 1

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long Tablah Tik 4 Khaligi Tablah Big Tak 1 Indian Bhangra Scat 2

87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Tablah Tik 3 Khaligi Tar Segal Tak Indian Bhangra Scat 3

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H Tablah Tik 1 Khaligi Tablah Big Sak 1 indian Bhangra Scat 4

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L Tablah Tak 3 Tablah Dom 1 Khomokh Normal

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Tablah Tak 1 Tablah Tak 1 Khomokh Mute

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Tablah Tak 4 Tablah Tremolo Khomokh mltatk

92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute Tablah Tak 2 Tablah Tak 2 Thavil Open

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open Tablah Sak 2 Tablah Tik 1 Thavil Slap

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker Tablah Tremolo Tablah Sak 1 Thavil Mute

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells Tablah Sak 1 Tablah Tik 3 Khartaal

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree Tablah Dom 1 Tablah Tik 2 Dholak 2 Open 18

97 C# 685C# 5 Dholak 2 Slide 18

98 D 6 86 D 5 Dholak 2 Rim 1

99 D# 687D# 5 Dholak 2 Rim 2

100 E 6 88 E 5 Dholak 2 Ring

101 F 6 89 F 5 Dholak 2 Slap

102 F# 690F# 5 G Dholak Body

103 G 6 91 G 5

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

Drum Kit List

120 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Voice No. 1 18 19 28 29 30

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 126/000/125 127/000/127 126/000/001 126/000/002 126/000/112

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

Group

Standard Kit 1 Chinese Kit

Alternate

Group

Chinese Mix Kit

Alternate

Group

SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Animal Kit

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L Da Cha

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H Da Gu mp 2

37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap Da Gu rim

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl Da Gu f 2

39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap Da Gu hand 2

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Da Gu roll 2

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll Pai Gu 4

42 F# 130F# 0 Caanet Pai Gu 4 High

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Pai Gu 3

44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks Pai Gu 3 High

45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Pai Gu 2

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Pai Gu 2 High

47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Pai Gu 1

48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Luo High 1 Cutting Noise Phone Call

49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Gong batter Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Jin Luo Door Slam

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap Luo High 2 String Slap Scratch Cut

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Luo Mid-Low Scratch H 3

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Luo Wind Chime

54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed Jin Luo Low 5 Telephone Ring 2

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Da Cha 5

56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal Da Cha effect 5

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Zhong Cha

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open Xiao Cha effect 1

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Xiao Cha 1

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Mang Luo Low Rooster

61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Mang Luo Mid

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Qing Elephant

63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1 Finger Bell

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Luo big Flute Key Click

Car Engine Ignition

Horse

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Mu Yu Low Car Tires Squeal Cricket

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine Mu Yu Mid-Low

Car Passing

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Mu Yu Mid Car Crash Cow

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Mu Yu High

Siren

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Nan Bang Zi roll 3 Train Tiger

70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap Nan Bang Zi 3 Jet Plane

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Ban Gu 4

Starship Rattlesnake

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H Ban 4 Burst Monkeies

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L Ban Gu roll 4

Roller Coaster

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute

Chinese Opera Voice 1

Submarine Crow

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open

Chinese Opera Voice 2

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L

Chinese Opera Voice 3

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H Yun Luo F4

78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L Yun Luo F#4

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H Yun Luo G4 Dagu Mute 4

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L Yun Luo G#4 Zhongcha Mute 5 Shower Laugh

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa Yun Luo A4 Dagu Heavy 4 Thunder Scream

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Yun Luo A#4 Zhongcha Open 5 Wind Punch

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba While H Yun Luo B4 Paigu Middle Stream Heartbeat

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba While L Yun Luo C5 Paigu Low Bubble Footeps

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short Yun Luo C#5 Xiaocha Mute 6 Feed

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long Yun Luo D5 Bangu

87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Yun Luo D#5 Xiaocha Open 6

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H Yun Luo E5 Bangzi

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L Yun Luo F5 Muyu Low

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Yun Luo F#5 Zhongluo Mute 7

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Yun Luo G5 Muyu Mid-Low

92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute Yun Luo G#5 Zhongluo Open 7

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open Yun Luo A5 Muyu Middle

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker Yun Luo A#5 Xiaoluo Open

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells Yun Luo B5 Muyu Mid-High

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree Yun Luo C6 Muyu High Dog Machine Gun

97 C# 685C# 5 Horse Laser Gun

98 D 6 86 D 5 Bird Tweet 2 Explosion

99 D# 687D# 5 Firework

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5 Ghost

103 G 6 91 G 5 Maou

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

● Synth. & FX

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 121

Style List

Style

No.

Style No.

(Category)

Style Name

Pop&Rock

11FunkPopRock

22AcousticRock

33Cool8Beat

4460’sRock1

5560’sRock2

66VintageGtrPop

7760’sGuitarPop

8870’s8Beat

9990’sGuitarPop

10 10 KoolShuffle

11 11 BubblegumPop

12 12 BritPopSwing

13 13 JazzPop

14 14 HardRock

15 15 RootRock

16 16 RockShuffle

17 17 Unplugged

Ballad

18 1 8BeatAdria

19 2 OrganBallad

20 3 PianoBallad

21 4 8BeatBallad

22 5 EPBallad

23 6 6-8Modern

24 7 Chillout1

25 8 NewR&BBallad

26 9 16BeatBallad

27 10 PowerBallad

28 11 EasyBallad

Dance

29 1 ModChartPop

30 2 RetroClub

31 3 USChartHit

32 4 ClubBeat

33 5 Electronica

34 6 FunkyHouse

35 7 ChartR&B

36 8 MellowHipHop

37 9 SoulR&B

38 10 Chillout2

39 11 Ibiza

40 12 TechnoParty

41 13 DiscoHouse

42 14 DiscoPhilly

43 15 70’sDisco

44 16 80’sDisco

45 17 DreamDance

46 18 House

47 19 FrenchHouse

48 20 Garage

49 21 ClassicHipHop

50 22 NewHipHop

51 23 HipHopGroove

52 24 LatinDJ’s

Swing&Jazz

53 1 OrchBigBand

54 2 OrchestraSwing1

55 3 OrchestraSwing2

56 4 BigBandFast

57 5 BigBandShuffle

58 6 MidnightSwing

59 7 JumpJive

60 8 OrganGroove

61 9 JazzClub

62 10 Five-Four

63 11 JazzWaltzFast

64 12 Dixieland

65 13 Ragtime

66 14 Charleston

R&B

67 1 BluesRock

68 2 BluesBallad

69 3 Soul

70 4 FranklySoul

71 5 6-8Soul

72 6 SoulBrothers

73 7 OldiesR&R

74 8 60’sRock&Roll

75 9 Rock&Roll

76 10 Twist

77 11 GospelSisters

78 12 WorshipMed

79 13 DetroitPop

80 14 ModernR&B

81 15 ComboBoogie

Country

82 1 NewCountry

83 2 CountryHits

84 3 CountryBallad

85 4 CountryPop

86 5 CountryShuffle

87 6 Country2-4

88 7 FingerPickin

89 8 Bluegrass

90 9 Hoedown

91 10 CountryWaltz

Latin

92 1 BrazilianSamba

93 2 BossaNova

94 3 FastBossa

95 4 Pop Bossa

96 5 Forro

97 6 Beguine

98 7 Mambo

99 8 Salsa

100 9 Calypso

101 10 Merengue

102 11 Bachata

103 12 CubanSon

104 13 RumbaIsland

105 14 RumbaFlamenca

106 15 HappyReggae

107 16 LatinDisco

108 17 Joropo

109 18 Parranda

110 19 Reggaeton

Ballroom

111 1 VienneseWaltz

112 2 EnglishWaltz

113 3 Slowfox

114 4 Foxtrot

115 5 Quickstep

116 6 Tango

117 7 Swingfox

118 8 Pasodoble

Style

No.

Style No.

(Category)

Style Name

119 9 Samba

120 10 ChaChaCha

121 11 Rumba

122 12 Jive

123 13 OrganSwing

124 14 OrganSamba

125 15 OrganQuickstep

126 16 9-8Waltz

127 17 TraditionalWaltz

Movie&Show

128 1 70’sTVTheme

129 2 Sci-fiMarch

130 3 WildWest

131 4 SaturdayNight

132 5 Showtune

133 6 Moonlight6-8

134 7 ClassicPianoBld

135 8 BaroqueAir

136 9 OrchestralBolero

137 10 OrchestralMarch

138 11 ChristmasSwing

139 12 ChristmasWaltz

Entertainer

140 1 DiscoFox

141 2 DiscoHands

142 3 AlpBallad

143 4 ScandSlowRock

144 5 ScandShuffle

145 6 70’sFrenchHit

146 7 SchlagerPop

147 8 SchlagerBeat

148 9 SchlagerPolka

149 10 PolkaPop

150 11 Tijuana

151 12 Carnival

152 13 PubPiano

World

153 1 IrishDance

154 2 SpanishPaso

155 3 FrenchMusette

156 4 Sirtaki

157 5 PopFlamenco

158 6 Reel

159 7 Jig

160 8 Tarantella

161 9 OberPolka

162 10 OberWaltzer

163 11 GermanMarch

164 12 USMarch

165 13 6-8March

166 14 Duranguense

167 15 CumbiaGrupera

168 16 Saeidy

169 17 WehdaSaghira

170 18 Laff

171 19 ArabicEuro

172 20 OrientalPop

173 21 Bhajan

174 22 Bhangra

175 23 Xi Qing Luo Gu

176 24 Jing Ju Jie Zou

Style

No.

Style No.

(Category)

Style Name

122 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

No. MDB Name

All Time Hits

1A Bridge To Cross Troubled Water

2 All Of My Loving

3 All OK Now

4A Song For New England

5 Blowing In The Folk

6 Boots For Walking

7 Call Me When You Rock

8 Don’t Be Bad To Me

9 Get Back To Where You Belong

10 Guitar Wheels

11 Heaven? Nobody Gets Too Much

12 I Was Born Smiling

13 I Watch My Tears Go By

14 Leave Me Tender, Love Me True

15 Let Me Hold Your Hand

16 Letters Of Love

17 Living In A Colored Submarine

18 Love? Don’t Throw It Away

19 Makin’ It Thru The Night

20 Mrs. Robin’s Son

21 My Heart Is Very Simple

22 My Lover’s A Dream

23 My Shell Swing

24 Party? Oh, Blah Di!

25 Please Do Love Me In Liverpool

26 Riding Ticket

27 These Ones Are Young

28 This Game Makes You Cry

29 This Night Has Been A Hard Day!

30 Till The Moon Deserts The Sky

31 Woods Of Norway

32 You’re Just OK!

33 You’re So Young At Heart

Modern Pop

34 A Cosy Life In Italy

35 All Get Up

36 Angles of Charlie

37 A Sunshine Walk

38 Bossa Woman

39 Cross The Mersey By Ferry

40 Dream Of A Lover

41 Everything’s Changed

42 I’m Torn

43 It Is Always Raining On Me

44 It’s Only Words

45 It’s Simply Love

46 Life Groove

47 Life’s Walk

48 Love Goes This Way

49 Not Full Time Love

50 Our Current Love

51 Rollercoaster Through Life

52 Seriously Dippy

53 She’s One For Me

54 Shining Light For Love

55 Sorry May Be Hard To Say

56 Stars To Reach For

57 Sure Of That?

58 Swinging Sultan

59 Tell Her Your Feelings

60 The Girl Belongs To Me

61 This Affair’s In The Family

62 This Thing’s Called Love

63 Time Riding

64 What’s Taken So Long?

65 You Only Need Love

Sing Alongs

66 Danny’s Boy

67 Dear, My Clementine

68 Deep In Texas’s Heart

69 Ease Up Mother Brown

70 Espana Viva

71 Good Night For The Ladies

72 Here Are Happy Days Again

73 High Old Silver Lining

74 My Dad’s A Dustman

75 My Man Is Old

76 My Sunshine Is You

77 Old Smokey

78 Smiling Irish Eyes

79 Song For Susanna

80 Song Of The Sideboard

81 This Iron Is Old!

82 Tipperary’s A Long Way

Easy Listening

83 Balloon Bossa

84 I’m Gonna Leave Durham

85 La Mer Is Swinging

86 Making It Through The Rain

87 Morning’s New World

88 Mother!

89 Portugal In April

90 Raindrops On My Head

91 The Wind And Me

92 This Is Something Silly!

93 Whistling A Last Goodbye

Pop Classics

94 All On My Own

95 Are You Standing Still?

96 Boxing Song

97 Broken Heart

98 Complete Eclipse

99 Don’t Break My Heart Beat

100 Drifting On Broadway

101 Easier To Say It Than Do It

102 Girl Belonging To Bobby

103 Girl With Brown Eyes

104 Give Thanks For Music

105 Heartache Beat

106 Holiday In Summer Season

107 I’m Your Venus

108 It’s Really Not Usual In Wales

109 John B’s Sloop

110 Lane Of Pennies

111 Loves You She Does

112 My Religion Is Mislaid

113 Paradise Can’t Be As Nice

114 Portatone Man?

115 Raindrop Walk

116 Rocking My Life

117 Sally’s Got A Mustang

118 Shape Me And Bend Me

119 Sky Spirits

120 Somebody Needs Someone Else

121 Spin The Wheel

122 Suzie Wake Up

123 Sweden Takes A Chance

124 Sweet Lord Song

125 This Afternoon’s Sunny

126 This Day’s Just Perfect

127 This Is My Party

128 To Love Some Reggae

129 Tulsa Is 24 Hours Away

130 We Are Together And Happy

131 With My Friends To Help Me

132 You Can Help Yourself

Pop Ballads

133 Don’t Let The Sun Set For Me

134 Heavenly Creatures With Halo

135 It’s Crazy How I Miss You

136 Missing You Like Crazy

137 No Matter What The Boys Do Tell

138 What Is One More Year?

No. MDB Name

139 Where Are You Going To?

Ballad

140 At Once Ballad

141 Ballad For A Hero

142 Ballad For A Woman

143 Candle On The Piano

144 Don’t Leave Me Now

145 Do You Know Me Yet

146 Eyes Of Blue

147 Friends Are For Singing

148 Hard To Say Sorry

149 Hello, Do You Hear Me Playing?

150 I Can’t Live Without You

151 I Will Be There For You

152 I’ll Make Soul With You

153 I Love You In French

154 I’m Saving It All For You!

155 I Will Fly Away One Day

156 London Streets

157 Love’s Glory

158 Love’s Vision

159 Nothing Will Change My Love

160 One Time When We Touch

161 San Francisco Heart

162 Soft Songs Are Killing Me!

163 Take It Back For Good

164 The World Is What We Are

165 Up? It’s Where We Belong

166 You Are Inspiring

167 You Lift My Wings

168 Your True Color

Rock

169 69 Summers Long

170 Alabama’s Sweet Home

171 Born To Be Mild

172 Can’t Get Satisfied

173 Can We Stick Together

174 Dave On The Road

175 Don’t Think About Tomorrow

176 Dusting The Wind

177 Go For A Spin

178 Is The Heat On?

179 I Want You To Want Rock

180 Jumping Rock

181 Just Give Me Love And Rock

182 Last Countdown

183 Nobody Else Is A Champion

184 This Woman Plays Honky Tonk

185 Tiger’s Eye

186 Velvet Is Black

187 Wanting To Break Free

188 Whatever You Rock

189 Your Kindness Is Magic

Rock&Roll

190 All Shaken Up

191 Beethoven’s Rocking

192 Crazy Little Love Thing

193 Don’t Hurry Love

194 Good Looking Charm

195 Good Molly, Miss Golly

196 Great Fire Balls

197 I’m A Wanderer

198 I Won’t Be Cruel

199 Julie Does The Twist

200 Let’s Play The Twist

201 Let’s Sue Peggy

202 Particularly No Place To Go

203 Rock & Roll Jail

204 Rocking Blue Shoes

205 Rocking For 24 Hours

206 Shouting Twist

207 Teddy Is A Bear

No. MDB Name

Music Database List

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 123

208 The Music Is Rock&Roll

209 What A Day That Will Be

210 You Got Me Going, Really!

Oldies

211 All I Need Is The Air

212 Are You Sorry Now?

213 Breaking Up Isn’t Easy To Do

214 Diana’s Twist

215 Final Waltz

216 Girl From Uptown

217 Going Down Town

218 Golden Silence

219 Guitar For An Apache

220 Have I Got It?

221 Heaven Has Three Steps

222 He Kissed Crystal!

223 Hey, Let’s Rock Tonight!

224 I’m A Pola!

225 Magic Puff

226 Marina’s Song

227 Mend A Chino

228 Motion Of Poetry

229 My Pillow Has Tears On

230 Pete Retite

231 Please Be Mine, Baby

232 Star Of Movie

233 Teenie Bikini

234 The Ghetto Is In Me

235 The Lovin’ Feeling Has Gone

236 These Lips Are Lucky

237 This Doll’s Alive!

238 This Land Is Wonderful!

239 This Woman’s Pretty!

240 Tomorrow Will You Love Me

241 Tonight Do You Feel Lonesome

242 Twisting Again

243 Walking Right Back

244 We Don’t Want Milk Today

245 Words Aren’t Easy

246 You & You Alone

Organist

247 Bamba Party

248 Cat Groove

249 El Ranchero

250 Face Of A Child

251 Form

252 Guagli On Organ

253 Guide Me To My Home

254 It’s Dolly, Say Hello!

255 Nowhere It Came Out Of

256 Ribbon Of Yellow

257 Samba Cavaquinho

258 Samba Delicado

259 Side By Side In The Barn

260 Steam Train Samba

261 Tico Samba

262 Two Times Yeh!

263 Whispering Organ

264 White And Pale

Dance Floor

265 Adagio From Ibiza

266 Baa Bee Girl

267 Baby I Love Loving You

268 Buy Me Bailame, Please

269 Catch 22

270 Children In Trance?

271 Girl

272 High In The Sky

273 It’s So Horny

274 Janeiro Samba

275 Life Is High

276 London, R U Prepared?

No. MDB Name

277 Love First Time I Saw You

278 My Eyes Can’t Take Off!

279 No Dinero, No Tengo

280 Once More

281 Rose From The Desert

282 She Believes In Life After Love

283 Tambor DJ

284 This Song Is Something!

285 Up Is The Way To Move

Disco

286 A Day’s Difference

287 Babylon Rivers

288 Born Alive Disco

289 Brown Girl At The Disco

290 Cool Daddy Disco

291 Dee Eye Ess See Oh!

292 Disco Hustle

293 Don’t Misunderstand Me

294 Do You Love To Love?

295 Fever At Night

296 Go Where The Music Takes You

297 I Love That Boat!

298 It Really Is A Funky Town

299 I’ve Never Known Love LikeIt

300 Keepin’ Alive

301 Khan Disco

302 Local New Yorker

303 Make My Fire Burn Again

304 Mother Is Baking

305 Never Give Up On You

306 Philadelphia Sound

307 Russia’s Mad Priest

308 Searching For Freedom

309 Swedish Queen

310 Theme Of Love

311 Train Of Love

312 Wear It Out? Or Use It Up?

313 Why Am See A?

314 You’re Everything For Me

Swing

315 Big Kiss For Dream Building

316 Blue Roses For The Lady

317 Call The Whole Thing Off

318 Charles On

319 Get Out Of Bed

320 Goodbye To Blues Swing

321 High Hope Swing

322 Joy I Love Her So

323 Just Chickens Here!

324 My Shadow And Me

325 Not Forgettable

326 Not Misbehaving

327 Out Of Your Kick

328 Rag Band Time For Alex?

329 Ragtime Tiger

330 Safari Swing

331 Smiling Swing

332 Steam Train Boogie

333 Swing Yourself Up

334 Tap Dancing Bo

335 Thank You In Germany

336 The Importance Of Roses

337 The Sandman Gives Me A Dream

338 Two Foot Five

339 Yes Sir, My Baby Can Swing

340 You’re My Coffee’s Cream

Jazz

341 I Have All That Rhythm

342 My Home Is Pasadena

343 Not Decided

344 That Indigo Feeling

345 These Winners Are Easy

No. MDB Name

346 Wild Cat Dixie

BigBand

347 Big Band Patrol

348 If Only I Could Chime

349 Jiving Wailing And Jumping

350 Leroy Is Bad. Very Bad

351 L Is For The Way You Look At Me

352 Please Fly And Swing With Me

353 So What Is Not Old?

354 Tasty Honey

355 This Lady? She’s A Tramp

356 Wintry Wind Blowing

R&B/Gospel

357 Admire

358 As Played On Portatone

359 Baby Groove

360 Boys At The End Of The Road

361 Don’t Change Your Mind Baby

362 Don’t Get Excited!

363 It’s Soul, Man!

364 Knocking Wood

365 Loco Twist

366 On The Rivers Side

367 Sir Duke Is Wondering

368 Unchained Heart

369 When Man Loves Someone

370 Will I See You Again

371 Wish I Could Groove

372 You Should Think Frankly

Country

373 A Boy From The Country

374 Back On The Road

375 Blue Grass Bonanza

376 Forever In My Mind

377 Hi, Mary

378 Home On Country Highways

379 I Only Ever Need You

380 Lucille Left Me

381 Road Of The King

382 Special Orange

383 This Song Is Crazy!

384 Waltz In Tennessee

Latin

385

At Daylight The Bananaboat Comes

386 At The Copa

387 Bossa Gets The Blame

388 Bossa In Blue

389 Cherry And Apple - Colored

390 Corazon un Tengo

391 Don’t Worry, Reggae!

392 Eyes From Spain

393 Farewell To Jamaica

394 Flea From Spain

395 Frenetic Beguine

396 Guitar For Volare

397 Have You Been In Guantanamera

398 I Can’t Bear More Than This

399 Italian Mambo

400 It Is A Band, Aah!

401 Jamaican Sun

402 Just A Little Spanish City

403 Lots Of Besame

404 Love’s Amor In Latin

405 Luminous

406 Mambo Jamming

407 Mentiroso Es

408 My Sweet Calypso Girl

409 Not Less

410 Only One Note Makes A Samba

411 Pasodoble Cani

412 Patricia Is Dancing The Cha Cha

413 Rumba For Volare

No. MDB Name

Music Database List

124 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

414 Rushing Fools

415 Say No More In Brazil

416 Start The Beguine

417 Swaying Rumba

418 Taxi In Tijuana

419 Thirty Second Bossa

420 Three Times Perhaps

421 Vida De Los Caminos

Latin Pop

422 Dance In The Morning

423 You’re Mine Baby

Ballroom

424 Cumparsita Tango

425 He’s Got To Go

426 Moon Waltz

427 Old St. Bernards

428 On Sunday? I Never Will!

429 Perfidious One

430 Quando Samba

431 Say Magnifique!

432 This House Is Not Young

433 Yellow Bird Rumba

Christmas

434 Christmas Jingle

435 It’s The Most Wonderful Time

436 Rednosed Rudolph

437 Silent Christmas

438 This Boy Child Is Mary’s

439 Waltz At Christmas

Classical

440 Cannot Remember My Dreams

441 Classical Maria

442 Dream Of Love

443 Gladiators Entry

444 Skaters Dance

445 Sonata In The Moonlight

446 Song In The Key Of F

447 Spring Voices

448 Strings In The Air

449 The March Of Radetzky

450 Tristesse Third Etude

451 Waltz Of The Fledermaus

Family

452 Califragidocilistic? It’s Super!

453 Necessary Bear

454 Noisy Old Car?

Instrumentals

455 Acapulco Swings In The 20s

456 Adagio Chillout

457 Birds Played At Night

458 Concerto Of Love

459 Dancing Musicbox

460 Infant’s Pavane Chillout

461 Invitation To The Shak

462 Jerry’s Binx

463 Lonely Piper

464 Maple Ragtime

465 Paris Has Many Poor People

466 Petite Clarinet

467 Piece Of Funk

468 Rumba For Elena

469 String Holiday

470 Waltz Around The World

471 Yak This Sax

Party Time

472 Aga Doo

473 Big Samba Bamboo

474 Blankenesenolop

475 Dancing Bird

476 Going With A Good Thing

477 Hands Up Party

No. MDB Name

478 I Love To Drink Cider

479 Kreuzberg

480 Louie’s My Brother

481 Mexican Trumpet

482 Mr. Schmidtchen

483 No Beer on Hawaii

484 Russ’ Ozone Party

485 Song Of The Chicken

486 The Bucklehuck

Schlager

487 Autobahnpolka

488 Blind Passenger

489 Capri Beat

490 Deep Love

491 Glaube An Wunder

492 Goodbye Amor

493 I Have Sad Love

494 In Ewigkeit

495 Italian Guy

496 Mexican Fiesta

497 Moscow City

498 No Tears

499 Oh Maria

500 Paloma Pop

501 Spanish Island

502 The Little House

503 Where Can I Find Love?

504 Wonderful Blonde

Worship

505 Forever Singing Your Love

506 I Am Everything

507 Lord Is Great

508 Love Cannot Be Greater

509 Our God Is Mighty

510 Rain Down Holy Spirit

511 With My Total Heart

Screen Theme

512 Ark Raiders March

513 A Spy Does It Better

514 Bank Robbers Ballad

515 Best On The Bill

516 Bills Barnacles

517 Dart Playing TV Theme

518 Daughters And Sons

519 Don’t Be A Muppet!

520 Do You Think England’s Done?

521 Farm Based Soap Theme

522 Fighting Stars

523 Flash Disco

524 Holiday Camp Rock

525 It’s A Big Country

526 June & Terry’s Theme

527 Lovin’ Summer

528 Magnificent Flying Men

529 Main For Rain

530 Mi-Re-Do

531 My Prince Will Come One Day

532 Only Friends But Good Ones

533 Paradise Conquest

534 Seven Magnificent Cowboys

535 Song Of The Trolley

536 The Fantastic Getaway

537 These Are My Favorites!

538 Tie, Tails, And A Hat

539 Twelve O’Clock Theme

540 You’re The Only One I Want

Showtime

541 A Nickel In The Nickelodeon

542 Dance Lord

543 Dance Of Fire

544 Entertainment That Is

545 It’s Only A Day Away!

No. MDB Name

546 It’s Time For Cabaret!

547 I Wished I Danced All Night

548 No Business Like It!

549 Parade At Easter

550 The Cat’s Memory

551 The Greatest Times

552 The Roses Are Coming Up

553 The Sun Sets, The Sun Rises

554 Tonight At The Westside

Traditional

555 Abide This Hymn

556 Ave Maria No More

557 Can Can Orpheus?

558 Fun In the Forest

559 Moulin Heart

560 Texas Yellow Rose

March & Polka

561 Marching RAF

562 Rosa

563 That Polka Is Happy!

564 Vienna Forever

Waltz

565 Amsterdam’s Favorite Flowers

566 Amsterdam’s Old Windmill

567 Charmaine’s Waltz

568 Daisy’s Bicycle

569 Fascination Waltz

570 I’m Trying To Remember

571 Is It True Love?

572 Lover Waltz

573 Samson’s Girl

574 Snow Waltz

575 The Little Pub

576 Waltzing To Whatever Will Be

577 Waltz In Raggy Time

578 Waltz Of Amore

579 Waltz Of The Cuckoo

580 Waltz Of The Emperor

581 Waltz To Skate In Wintertime

World

582 Alabina Orient

583 Close Your Face

584 Die Sabber josija

585 Goodbye Roma

586 I Land On The Sun

587 La Ballade De Gerard

588 La Cucarumba

589 La Maison Viens

590 La Puntualidad

591 Latin Cuccuru

592 Musette De Reine

593 Oh Beautiful Italian Sun

594 Only Say Hello

595 Populaire Chanson

596 Santa Lou Cheer

597 Shenandoah’s Far Away

598 The Classy Trumpeter

599 Van Maas Land

600 Ya Salama

No. MDB Name

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 125

Voice Effect Type List

● Harmony Types

No. Harmony Type Description

1 01(Standard Duet)

Harmony types 01–14 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the sin-

gle-note melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the auto

accompaniment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing

songs that contain chord data.

2 02(Standard Trio)

3 03(Full Chord)

4 04(Rock Duet)

5 05(Country Duet)

6 06(Country Trio)

7 07(Block)

8 08(4-Way Close 1)

9 09(4-Way Close 2)

10 10(4-Way Open)

11 11(1+5)

12 12(Octave)

13 13(Strum)

14 14(Multi Assign)

15 15(Echo 1/4)

Types 15–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in time with

the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompaniment is on or not;

however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo setting (page 72). The individual

note values in each type let you synchronize the effect precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings

are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets, 1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note

triplets.

• The Echo effect Types (15–18) create delayed repeats of each note played.

• The Tremolo effect Types (19–22) repeat all held notes (up to four).

• The Trill effect Types (23–26) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two notes are held.

16 16(Echo 1/6)

17 17(Echo 1/8)

18 18(Echo 1/12)

19 19(Tremolo 1/8)

20 20(Tremolo 1/12)

21 21(Tremolo 1/16)

22 22(Tremolo 1/32)

23 23(Trill 1/12)

24 24(Trill 1/16)

25 25(Trill 1/24)

26 26(Trill 1/32)

Voice Effect Type List

126 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

● Reverb Types

No. Type Description MSB LSB

1 HALL1

Reverb simulating the acoustics of a hall.

2 HALL2 116

3 HALL3 117

4 HALL4 118

5 HALL5 11

6 HALL M 16

7 HALL L 17

8 BASIC HALL 130

9 LARGE HALL 131

10 ATMO HALL 123

11 ROOM1

Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room.

216

12 ROOM2 217

13 ROOM3 218

14 ROOM4 219

15 ROOM5 20

16 ROOM6 21

17 ROOM7 22

18 ROOM S 25

19 ROOM M 26

20 ROOM L 27

21 ACOSTIC ROOM 220

22 DRUMS ROOM 221

23 PERC ROOM 222

24 STAGE1

Reverb suitable for a solo instrument.

316

25 STAGE2 317

26 STAGE3 30

27 STAGE4 31

28 PLATE1

Reverb simulating a plate reverb unit.

416

29 PLATE2 417

30 PLATE3 40

31 GM PLATE 47

32 TUNNEL Simulates a cylindrical space expanding to left and right. 17 0

33 CANYON A hypothetical acoustic space which extends without limit. 18 0

34 BASEMENT A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance. 19 0

35 WHITE ROOM A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay. 16 0

36 NO EFFECT No effect. 00

Voice Effect Type List

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

127

●

Chorus Types

No. Type Description MSB LSB

1 CHORUS1

Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

66 17

2 CHORUS2 66 8

3 CHORUS3 66 16

4 CHORUS4 66 1

5 CHORUS5 65 2

6 CHORUS6 65 0

7 CHORUS7 65 1

8 CHORUS8 65 8

9 CHORUS FAST 65 16

10 CHORUS LITE 65 17

11 GM CHORUS1 65 3

12 GM CHORUS2 65 4

13 GM CHORUS3 65 5

14 GM CHORUS4 65 6

15 FB CHORUS 65 7

16 CELESTE1

A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.

66 0

17 CELESTE2 66 2

18 SYMPHONIC1

Adds more stages to the modulation of Celeste.

68 16

19 SYMPHONIC2 68 0

20 FLANGER1

Adds a sweeping effect to the sound.

67 8

21 FLANGER2 67 16

22 FLANGER3 67 17

23 FLANGER4 67 1

24 FLANGER5 67 0

25 GM FLANGER 67 7

26 ROTARY SP1

Simulates a rotary speaker.

69 16

27 ROTARY SP2 71 17

28 ROTARY SP3 71 18

29 ROTARY SP4 70 17

30 ROTARY SP5 66 18

31 ROTARY SP6 69 0

32 ROTARY SP7 71 22

33 2WAY ROT SP 86 0

34 AUTO PAN1

Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right, front, back).

71 16

35 AUTO PAN2 71 0

36 EP AUTOPAN 71 21

37 T_AUTO PAN1 Tempo synchronized Auto PAN. 121 0

38 TREMOLO1

Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation.

70 16

39 TREMOLO2 71 19

40 TREMOLO3 70 0

41 EP TREMOLO 70 18

42 GT TREMOLO1 71 20

43 GT TREMOLO2 70 19

44 T_TREMOLO 120 0

45 NO EFFECT No effect. 00

Voice Effect Type List

128

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

●

DSP Types

No. Type Description MSB LSB

1 HALL1

Reverb simulating the acoustics of a hall.

2 HALL2 116

3 HALL3 117

4 HALL4 118

5 HALL5 11

6 HALL M 16

7 HALL L 17

8 BASIC HALL 130

9 LARGE HALL 131

10 ATMO HALL 123

11 ROOM1

Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room.

216

12 ROOM2 217

13 ROOM3 218

14 ROOM4 219

15 ROOM5 20

16 ROOM6 21

17 ROOM7 22

18 ROOM S 25

19 ROOM M 26

20 ROOM L 27

21 ACOSTIC ROOM 220

22 DRUMS ROOM 221

23 PERC ROOM 222

24 STAGE1

Reverb suitable for a solo instrument.

316

25 STAGE2 317

26 STAGE3 30

27 STAGE4 31

28 PLATE1

Reverb simulating a plate reverb unit.

416

29 PLATE2 417

30 PLATE3 40

31 GM PLATE 47

32 TUNNEL Simulates a cylindrical space expanding to left and right. 17 0

33 CANYON A hypothetical acoustic space which extends without limit. 18 0

34 BASEMENT A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance. 19 0

35 WHITE ROOM A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay. 16 0

36 CHORUS1

Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

66 17

37 CHORUS2 66 8

38 CHORUS3 66 16

39 CHORUS4 66 1

40 CHORUS5 65 2

41 CHORUS6 65 0

42 CHORUS7 65 1

43 CHORUS8 65 8

44 CHORUS FAST 65 16

45 CHORUS LITE 65 17

46 GM CHORUS1 65 3

47 GM CHORUS2 65 4

48 GM CHORUS3 65 5

49 GM CHORUS4 65 6

50 FB CHORUS 65 7

51 CELESTE1

A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.

66 0

52 CELESTE2 66 2

53 SYMPHONIC1

Adds more stages to the modulation of Celeste.

68 16

54 SYMPHONIC2 68 0

55 ENS DETUNE1

Chorus effect without modulation, created by adding a slightly pitch-shifted sound.

87 0

56 ENS DETUNE2 87 16

57 KARAOKE1

Echo for karaoke.

20 0

58 KARAOKE2 20 1

59 KARAOKE3 20 2

60 ER1

This effect isolates only the early reﬂection components of the reverb.

61 ER2 91

62 GATE REVERB Simulation of gated reverb. 10 0

63 REVERS GATE Simulation of gated reverb played back in reverse. 11 0

64 EQ DISCO

Equalizer effect that boosts both high and low frequencies, as is typical in most disco

music.

76 16

65 EQ TEL

Equalizer effect that cuts both high and low frequencies, to simulate the sound heard

through a telephone receiver.

76 17

66 2BAND EQ Stereo EQ which emphasizes low and high frequencies. 77 0

Voice Effect Type List

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

129

67 3BAND EQ

Mono EQ which emphasizes low and high frequencies, and attenuates mid-range frequen-

cies.

76 0

68 ST 3BAND EQ

Stereo EQ which emphasizes low and high frequencies, and attenuates mid-range fre-

quencies.

76 18

69 HM ENHANCE1

Adds new harmonics to the input signal to make the sound stand out.

81 16

70 HM ENHANCE2 81 0

71 FLANGER1

Adds a sweeping effect to the sound.

67 8

72 FLANGER2 67 16

73 FLANGER3 67 17

74 FLANGER4 67 1

75 FLANGER5 67 0

76 GM FLANGER 67 7

77 V_FLANGER Flanger which simulates vintage tube and fuzz sounds. 104 0

78 TEMPO FLANGER Tempo synchronized ﬂanger. 107 0

79 DELAY LCR1

Produces three delayed sounds: L, R and C (center).

516

80 DELAY LCR2 50

81 DELAY LR Produces two delayed sounds: L and R. Two feedback delays are provided. 6 0

82 ECHO Two delayed sounds (L and R), and independent feedback delays for L and R. 7 0

83 CROSS DELAY The feedback of the two delayed sounds is crossed. 8 0

84 TEMPO DELAY Tempo synchronized delay. 21 0

85 TEMPO ECHO Tempo synchronized delay. 21 8

86 TEMPO CROSS Tempo synchronized L&R delay. 22 0

87 V_DST ROCA

Vintage Distortion.

103 18

88 V_DST FUSION 103 19

89 V_DST CRUNC 98 28

90 V_DST VINTAG 98 29

91 V_DST HARD2 98 30

92 V_DST HEAVY 98 31

93 V_DST HARD1 98 0

94 V_DST SOFT 98 2

95 DIST HARD1

Hard-edge distortion.

75 16

96 DIST HARD2 75 22

97 DIST SOFT1

Soft, warm distortion.

75 17

98 DIST SOFT2 75 23

99 DIST HEAVY Heavy distortion. 73 0

100 OVERDRIVE1

Adds mild distortion to the sound.

74 0

101 OVERDRIVE2 74 9

102 ST DIST Stereo distortion. 73 8

103 ST OD Stereo Overdrive. 74 8

104 ST DIST HARD Hard-edge stereo distortion. 75 18

105 ST DIST SOFT Soft, warm soft distortion. 75 19

106 AMP SIM1

A simulation of a guitar amp.

75 0

107 AMP SIM2 75 1

108 ST AMP1

Stereo amp simulator.

75 20

109 ST AMP2 75 21

110 ST AMP3 75 8

111 ST AMP4 75 24

112 ST AMP5 75 25

113 ST AMP6 75 26

114 DST+DELAY1

Distortion and Delay are connected in series.

95 16

115 DST+DELAY2 95 0

116 OD+DELAY1

Overdrive and Delay are connected in series.

95 17

117 OD+DELAY2 95 1

118 CMP+DST+DLY1

Compressor, Distortion and Delay are connected in series.

96 16

119 CMP+DST+DLY2 96 0

120 CMP+OD+DLY1

Compressor, Overdrive and Delay are connected in series.

96 17

121 CMP+OD+DLY2 96 1

122 V_DST H+DLY

V Distortion and Delay are connected in series.

98 1

123 V_DST S+DLY 98 3

124 DST+TDLY Distortion and Tempo Delay are connected in series. 100 0

125 OD+TDLY Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series. 100 1

126 COMP+DIST1

Compressor and Distotion are connected in series.

73 16

127 COMP+DIST2 73 1

128 CMP+DST+TDLY Compressor, Distotion and Tempo Delay are connected in series. 101 0

129 CMP+OD+TDLY1

Compressor, Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series.

101 1

130 CMP+OD+TDLY2 101 16

131 CMP+OD+TDLY3 101 17

132 CMP+OD+TDLY4 101 18

133 CMP+OD+TDLY5 101 19

134 CMP+OD+TDLY6 101 20

No. Type Description MSB LSB

Voice Effect Type List

130

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

135 V_DST H+TDL1

V Distotion and Tempo Delay are connected in series.

103 0

136 V_DST H+TDL2 103 17

137 V_DST S+TDL1 103 1

138 V_DST S+TDL2 103 16

139 COMP MED

Holds down the output level when a speciﬁed input level is exceeded. A sense of attack

can also be added to the sound.

83 16

140 COMP HEAVY 83 17

141 COMP MELODY 105 16

142 COMP BASS 105 17

143 MBAND COMP This effect independently compresses the level of certain frequency bands in the sound. 105 0

144 COMPRESSOR

Holds down the output level when a speciﬁed input level is exceeded. A sense of attack

can also be added to the sound.

83 0

145 NOISE GATE Gates the audio signal when the audio signal falls below a speciﬁed level. 84 0

146 VCE CANCEL Attenuates the audio in the center position. 85 0

147 AMBIENCE Blurs the stereo positioning of the sound to add spatial width. 88 0

148 TALKING MOD Adds a vowel sound to the input signal. 93 0

149 ISOLATOR Attenuates the level of audio signals only at mid-range frequencies. 115 0

150 PHASER1

Cyclically modulates the phase to add modulation to the sound.

72 0

151 PHASER2 72 8

152 PHASER3 72 19

153 T_PHASER1 108 0

154 T_PHASER2 108 16

155 EP PHASER1 72 17

156 EP PHASER2 72 18

157 EP PHASER3 72 16

158 PITCH CHG1

Changes the pitch of the input signal.

80 16

159 PITCH CHG2 80 0

160 PITCH CHG3 80 1

161 DUAL ROT BRT

Rotary speaker simulation with speed switching.

99 16

162 D ROT BRT F 99 30

163 DUAL ROT WRM 99 17

164 D ROT WRM F 99 31

165 DUAL ROT SP1 99 0

166 DUAL ROT SP2 99 1

167 ROTARY SP1

Simulates a rotary speaker.

69 16

168 ROTARY SP2 71 17

169 ROT SP2 FAST 71 23

170 ROTARY SP3 71 18

171 ROT SP3 FAST 71 24

172 ROTARY SP4 70 17

173 ROT SP4 FAST 70 20

174 ROTARY SP5 66 18

175 ROT SP5 FAST 66 19

176 ROTARY SP6 69 0

177 ROTARY SP7 71 22

178 ROT SP7 FAST 71 25

179 ROTARY SP8 69 17

180 ROT SP8 FAST 69 18

181 ROTARY SP9 69 19

182 ROT SP9 FAST 69 20

183 2WAY ROT SP 86 0

184 DST+ROT SP Distortion and rotary speaker connected in series. 69 1

185 DST+2ROT SP Distortion and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series. 86 1

186 OD+ROT SP Overdrive and rotary speaker connected in series. 69 2

187 OD+2ROT SP Overdrive and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series. 86 2

188 AMP+ROT SP Amp simulator and rotary speaker connected in series. 69 3

189 AMP+2ROT SP Amp simulator and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series. 86 3

190 AUTO PAN1

Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right, front, back).

71 16

191 AUTO PAN2 71 0

192 AUTO PAN3 71 1

193 EP AUTOPAN 71 21

194 T_AUTO PAN1

Tempo synchronized pan.

121 0

195 T_AUTO PAN2 121 1

196 TREMOLO1

Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation.

70 16

197 TREMOLO2 71 19

198 TREMOLO3 70 0

199 EP TREMOLO 70 18

200 GT TREMOLO1 71 20

201 GT TREMOLO2 70 19

202 VIBE VIBRATE Vibraphone effect. 119 0

203 T_TREMOLO Tempo synchronized tremolo. 120 0

No. Type Description MSB LSB

Voice Effect Type List

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

131

• Effect types cannot be adjusted, except for the following:

Reverb level, Chorus level, DSP level on page 81

(For example, delay time cannot be changed in DELAY LCR1).

• The actual effect may not be audible depending on the particular Voice.

204 AUTO WAH1

Cyclically modulates the center frequency of a wah ﬁlter.

78 16

205 AUTO WAH2 78 0

206 AT WAH+DST1

The output of an Auto Wah can be distorted by Distortion.

78 17

207 AT WAH+DST2 78 1

208 AT WAH+OD1

The output of an Auto Wah can be distorted by Overdrive.

78 18

209 AT WAH+OD2 78 2

210 TEMPO AT WAH Tempo synchronized auto wah. 79 0

211 TOUCH WAH1

Changes the center frequency of a wah ﬁlter according to the input level.

82 0

212 TOUCH WAH2 82 8

213 TOUCH WAH3 82 20

214 TC WAH+DST1

The output of an Touch Wah can be distorted by Distortion.

82 16

215 TC WAH+DST2 82 1

216 TC WAH+OD1

The output of an Touch Wah can be distorted by Overdrive.

82 17

217 TC WAH+OD2 82 2

218 WH+DST+DLY1

Wah, Distortion and Delay are connected in series.

97 16

219 WH+DST+DLY2 97 0

220 WH+DST+TDLY WAH, Distortion and Tempo Delay are connected in series. 102 0

221 WH+OD+DLY1

Wah, Overdrive and Delay are connected in series.

97 17

222 WH+OD+DLY2 97 1

223 WH+OD+TDLY1

WAH, Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series.

102 1

224 WH+OD+TDLY2 102 16

225 CLVI TC WAH1

Clavinet Touch Wah.

82 18

226 CLVI TC WAH2 82 28

227 EP TC WAH1

EP Touch Wah.

82 19

228 EP TC WAH2 82 29

229 PEDAL WAH Pedal position changes the center frequency of the wah ﬁlter. 122 0

230 PEDAL WH+DST

Distortion applied to the pedal wah output.

122 1

231 P.WH+DIST HD 122 21

232 P.WH+DIST HV 122 23

233 P.WH+DIST LT 122 25

234 PEDAL WH+OD

Overdrive (distortion) applied to the pedal wah output.

122 2

235 P.WH+OD HD 122 22

236 P.WH+OD HV 122 24

237 P.WH+OD LT 122 26

238 NO EFFECT No effect. 00

239 THRU Bypass without applying an effect. 64 0

No. Type Description MSB LSB

132 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

MIDI Implementation Chart

YAMAHA [ Digital Keyboard ] Date:11-APR-2008

Model PSR-S550

MIDI Implementation Chart Version:1.0

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Function...

Basic Default 1 - 16 1 - 16

Channel Changed 1 - 16 1 - 16

Default 3 3

Mode Messages x x

Altered ************** x

Note 0 - 127 0 - 127

Number : True voice ************** 0 - 127

Velocity Note ON o 9nH,v=1-127 o 9nH,v=1-127

Note OFF x 9nH,v=0 x

After Key's x x

Touch Ch's x o

Pitch Bend o 0-24 semi o 0-24 semi

0,32 o o Bank Select

1,5,7,10,11 o o

6,38 o o Data Entry

64-67 o o

Control 71-74 o o Sound Controller

84 o o Portament Cntrl

Change 91,93,94 o o Effect Depth

96-97 x o RPN Inc,Dec

98-99 o o NRPN LSB,MSB

100-101 o o RPN LSB,MSB

MIDI Implementation Chart

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 133

Prog o 0 - 127 o 0 - 127

Change : True # **************

System Exclusive o o

: Song Pos. x x

Common : Song Sel. x x

: Tune x x

System : Clock o o

Real Time: Commands o o

Aux :All Sound OFF x o(120,126,127)

:Reset All Cntrls x o(121)

:Local ON/OFF x o(122)

:All Notes OFF x o(123-125)

Mes- :Active Sense o o

sages:Reset x x

Notes:

Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO o : Yes

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO x : No

134 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

MIDI Data Format

NOTE:

1 By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily functions

as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming

data does not affect the panel voices or panel settings. How-

ever, the MIDI messages listed below do affect the panel

voices, auto accompaniment, and songs.

• MIDI Master Tuning

• System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type,

Chorus Type and DSP Type.

2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be trans-

mitted from the instrument itself. However, they may be trans-

mitted when playing the accompaniment, song or using the

Harmony effect.

3 Exclusive

<GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H

• This message automatically restores all default settings for

the instrument, with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning.

<MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H

• This message allows the volume of all channels to be

changed simultaneously (Universal System Exclusive).

• The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume. (Values

for “ll” are ignored.)

<XG Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 00H, 00H, 00H,

ddH, ddH, ddH, ddH, F7H

• This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of

all channels.

• The values of “dd” are used for XG Master Tuning.

• The default value of “dd” are 00H, 04H, 00H, 00H, respec-

tively.

<Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH,

llH, F7H

• mm : Reverb Type MSB

• ll : Reverb Type LSB

Refer to the Effect Type List (page 126) for details.

<Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH,

llH, F7H

• mm : Chorus Type MSB

• ll : Chorus Type LSB

Refer to the Effect Type List (page 127) for details.

<DSP Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 40H, mmH, llH,

F7H

• mm: DSP Type MSB

• ll: DSP Type LSB

Refer to the Effect Type List (page 128) for details.

4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is trans-

mitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is

transmitted. When the clock is set to External, both FAH

(accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment stop) are rec-

ognized.

5 Local ON/OFF

<Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F

<Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00

Value for “n” is ignored.

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 135

Speciﬁcations

Keyboards

• 61 Standerd-size keys (C1–C6), with Touch Response.

Display

• 320 x 240 dots LCD display (backlit)

Setup

• STANDBY/ON

• MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX

• LCD CONTRAST

Panel Controls

• DEMO, SONG MODE

• SONG-PRESET, SONG-USER, SONG-SCORE, SONG-LYR-

ICS, SONG-REC

• USB

• STYLE CATEGORY, VOICE CATEGORY

• TRANSPOSE [-] [+], METRONOME, TAP TEMPO, TEMPO [-]

[+]

• OTS LINK, AUTO FILL IN, ACMP, INTRO [1]–[3], MAIN VARI-

ATION [A]–[D], ENDING/rit. [1]–[3] (REW) (FF), SYNC STOP

(A-B REPEAT), SYNC START (PAUSE), START/STOP

• REGIST/PART [MIXER], MEMORY, REGIST BANK [-] [+],

REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8], STYLE [1]–[8], SONG

[1/9]–[8/16], EXIT, CATEGORY [ ] [ ], Dial, [+/YES] [-/NO]

• EXECUTE, MDB, FILE MENU, FUNCTION, ONE TOUTCH

SETTING [1]–[4], LEFT, DUAL, HARMONY, TOUCH, SUS-

TAIN, DSP, UPPER OCTAVE [-] [+]

Realtime Control

• Pitch Bend Wheel

Voice

• 294 Voices + 12 Drum Kits + 10 SFX kits + 480 XG Voices

(Included 11 Regional Voices and 8 Regional Drum/Percussion

Kits)

• Polyphony: 64

• LEFT

• DUAL

Style

• 176

• Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP, SYNC START,

START/STOP, INTRO [1]–[3], MAIN VARIA-

TION [A]–[D], ENDING/rit. [1]–[3], AUTO FILL IN

• Style Creator

• Fingering: Multi Finger, Full Keyboard

• Style Volume

Music Database

• 600

Registration Memory

•8 banks x 8 memories

• Regist Clear

Mixer

• Volume, Pan, Reverb, Chorus

Function

• VOLUME: Style Volume, Song Volume

• OVERALL: Tuning, Pitch Bend Range, Split Point, Touch

Sensitivity, Chord Fingering

• MAIN VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,

Chorus Level, DSP Level, Dry Level

• DUAL VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,

Chorus Level, DSP Level, Dry Level

• LEFT VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,

Chorus Level, DSP Level, Dry Level

• EFFECT: Reverb Type, Chorus Type, DSP Type, Master

EQ Type

• HARMONY: Harmony Type, Harmony Volume

• PC: PC Mode

• MIDI: Local On/Off, External Clock, Keyboard Out,

Style Out, Song Out, Initial Setup

• METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature

Denominator, Bell On/Off, Metronome Volume

• SCORE: Quantize, Right-Part, Left-Part

• UTILITY: Demo Cancel, TG Mode

• LANGUAGE: Language

Effects

• Harmony: 26 types

• Reverb: 35 types

• Chorus: 44 types

• DSP: 237 types

Song

•9 Preset Songs + User Songs + USB Memory

• Song Clear, Track Clear

• Song Volume

• Song Control: A-B REPEAT, PAUSE, REW, FF, START/STOP

Recording

• Song

User Song: 5 Songs

Recording Tracks: 1–16, STYLE

• Style Creator

MIDI

• Local On/Off

• Initial Setup

• External Clock

• Keyboard Out

• Style Out

• Song Out

Auxiliary jacks

• PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 16V, USB TO HOST,

USB TO DEVICE, SUSTAIN

Ampliﬁer

• 12W x 2

Speakers

• (12cm + 3cm) x 2

Power Consumption

• 25W

Power Supply

• Adaptor: PA-301, PA-300 or an equivalent recommended by

Yamaha

Dimensions (W x D x H)

• 946 x 402 x 130 mm (37-1/4" x 15-7/8" x 5-1/8")

Weight

• 7.5kg (16 lbs., 9 oz.)

Supplied Accessories

• Music Rest

• Accessory CD-ROM

• Owner’s Manual

• AC Power adaptor (May not be included depending on your par-

ticular area.)

* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for infor-

mation purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or

modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice.

Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in ev-

ery locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

< >

Optional Accessories

• Headphones: HPE-150

• Keyboard Stand: L6

• Footswitch: FC4/FC5

136 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

+/YES, -/NO button ...................... 14, 41

>/■ button.............................. 14, 28, 41

button ........................................ 14, 28

AB button................................. 14, 73

f button...................................... 14, 28

r button ..................................... 14, 28

A-B Repeat.......................................... 73

Accessories............................................ 7

ACMP button ................................ 14, 23

Auto Accompaniment Region............. 23

AUTO FILL IN button........................ 55

Auto Fill-in.......................................... 55

Backup................................................. 39

Backup Clear....................................... 39

Backup data (Transfer)........................ 98

Bank .................................................... 77

Beat ..................................................... 50

Category ............................ 17, 22, 27, 40

Category and buttons ............ 15, 41

CD-ROM......................................... 7, 99

Chord................................. 23, 25, 61–62

Chord Fingering ............................ 25, 63

Chorus ................................................. 46

Chorus Type ...................................... 127

Clear (Song Track).............................. 38

Clear (User Song)................................ 37

Computer........................... 91–92, 94, 96

Contrast ............................................... 12

CONTRAST knob......................... 12, 15

DC IN 16V jack ............................ 10, 15

Delete (File Menu) .............................. 88

DEMO button................................ 14, 16

Demo Cancel....................................... 82

Demo Song.......................................... 16

Dial................................................ 14, 41

Display ................................................ 42

Drum Kit ............................................. 21

Drum Kit List .................................... 116

DSP ..................................................... 47

DSP button .................................... 15, 47

DSP Type .......................................... 128

DUAL button ................................ 15, 18

Dual Voice .......................................... 18

Dual Voice Chorus level ..................... 81

Dual Voice Dry Level ......................... 81

Dual Voice DSP Level.........................81

Dual Voice Octave...............................81

Dual Voice Pan ....................................81

Dual Voice Reverb Level ....................81

Dual Voice Volume .............................81

Effect Type List .................................125

Ending..................................................55

ENDING/rit. I–III buttons .............14, 55

EXECUTE button..........................15, 84

EXIT button ...................................14, 42

External Clock .....................................94

External Song.......................................29

FF.........................................................28

File Control..........................................83

FILE MENU button.................15, 83–84

File Save (File Menu) ..........................85

Footswitch............................................10

Format (File Menu)..............................84

FullKeyboard .......................................63

FUNCTION button........................15, 80

FUNCTION display.............................42

Function Settings ...........................80–82

Harmony ..............................................44

HARMONY button........................15, 44

Harmony Type .............................44, 125

Harmony Volume ................................82

Headphones..........................................10

Initial Send...........................................95

Initial Setup..........................................95

Initialization.........................................39

INTRO I–III buttons ......................14, 55

Keyboard Out.......................................94

Language..............................................12

LEFT button...................................15, 19

Left Part ...............................................98

Left Voice ............................................19

Left Voice Chorus Level......................81

Left Voice Dry Level...........................81

Left Voice DSP Level..........................81

Left Voice Octave................................81

Left Voice Pan..................................... 81

Left Voice Reverb Level ..................... 81

Left Voice Volume.............................. 81

Load (File Menu)................................. 87

Loaded Song........................................ 29

Local.................................................... 94

Lyrics................................................... 31

LYRICS button.............................. 14, 31

Main..................................................... 55

MAIN A–D buttons....................... 14, 55

MAIN Display..................................... 42

MAIN VARIATION (Style) ............... 55

Main Voice.......................................... 17

Main Voice Chorus Level ................... 81

Main Voice Dry Level......................... 81

Main Voice DSP Level........................ 81

Main Voice Octave.............................. 81

Main Voice Pan................................... 81

Main Voice Reverb level..................... 81

Main Voice Volume ............................ 81

Master EQ Type .................................. 52

MASTER VOLUME control .. 11, 14, 40

MDB button................................... 15, 26

Measure ............................................... 36

MEMORY button.......................... 14, 77

MEMORY Clear ................................. 39

Message (LCD) ................................. 108

Metronome .......................................... 49

METRONOME button............ 14, 49–50

Metronome Volume ............................ 50

MIDI.................................................... 94

MIDI Data Format............................. 134

MIDI Implementation Chart.............. 132

Multi Recording .................................. 34

Music Database ................................... 26

Music Database List .......................... 122

Music Rest........................................... 13

Mute..................................................... 74

Octave.................................................. 54

One Touch Setting (OTS).................... 58

ONE TOUCH SETTING 1–4 buttons

................................................... 15, 58

Options .............................................. 135

OTS LINK button.......................... 14, 58

Part Assign .......................................... 35

PAUSE ................................................ 28

PC ........................................................ 95

PHONES/OUTPUT jack............... 10, 15

< >

Index

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 137

Pitch Bend ........................................... 48

Pitch Bend Range................................ 81

PITCH BEND wheel..................... 15, 48

Power Adaptor .................................... 10

PRESET button ............................. 14, 27

Preset Song.......................................... 29

Quantize .............................................. 82

Quick Recording ................................. 33

REC button.................................... 14, 33

Record ................................................. 32

REGIST BANK +, - buttons ......... 14, 77

REGIST/PART [MIXER] button.. 14, 74

Registration Memory .......................... 77

REGISTRATION MEMORY

1–8 buttons ................................ 14, 77

Repeat (A-B Repeat) ........................... 73

Reverb ................................................. 45

Reverb Type ...................................... 126

REW.................................................... 28

Right Part ............................................ 98

Score.................................................... 30

SCORE button............................... 14, 30

Section................................................. 55

SMF (Standard MIDI File).................. 86

SMF Save ............................................ 86

SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

....................................................... 105

Song............................................... 27–29

SONG category buttons ................ 14, 27

Song Clear........................................... 37

Song Memory................................ 32, 35

SONG MODE button.................... 14, 27

Song Out.............................................. 94

Song Volume....................................... 72

Specifications .................................... 135

Split Point...................................... 19, 59

STANDBY/ON switch.................. 11, 14

START/STOP button .............. 14, 22, 41

Stop Accompaniment .......................... 60

Store (Registration) ............................. 77

Style............................................... 22, 55

STYLE category buttons............... 14, 22

Style File ............................................. 63

Style List ........................................... 121

Style Out.............................................. 94

Style Volume....................................... 60

SUSTAIN (Footswitch) ...................... 10

Sustain (Panel) .................................... 47

SUSTAIN button ...........................15, 47

SUSTAIN jack...............................10, 15

SYNC START button..............14, 23, 56

SYNC STOP button.......................14, 57

Synchro Start........................................56

Synchro Stop........................................57

Tap Start...............................................51

TAP TEMPO button ......................14, 51

Tempo ..................................................72

TEMPO +, - buttons ................14, 49, 72

Time Signature.....................................50

TOUCH button ..............................15, 51

Touch Sensitivity .................................51

Track ..............................................32, 74

Track Clear ..........................................38

Transfer..........................................96, 98

Transpose.............................................53

TRANSPOSE +, - buttons .............14, 53

Troubleshooting (Installation Guide).104

Troubleshooting (Instrument)............107

Tuning..................................................53

UPPER OCTAVE +, - buttons ......15, 54

USB......................................................90

USB button ....................................14, 27

USB MIDI Driver ......................101–102

USB Song ............................................29

USB TO DEVICE terminal .....15, 83, 90

USB TO HOST terminal..........15, 90, 92

USER (Song) button ......................14, 27

USER (Style) button ............................63

User File.........................................85, 87

User Song.......................................29, 32

User Style.............................................63

Voice....................................................17

VOICE category buttons................15, 17

Voice List...........................................110

Volume.................................................40

XG..........................................................6

138 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 139

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment

This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents means that

used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general household

waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, please take them to

applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the

Directives 2002/96/EC.

By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and

prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which

could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please contact

your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you

purchased the items.

[For business users in the European Union]

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer

or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items,

please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of

disposal.

140 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual

Limited Warranty

90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS

Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed

below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models

included in the following series of products:

PSR SERIES OF DIGITAL KEYBOARDS

If during the ﬁrst 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect

in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor.

If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject

to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the

consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as

warranty replacements.

THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS. ANY

IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO

THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR

INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these

limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.

This warranty gives you speciﬁc legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state.

CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES

If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities:

1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for

assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below.

2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation

of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts

under warranty.

3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely.

*Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the ﬁrst 90 days.

IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has

a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed.

4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and

to follow all safety precautions.

EXCLUSIONS

This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to

failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of:

1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modiﬁcation or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity.

2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an

authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha.

3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia,

and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country.

Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below.

Model___________________________ Serial #________________________________ Sales Slip #________________________________

Purchased from____________________________________________________________ Date______________________________________

(Retailer)

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA

Electronic Service Division

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue

Buena Park, CA 90620

KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL!

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte

Madero Este-C1107CEK

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 011-4119-7000

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Switzerland

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/

HUNGARY/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria, CEE Department

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland

Tel: 022-868-07-57

THE NETHERLANDS/

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia)

Ofﬁce 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii

Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia

Tel: 495 626 0660

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),

Jingan, Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 080-004-0022

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

4, 6, 15 and 16

ﬂoor, Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2626

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD

P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,

New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Digital Musical Instruments Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-3273

EKB45

Yamaha Global Home

http://www.yamaha.com/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division

WN55250 103PO***.*-01C1

Printed in China

Transcripción de documentos

DIGITAL WORKSTATION Owner’s Manual EN SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: Warning: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Disposal Notice: NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Model Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: Serial No. Purchase Date Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-BP (bottom) 2 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) This product contains a high intensity lamp that contains a small amount of mercury. Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal information in the United States, refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site: www.eiae.org * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B) COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard Model Name : PSR-S550/S550B This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC) (mercury) IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. (2 wires) PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (page 135) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. Do not open • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. • Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. Location • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. (3)-12 4 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 1/2 Connections Saving data • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Saving and backing up your data • The panel settings and some other types of data are not retained in memory when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save data you want to keep to the Registration Memory (page 85). Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a USB storage device/external device such as a computer (page 98). Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Backing up the USB storage device/external media Handling caution • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two USB storage devices/external media. • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. ● Trademarks • The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd. • Windows is the registered trademarks of Microsoft® Corporation. • The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. (3)-12 2/2 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 5 This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. Logos GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. XG XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. XF The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future. The instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played. STYLE FILE The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). 6 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Congratulations and thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PSR-S550! Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument in order to take full advantage of its various features. Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you finish reading, and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function. Accessories The instrument package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all. • • • • Music rest Accessory CD-ROM Owner’s manual (this book) AC Power Adaptor (May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer.) PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 7 Special Features of the PSR-S550 ■ Play a Variety of Instrument Voices Page 17 The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of Voices. You can change the mood of a Song written for piano, for example, by using violin to play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety. ■ Play Along with Styles Page 23 Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles. The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band covering wide variety of Styles from waltzes to 8-beat to samba … and much more. What’s more, you can create and save your own original Styles for even greater versatility. ■ Save and Recall Panel Settings to Registration Memory This convenient function lets you save a ‘snapshot’ of your custom panel settings—up to 64 complete “Registrations.” These can be called up instantly any time you need them—perfect for making broad sound/effect changes when playing live! Page 77 8 banks x 8 presets = 64 Registrations ■ Easy Performance with Music Notation Display Page 30 When you play back a Song, the corresponding score will be shown on the display as the Song plays. This is a great way to learn how to read music. If the Song contains lyric and chord data*, the lyrics and chords will also appear on the score display. * No lyrics or chords will appear on the display if the Song you are using with the score display function does not contain the appropriate lyric and chord data. ■ Save and Load Data to USB Flash Memory or Computer These data organization tools let you store your original User Songs or custom panel settings (Registration Memory) to a USB Flash Memory device or a computer, then load the data back to the instrument as needed. 8 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Pages 83 and 94 Contents Logos........................................................................................ 6 Accessories .............................................................................. 7 Special Features of the PSR-S550 .......................................... 8 Setting Up 10 Power Requirements .............................................................. 10 Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) ............. 10 Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)............................. 10 Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal)............................ 11 Turning the Power On ............................................................ 11 Changing the Display language ............................................. 12 Adjusting the LCD CONTRAST control .................................. 12 Panel Controls and Terminals 14 Front Panel ............................................................................. 14 Rear Panel ............................................................................. 15 Quick Guide Playing Songs Try playing a variety of Instrument Voices 16 17 Select and Play a Voice ......................................................... 17 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL.......................... 18 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands —LEFT .............................................................................. 19 Playing Drum Kits ................................................................... 21 Playing Styles 22 Select a Styles Rhythm .......................................................... 22 Playing Along with a Style ...................................................... 23 Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords .................................... 25 Playing with the Music Database 26 Using Songs 27 Selecting and Listening to a Song .......................................... 27 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ...................... 28 Types of Songs ...................................................................... 29 Displaying the Song Score ..................................................... 30 Displaying the Lyrics............................................................... 31 Recording Your Own Performance 32 Track Configuration ................................................................ 32 Quick Recording Procedure ................................................... 33 Multi-track Recording Procedure ............................................ 34 Song Clear—Deleting User Songs ......................................... 37 Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track From a User Song . 38 Backup and Initialization 39 Backup ................................................................................... 39 Initialization............................................................................. 39 Basic Operation and Displays 40 Basic Operation ...................................................................... 40 The Displays........................................................................... 42 MAIN Display Items ................................................................ 43 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions 55 Pattern Variation (sections) .................................................... 55 One Touch Setting.................................................................. 58 Variation Change and OTS (OTS LINK)................................. 58 Setting the Split Point ............................................................. 59 Playing a Style with Chords but without Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) ...................................................... 60 Adjusting the Style Volume..................................................... 60 Chord Basics .......................................................................... 61 User Style ............................................................................... 63 Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard .............................. 63 Creating Original Styles (Style Creator) 64 Style Structure ........................................................................ 64 Main Display of the Style Creator ........................................... 64 Follow the Style Creator instructions. ..................................... 65 Basic Operation ...................................................................... 66 Parameter Settings, Recording and Saving ........................... 67 Song Settings 72 Song Volume .......................................................................... 72 Changing the Tempo .............................................................. 72 A-B Repeat ............................................................................. 73 Muting Independent Song Parts ............................................. 74 MIXER 75 Mixer Display .......................................................................... 75 Basic operation ....................................................................... 75 Track ON/OFF and other parameter controls ......................... 76 Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 77 Saving to the Registration Memory ........................................ 77 Recalling a Registration Memory............................................ 78 Registration Clear—Deleting a Specified Registration Memory.............................................................................. 79 The Functions 80 Selecting and Setting Functions ............................................. 80 Using USB Flash Memory 83 Using USB Flash Memory ...................................................... 83 Formatting USB Flash Memory .............................................. 84 Saving the Registration Data .................................................. 85 Saving a User Song or User Style .......................................... 86 Loading Registration Files, Style Files, Song Files or MDB Files .......................................................................... 87 Deleting Data from USB Flash Memory ................................. 88 Playing Songs or Styles Saved to USB Flash Memory .......... 89 Connections 90 Connectors ............................................................................. 90 Connection to a USB Storage Device .................................... 90 Connecting a Personal Computer .......................................... 92 Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer ....... 94 Initial Send .............................................................................. 95 Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument ..... 96 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide 99 Important Notices about the CD-ROM.................................... 99 Contents of the CD-ROM ..................................................... 100 Software Installation ............................................................. 101 Reference Playing with the Effects 44 Adding Harmony..................................................................... 44 Changing the Reverb Type .................................................... 45 Changing the Chorus Type .................................................... 46 Panel Sustain ......................................................................... 47 Adding DSP ............................................................................ 47 Pitch Bend .............................................................................. 48 Using Various Functions 49 Playing with the metronome ................................................... 49 Using Tap Start ...................................................................... 51 Touch Response .................................................................... 51 EQ settings ............................................................................. 52 Pitch Controls ......................................................................... 53 Changing the pitch of the instrument in octaves .................... 54 Appendix Troubleshooting .................................................................... 107 Messages ............................................................................ 108 Voice List .............................................................................. 110 Drum Kit List ......................................................................... 116 Style List ............................................................................... 121 Music Database List ............................................................. 122 Voice Effect Type List ........................................................... 125 MIDI Implementation Chart................................................... 132 MIDI Data Format ................................................................. 134 Specifications ....................................................................... 135 Index ..................................................................................... 136 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 9 Setting Up Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power. Power Requirements Make all necessary connections below BEFORE turning the power on. Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) Make sure that the [STANDBY/ON] switch of the instrument is set to STANDBY. • Use the specified adaptor (page 135) only. The use of other adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the instrument. Connect the power adaptor’s DC plug to the power supply jack. Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. CAUTION • Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. The instrument speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/ OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to that device. • Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing. CAUTION AC outlet • To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch sustain on and off. NOTE • Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. 10 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Setting Up Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal) Turning the Power On Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON] switch to turn on the power. Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch again to turn the power OFF. Connect the instrument’s USB terminal to the USB terminal of a computer, and you can transfer performance data and Song files between the two (page 96). To use the USB data-transfer features you’ll need to do the following: • First, make sure the POWER switch on the instrument is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the instrument to the computer. After making the connections, turn the instrument’s power on. • Install the USB MIDI driver on your computer from CD-ROM (see page 101). • Install the MusicSoft downloader on your computer from the website (see page 103) Backup data in the flash memory is loaded to the instrument when the power is turned on. If no backup data exists on flash memory, all instrument settings are restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is turned on. CAUTION • Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. CAUTION • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Writing..” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in a loss of data. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 11 Setting Up Changing the Display language Adjusting the LCD CONTRAST control This instrument allows you to select English or Japanese as the display language. The default display language is English, but if you switch to Japanese the lyrics, file names and some messages will be displayed in Japanese where appropriate. Adjust the LCD CONTRAST control on the rear panel of the instrument for optimum display legibility. Press the [FUNCTION] button. CAUTION • Looking at the display for a long period of time in the dark may cause eyestrain or damage to your eyesight. Make sure to use the instrument with as much ambient light as possible and also take adequate breaks and rest from use. Press the CATEGORY [ < ] and [ > ] buttons a number of times until the “Language” item appears. The currently selected display language will appear below the “Language” item. Language item The currently selected language Select a display language. The [+] button selects English and the [-] button selects Japanese. The language selection will be stored in the internal flash memory so that it is retained even when the power is turned off. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN dis- play. 12 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Setting Up ● Music Rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 13 Panel Controls and Terminals e q t r y !1 i u w !2 !4 o !5 !6 !3 !7 !0 #3 #2 Front Panel q [STANDBY/ON] switch .................... page 16 w [MASTER VOLUME] control.... pages 16, 40 e [DEMO] button ................................. page 16 r [SONG MODE] button ..................... page 27 t SONG [PRESET], [USER] buttons .......... page 27 [SCORE] button ............................ page 30 [LYRICS] button ............................ page 31 y [USB] button .................................... page 27 u [REC] button .................................... page 33 i STYLE............................................... page 22 o STYLE CONTROL [OTS LINK] button ........................ page 58 [AUTO FILL IN] button .................. page 55 [ACMP] button .............................. page 23 INTRO [I]–[III] buttons .................. page 55 MAIN VARIATION [A]–[D] buttons ..................................................... page 55 ENDING/rit. [I]–[III] buttons .......... page 55 [SYNC STOP] button .................... page 57 [SYNC START] button .......... pages 23, 56 [START/STOP] button........... pages 22, 41 14 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual !0 SONG CONTROL [r] button.................................... page 28 [f] button .................................... page 28 [A B] button .............................. page 73 [ ] button..................................... page 28 [>/■] button...........................pages 28, 41 !1 TRANSPOSE [+] and [-] buttons .... page 53 !2 [METRONOME] button.................... page 49 !3 [TAP TEMPO] button ....................... page 51 !4 TEMPO [+] and [-] buttons.............. page 49 !5 [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] button ..... page 74 !6 [MEMORY] button ........................... page 77 !7 REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons.. page 77 !8 Style Part/Song Part [1/9]–[8/16]/ REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons............................................. page 77 !9 Display ......................................pages 12, 42 @0 [EXIT] button ................................... page 42 @1 Dial ................................................... page 41 @2 [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons............. page 41 Panel Controls and Terminals !9 @4 @5 @0 @2 @1 @8 @6 @9 @7 #0 !8 #1 @3 Rear Panel #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 Rear Panel @3 CATEGORY [ < ] and [ > ] buttons ..... page 41 #4 SUSTAIN jack................................... page 10 @4 [EXECUTE] button........................... page 68 #5 USB TO HOST and TO DEVICE terminals .......................................... page 90 @5 [MDB] button ................................... page 26 @6 [FILE MENU] button ........................ page 83 @7 [FUNCTION] button ......................... page 80 @8 ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4] buttons ............................................. page 58 #6 CONTRAST knob ............................ page 12 #7 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ................... page 10 #8 DC IN 16V jack................................. page 10 @9 VOICE ............................................... page 17 #0 VOICE CONTROL [LEFT] button ................................ page 19 [DUAL] button ............................... page 18 [HARMONY] button ...................... page 44 [TOUCH] button ............................ page 51 [SUSTAIN] button ......................... page 47 [DSP] button.................................. page 47 #1 UPPER OCTAVE [+] and [-] buttons .......................................................... page 54 #2 [PITCH BEND] wheel....................... page 48 #3 Drum Kit ........................................... page 21 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 15 e d ck Gui ui Q Playing Songs Quick Guide This instrument include a Demonstration Song. Let’s start by playing the Demonstration Song. 1 Press the [STANDBY/ON] button until it locks in the ON position. The Main display appears in the LCD. VOICE name STYLE name SONG name Music Database name 2 Press the [DEMO] button to start the Demo. 3 >/■] button to stop Demo. Press the [> 16 The Demo display appears in the LCD. Gradually raise the [MASTER VOLUME] control while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. The Demo Song will restart when playback reaches the end. Operation automatically returns to the Main display. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual NOTE • The [DEMO] button doesn’t function when the Demo Cancel function is set to enable. (See page 82.) e d ck Gui ui Q Try playing a variety of Instrument Voices In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instrument has a large range of realistic Voices—including guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects, and a wide variety of other musical sounds. Select and Play a Voice In this operation, you’ll select a Main Voice and play it on the keyboard. 1 Select and press the desired Voice category button in the Voice section. The Main Voice selection display will appear. The currently selected category name, Voice number and name will be highlighted. For this example, select the “Flute&Woodwind” category. NOTE • To change the Voice category, press another category button. MAIN VOICE selection display CATEGORY name Current selected Voice 2 Select the Voice you want to play. 3 Play the keyboard. Look at the highlighted Voice name and rotate the dial. The available Voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The Voice selected here becomes the Main Voice. For this example, select the “010 Flute” Voice. Try selecting and playing a variety of Voices. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 17 Try playing a variety of Instrument Voices Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL This lets you select a second Voice which you can play in addition to the Main Voice. The second Voice is known as the “Dual” Voice. Two Voices will sound at the same time. 1 Press the [DUAL] button. The [DUAL] button turns the Dual Voice on or off. When Dual Voice is turned on, the [DUAL] button is lit. The currently selected Dual Voice will sound in addition to the Main Voice when you play the keyboard. [DUAL] button is lit 2 Press and hold the [DUAL] button for longer than a second. The Dual Voice selection display appears. The currently selected category name, Voice number and name will be highlighted. Dual Voice selection display The currently selected category The currently selected Dual Voice Hold for longer than a second 3 Select and press the desired Voice category button in the Voice section. For this example, select the “Percussion” category. 18 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Try playing a variety of Instrument Voices 4 Select the Voice you want to play. 5 Play the keyboard. Look at the highlighted Voice name and rotate the dial. The available Voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The Voice selected here becomes the Dual Voice. For this example, select the “003 Marimba” Voice. Try selecting and playing a range of Dual Voices. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—LEFT In the Left mode you can play different Voices from the keys to the left and right of the keyboard “split point.” The Main and Dual Voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the Voice played to the left of the split point is the Left Voice. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 59). Split point Left Voice 1 Main Voice and Dual Voice Press the [LEFT] button. The [LEFT] button turns the left Voice on or off. The currently selected Left Voice will sound when you play keys to the left of the keyboard split point. [LEFT] button is lit PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 19 Try playing a variety of Instrument Voices 2 Press and hold the [LEFT] button for longer than a second. The LEFT Voice selection display will appear. The currently selected category name, Voice number and name will be highlighted. Left Voice selection display The currently selected category The currently selected Left Voice Hold for longer than a second 3 Select and press the desired Voice category button in the VOICE section. For this example, select the “Guitar&Bass” category. 4 Select the Voice you want to play. 5 Play the keyboard. Look at the highlighted Voice name and rotate the dial. The available Voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The Voice selected here becomes the Left Voice. For this example, select the “041 FolkGuitar” Voice. Try playing the selected Left Voice. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 20 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Try playing a variety of Instrument Voices Playing Drum Kits Drum Kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments. When you select a violin or other normal instrument—as a Main Voice, for example—all keys produce the sound of the same violin, only at different pitches. If you select a Drum Kit as the Main Voice, however, each key produces the sound of a different drum or percussion instrument. 1 Press the [DRUM KIT] button. 2 Rotate the dial and select the Drum Kit you want to play (001–019). The “Drum Kit” category appears. Drum Kits List Voice No. Voice No. Drum Kit name Drum Kit name Voice No. Drum Kit name Voice No. Drum Kit name 001 Standard Kit1 006 Room Kit 011 Symphony Kit 016 Arabic Mixture Kit 002 Standard Kit2 007 Rock Kit 012 Cuban Kit 017 Indian Kit 003 Hit Kit 008 Electro Kit 013 PopLatin Kit 018 Chinese Kit 019 Chinese Mixture Kit 004 Jazz Kit 009 Analog Kit 014 Arabic Kit 005 Brush Kit 010 Dance Kit 015 Arabic Kit2 NOTE 3 Play each key and enjoy the Drum Kit. • See the Drum Kit List on page 116. A good Drum Kit to start out with is 001, Standard Kit 1. ui ca Tr Mut ia ng e l Sh e M u ak er te C Sh o la ve rt s ui ro C G lo se at d Pe i-H da l at O pe n C ra sh C R ym id e ba C ym l 1 ba Ta l1 m bo u C ow rine be ll Vi br as la p Bo ng o L C on ga H O pe Ti m n ba le Ag L og o L M ar ac as H H i-H at C la p i-H H ick H an d St C im de Si pe n O ne s ick St as ta C R t ap Sl Ta p h h us us Br Br Sh ot Example: 001 Standard Kit 1 h h us q us Br Se Br C lic k H S Ta wir l p Sn Sw ar irl e Sn R ar oll e S Ki oft ck S Ki o ck ft Ti gh t Ki ck Sn Sn ar are e Fl T oo igh rT t om Fl oo rT L om Lo H w M To id m T M om id L To C H mH hi ig n h R ese To id C m e C ym y Sp mb bal la al C C sh C up ra sh ym ba C y R id mb l e a C ym l 2 ba l2 B C on ong ga o H H M C ute on Ti ga m L ba l Ag e H og o Sa C H m ba ab Sa W asa h m ba istl W eH h G istle W uiro L oo L d on W Blo g oo ck d B H C loc ui ca k L Tr O ia ng pe n le O Ji ng pen le B Be ells ll T re e C3 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 21 e d ck Gui ui Q Playing Styles This instrument includes an auto-accompaniment feature that plays appropriate “Styles” (rhythm + bass + chord accompaniment) when you play left-hand chords. You can select from 176 different Styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures (see page 121 for a complete list of the available Styles). You can also select from the original Styles you’ve created on your own. Here’s how you can use the auto-accompaniment feature. Select a Styles Rhythm Most Styles include a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—rock, blues, samba, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played using percussion instruments only. 1 Select and press the desired Style category button in the Style section. The Style selection display appears. The currently selected category name, Voice number and name will be highlighted. Style selection display The currently selected category The currently selected Style Your created Styles are stored to the [USER] button. 2 Select the Style you want to play. 3 Press the [START/STOP] button. 22 Look at the highlighted Style name and rotate the dial. The available Styles will be selected and displayed in sequence. See the Style list on page 121. The Style rhythm will start playing. To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] button again. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles Playing Along with a Style You learned how to select a Style rhythm on the preceding page. Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accompaniment that you can play along with. 1 Select and press the desired Style category button in the Style section. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Main display. 2 Turn automatic accompaniment on. Press the [ACMP] button. Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment off. [ACMP] button is lit. NOTE ● When automatic accompaniment is on ... The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (54: F#2) becomes the “auto accompaniment region” and is used only for specifying the accompaniment chords. • The Split point can be changed as required; refer to page 59. Split point (54: F#2) Auto accompaniment region 3 Turn Sync Start on. Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the Sync Start function on. Flashes when Sync Start is on. When Sync Start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a Style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard split point. To cancel or disable Sync Start, press the button a second time to turn the Sync Start function off. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 23 Playing Styles 4 Play a left-hand chord to start the Style. You can still “play” chords even if you don’t actually know any chords. This instrument will recognize even a single note as a chord. Try playing from one to three notes at the same time to the left of the split point. The chord will change according to the left-hand notes you play. Split point 5 Play a variety of left-hand chords while playing a melody with your right hand. Split point Auto accompaniment region 6 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop Style playback when you’re done. You can switch Style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment. Refer to “Pattern Variation (sections)” on page 55. 24 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords There are two ways of playing auto-accompaniment chords: ● Easy Chords ● Standard Chords The instrument will automatically recognize the different chord types. The keyboard to the left of the split point (default: 54/F#2) becomes the “accompaniment range.” Play the accompaniment chords in this area of the keyboard. Split point (default: 54/F#2) Root notes and the corresponding keys Db Eb F# G# Bb Db Eb F# C D E F GA B C D E F Accompaniment range ■Easy Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. ■Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This method lets you produce accompaniment by playing chords using normal fingerings in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. ● How to play Standard Chords [Example for “C” chords] C C C add9 C M7 C M7 ( 9) C6 C6 (b5) C (b5) ) ) C M7 ( ( ) • To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. (#11) (9) ( Cm ( ( ) ) • To play a major chord Press the root note of the chord. C M7 C sus4 C aug C M7aug Cm C m add9 C m6 C m7 C mM7 C mM7 ( ) • To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. ( ) C7 (9 ) (11) C m7 (9) (b5) C m7 C mM7 C7 C7 ) (9) C7 ) ) C7 (#9) C7 ) ( C 7sus4 (b5) C7 ) ) ( ( (13) C7 ( C 7aug (b13) (b9) ( (#11) C7 C dim7 C dim ( (b5) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) C m7 ( • To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). ) C m7 C sus2 * Notes enclosed in parentheses ( ) are optional; the chords will be recognized without them. ● Multi Fingering and Full Keyboard These let you select the accompaniment section of the keyboard for chord playing. (See the “Chord Fingering” section in the Function Setting List on page 81.) Multi Fingering: As explained above, the keys to the left of the split point (default: 54, F#2) become the accompaniment range. This method lets you play the accompaniment chords in the specified area of the keyboard, and is set as the default for the instrument. Full Keyboard: This lets you play the accompaniment chords freely from anywhere on the keyboard. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 25 e d ck Gui ui Q Playing with the Music Database You want to play music in your favorite Style, but you’re not sure how to select the best Voice and Style for the type of music you want to play, simply select the appropriate Style from the Music Database. The panel settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds and Style! 1 Press the [MDB] button. 2 Select the desired Music Database which matches the music style or type you want to play. 3 Play the chords with your left hand and the melody with your right. The music database selection display will appear. The currently selected category name, MDB number and name will be highlighted. Press [ < ], [ > ] category button when changing the MDB category. Referring to the Music Database List on page 122 of the manual, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that matches the music style of the Song you intend to play. For this example select “315 BigKissForDream” in the Swing category. The swing Style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the left of the split point (page 23). Refer to page 25 for information about playing chords. Split Point You can check the assigned Voice and Style at this point by pressing the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 4 26 >/■] button to stop playback. Press the [> PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q Using Songs With this instrument the term “Song” refers the data that makes up a piece of music. In this section we’ll learn how to select and play Songs. Song (Score) Listen (Lyrics) See Record Selecting and Listening to a Song 1 Select and press one of the Song category buttons, which corresponds to the type of Song you want to listen to. [PRESET] : Nine preset Songs are available here. [USER] : This contains your recorded Songs and Songs loaded from USB flash memory/computer. [USB] : This contains USB Songs when a USB flash memory device is connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. The file name in USB flash memory can be shown as long as you’ve saved the data to the root directory or the next two levels (see page 91). The Song selection display will appear. The currently selected Song number and name will be highlighted. NOTE • When the instrument is in the Song mode, the [SONG MODE] button is lit. When Style mode is enabled, the button is not lit. Song Selection display Currently selected Song 2 Select a Song. Use the dial to select the Song you want to listen to. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 27 Using Songs PRESET 3 Built-in Songs 1 Amazing Grace (Traditional) 2 OdeToJoy (L.v. Beethoven) 3 Annie Laurie (Traditional) 4 Nocturne 9-2 (Chopin) 5 Fossiles (Le Carnaval des Animaux) (C. Saint-Saëns) 6 Latin (Original) 7 Arabic (Original) 8 Bhangra (Original) 9 Wu Lin Hun (Original) USER User Songs (Songs you record yourself) or Songs transferred from a USB flash memory/computer (pages 96–98) USB Songs in a USB flash memory connected to the instrument (pages 87, 89) Listen to the Song. Press the [>/■] button to begin playback of the selected Song. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [>/■] button again. NOTE • Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original. Song start Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause These are just like the transport controls on a CD player, letting you fast forward [f], rewind [r], and pause [ ] playback of the Song. 28 REW FF PAUSE Press the fast reverse button to rapidly return to an earlier point in the Song. Press the fast forward button to rapidly skip ahead to a later point in the Song. Press the pause button to pause playback. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Using Songs Types of Songs The following four types of Songs can be used by this instrument. ● ● ● ● Preset Songs (the nine Songs built into the instrument).............. Preset Song numbers 001–009. User Songs (recordings of your own performances) ................... USER Song numbers 001–005. Loaded Songs (Song data loaded from computer) ...................... USER Song numbers 006– USB Songs (Song data in the USB flash memory) ...................... Song numbers The chart below shows the basic operation flow for using the preset Songs, user Songs, loaded Songs and USB Song from storage to playback. Computer Your own performance USB flash memory Song Song Connect USB TO HOST terminal and Transfer (page 96) Record (page 32) Connect USB TO DEVICE terminal and Save/Load (page 90) Song Storage location. Preset Songs (001–009) User Songs (001–005) The nine Songs built into the instrument. Song User Songs (loaded Songs) (006–) Song USB Songs Song Load Save/Load PRESET USER USB Play NOTE • Different internal memory areas are used to store user Songs and loaded Song files transferred from a computer. User Songs cannot be directly transferred to the loaded Song area of the internal memory, and vice versa. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 29 Using Songs Displaying the Song Score This instrument is capable of display the scores (notation) of Songs. Scores can also be displayed for Songs loaded from USB flash memory or computer. 1 2 Select a Song. Follow steps 1 and 2 of the procedure described on page 27. Press the [SCORE] button and a single-staff score will appear. There are two types of score display: single-staff and double-staff. These are alternately selected each time the [SCORE] button is pressed. Single-staff Marker NOTE • Both chords and lyrics will be shown in single-staff score display of a Song that includes chord and lyric data. • When there are many lyrics in a Song, they may be displayed in two rows a measure. Melody score • Some lyrics or chords may be abbreviated if the selected Song has a lot of lyrics. Chord • Small notes that are hard to read may be easier to read after you use the quantize function (page 82). Lyrics Double-staff NOTE • No lyrics are shown in doublestaff display. 3 >/■] button. Press the [> 4 To return to the MAIN display, press the [EXIT] button. 30 The Song will begin playing. The triangular cursor will move across the top of the score to indicate the current location. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Using Songs Displaying the Lyrics If a Song contains lyric data, the lyrics can be made to appear on the display. No lyrics will be displayed for a Song that contains no lyric data, even if the [LYRICS] button is pressed. 1 Select a Song. 2 Press the [LYRICS] button. Follow steps 1 and 2 of the procedure described on page 27. Try to select the Preset SONG 001 or 003. NOTE The title, lyricist, and composer of the Song will appear on the display. • Songs downloaded from the Internet or commercially available Song files, including XF format files (page 6), are compatible with the lyrics display features as long as they are standard MIDI file format files containing lyric data. Lyrics display may not be possible with some files. NOTE • If the lyrics display shows garbled characters, try changing the display language (page 12). Song title, Lyricist, Composer 3 >/■] button. Press the [> The Song will play back while the lyrics and chords are shown on the display. The lyrics will be highlighted to show the current location in the Song. Lyrics and Chord ■ Preset Songs That Can be Used For Lyrics Display Song No. Song Name 001 Amazing Grace 003 Annie Laurie PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 31 e d ck Gui ui Q Recording Your Own Performance You can record up to five of your own performances and save them as user Songs 001 through 005. Additionally, when a Song is playing the score will be shown on the display. This is a great way to learn how to read music. If the Song contains lyric and chord data, the lyrics and chords will also appear on the score display. ■ Recordable data When Style is off, tracks [1]–[16] can be recorded as melody tracks. When Style is on, tracks [1]–[8] can be recorded as melody tracks, and tracks [9]–[16] can be recorded as accompaniment tracks. NOTE • Up to approximately 30,000 notes can be recorded, if you record only to the melody tracks. ■ Recording methods ● Quick Recording.............. Immediately start recording by pressing the [REC] button. (see page 33) ● Multi Recording............... Specify the Song or Part number and then start recording. (see page 34) Track Configuration Generally, Song data consists of 16 tracks. On this instrument, you can record your performance step-bystep to each of tracks 1–16. For example, you can select the Main Voice for recording to Track 1, then set the Dual Voice to Track 2, and so on. (When the Quick Recording mode is selected, the playing parts and their corresponding tracks are set automatically.) ■ Recording track When Multi track recording is selected and accompaniment is off, you can specify the recording track [1]–[16] for melody, or when accompaniment is on, you can specify the tracks [1]–[8] for melody and [9]–[16] for accompaniment. The track button in [1/9]–[8/16] that has recorded data in the tracks is indicated in green, while the button that contains no data is unlit. Also the track numbers containing recorded data are indicated with framed rectangles in the display. 32 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Recording Your Own Performance ■ Example: Part settings in Multi Recording When Style is OFF When Style is ON Melody or other parts: 1–16 Track Track 1 Main Voice part Track 8 Left Voice part Track 9 Melody or other parts Track 16 Other parts Track 1 Main Voice part Track 8 Left Voice part Style tracks Track 9 Other parts Track 16 Style Quick Recording Procedure You can easily start recording your performance by simply pressing the [REC] button in the [SONG] mode. In this case, the track number and part number of tracks are set automatically. 1 Press the [REC] button. NOTE The User Song number for recording will be selected automatically. Performance parts are as follow: Tracks [9]–[16] will be set to recording ready mode automatically. • You can manually select the recorded user Song number if you select it before pressing the [REC] button. • Change the Style or Tempo if necessary. REC ready Track 1 Main Voice part Track 2 Left Voice part Track 3 Dual Voice part Tracks 9–16 Accompaniment part Make sure to turn the Dual Voice or Left Voice on when recording the Dual Voice or Left Voice. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 33 Recording Your Own Performance 2 Recording will start when you play the keyboard. Current measure number Start recording 3 >/■] or [REC] button. Stop recording by pressing the [> Track numbers containing recorded data are indicated with framed rectangles. or 4 >/■] button to play back the recording. Press the [> Multi-track Recording Procedure You can set the recorded user Song number and the parts for tracks individually. 1 34 From the MAIN display press the [USER] button, then use the dial to select the user Song number (001–005) you want to record to. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Recording Your Own Performance 2 Press the [EXIT] button, then select the recording part for each track (Part Assign). ◆ Selecting the part for the Melody track When Style is OFF: You can select the track for recording from [1]– [16]. When changing the track function between [TR 1–8] and [TR 9–16], press the [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] button repeatedly until the desired item appears at the top on the display. CAUTION • If you record your performance to a track that contains previous data, the previous data will be overwritten by the new data. NOTE • When ACMP track is set to REC ON, the accompaniment will be automatically set to ON. • ACMP ON/OFF does not change while recording is in progress. • An assigned part cannot be specified to another track. • A maximum of three melody tracks can be recorded simultaneously. While holding down the [REC] button, press one of the track buttons [1/9]–[8/16] until the desired part is shown at the track button. Each time you press the button, the part is changed in order (e.g., MAIN, DUAL, LEFT) in the Main display. When Style is ON: [TR 1–8] can only be selected for the Melody tracks. Press and hold Track 1 is set to the MAIN part. ◆ Selecting the part for the Accompaniment track While holding down the [REC] button, press the [ACMP] button. The REC indication will be highlighted in the display and operation will be set to record ready mode. NOTE • If you want to cancel the record ready mode of a track, simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press again the track button you want to cancel. Press and hold ACMP is set to record ready mode. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 35 Recording Your Own Performance 3 Recording will start when you play the keyboard. You can also start recording by pressing the [ >/■] button. When recording is started, the display automatically returns to the Main display, and the measure number is shown in the Main display. Current measure number Start recording 4 Stop recording by pressing the [>/■] or [REC] button. or Alternately, if you press one of the ENDING/rit. [I]–[III] buttons while recording the ACMP track, an appropriate ending pattern will play and then recording will stop. When recording stops, the current measure number will return to 001 and the recorded track numbers in the display will be shown in a box border. A message prompting you to confirm saving of the data will appear. 5 Save the recorded Song. Press the [+/YES] button. ■ To Record Other Tracks. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to record any of the remaining tracks. You can listen to the previously recorded tracks by pressing the appropriate [1/ 9]–[8/16] buttons while recording. Previously recorded track numbers are shown in a box border. You can also mute previously recorded tracks (the muted tracks will not appear in the display) while recording new tracks (page 74). ■ Redo the Recording Simply select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal way. The newly recorded material will overwrite the previous data. 36 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual NOTE • When Song memory is full, a corresponding message is shown in the display and recording will be stopped. In this case, delete any unnecessary Song data by using Song clear or track clear then start recording again. (See page 37.) Recording Your Own Performance 6 After the recording is completed: ◆ Play the User Song The operation is the same as that for Preset Songs (see page 27). 1 Press the [USER] button. 2 The current Song number/name will be highlighted—use the dial to select the user Song (001 to 005) you want to play. 3 Press the [>/■] button. ◆ Save to USB flash Memory (see page 86) ● Data not to be recorded The following data is recorded before the beginning of the Song. Even if you change the data while recording is in progress, the data will not be recorded. Style number, Style volume, Time signature Song Clear—Deleting User Songs This function clears an entire user Song (all tracks). 1 2 NOTE From the MAIN display, select the user Song (001 to 005) you want to clear. • If you want to clear a single, specified track, refer to the Track Clear operation on page 38. Press and hold the TRACK [8] button for longer than a second while holding the TRACK [1] button. Hold for longer than a second Press and hold A confirmation message will appear on the display. 3 Press the [+/YES] button to clear the Song. NOTE The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the Song is being cleared. • To execute the Song Clear function press the [+/YES] button. Press [-/NO] to cancel the Song Clear operation. Songs can also be cleared in the following way. 1 Confirm that USB memory is not inserted on the instrument, then press the [FILE MENU] button. 2 Rotate the dial and select a Song. 3 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A confirmation message will appear in the display. 4 Press [+/YES] button to clear the Song. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 37 Recording Your Own Performance Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track From a User Song This function lets you delete a specified track from a User Song. 1 2 From the MAIN display select the User Song (001 to 005) you want to clear, then press the [EXIT] button. Press the [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] button a number of times until the desired item appears on the display. The item changes in order from “REGIST.” to “TR 1–8” to “TR 9–16”. Select the desired track: “TR 1–8” or “TR 9–16”. 3 Press and hold one of the track buttons ([1/9] to [8/16]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for longer than a second. Hold for longer than a second. A confirmation message will appear on the display. 4 38 Press the [+/YES] button to clear the track. NOTE The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the track is being cleared. • To execute the Track Clear function press the [+/YES] button. Press [-/NO] to cancel the Track Clear operation. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Backup and Initialization Backup The following data items are automatically saved as backup data in the internal memory even if you turn the power off. To recall the default settings and data, use the Initialization operation. ● Backup data • Registration memory • Auto Fill In On/Off • Following parameters in the Function display: Tuning, Split point, Touch ON/OFF, Touch sensitivity, Style volume, Song volume, Metronome volume, Demo cancel, Language, Master EQ type, Chord fingering, SUSTAIN ON/OFF, TG mode Initialization This function erases all User Songs, User Styles, User MDB, and backup data in the instrument’s internal memory and restores the initial default settings and data. The following initialization procedures are provided. ■Backup Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To clear backup data in the internal memory, simultaneously hold the highest white key on the keyboard and turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch. The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored. ■MEMORY Clear NOTE • Language settings for the instrument cannot be changed in this operation. If you want to change the language, use the Function settings. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To clear the User Song data, User Style data or User MDB data that has been transferred to the internal memory from a computer, simultaneously hold the highest white key on the keyboard and the three highest black keys and then turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ ON] switch. CAUTION • When you execute the Clear operation, User Song, User Style or User MDB you have purchased will also be cleared. Be sure to save any important data to a computer. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 39 Basic Operation and Displays Basic Operation Overall PSR-S550 control is based on the following simple operations. 1 Use the category buttons to select a basic function or a CATEGORY. 2 Use the dial to select an item or value. 3 Starting/stopping a Song or Style. 1 USB 1 Song category 1 Style category ● Volume Adjustment Adjusts the volume of the sound heard via the instrument’s speakers or a pair of headphones plugged into the PHONES jack. Rotate counterclockwise to lower the volume. 3 Display (pages 42, 43) 2 1 Voice category Rotate clockwise to increase the volume. 1 Use category buttons to select a CATEGORY. ● Song category Select the Song category you want to play ● USB Select the Song, or Style in the USB memory. ● Style category Select the Style category you want to play ● Voice category Select the Voice category you want to play * If you want to change the category, press another category button or use the Category [ < ], [ > ] button. 40 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation and Displays ● Category buttons [ <], [ >] You can change the category after you’ve selected a Song, Style or Voice category. Pressing these buttons allow you to step in sequence through the categories. Example: Voice selection display Previous category Next category 2 Use the dial to select an item or value. When you select the category such as Song, Style or Voice, the selected category name and item is shown on the display. The item can be changed by using the dial or the [+/YES], [-/NO] buttons. Currently selected category name Currently selected item ● Dial Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the value of the selected item, or counterclockwise to decrease its value. Rotate the dial to continuously increase or decrease the value. Decrease Increase ● [+/YES], [-/NO] buttons Press the [+/YES] button briefly to increment the value by 1, or press the [-/NO] button briefly to decrement the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increment or decrement the value in the corresponding direction. Press briefly to increment. Press briefly to decrement. In most procedures described throughout this owner’s manual, the dial is recommended for selection simply because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection method. Please note however, that most items or values that can be selected using the dial can also be selected using the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons. 3 Starting/stopping a Song or Style. Press the [START/STOP] button after selecting the Song category or Style category to start playback of the selected Song or Style (rhythm). PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 41 Basic Operation and Displays The Displays ● Display names The display provides important, easy-to-understand indications for performing all operations. The name of the current display appears at the top of the display. You can see the “MAIN” indication at the top on the display. ● MAIN Display Title Call up the Main display Most basic operations are carried out from the instrument’s MAIN display. You can return to the MAIN display from any other display by pressing the [EXIT] button near the lower right corner of the display panel. ● FUNCTION display (page 80) The FUNCTION display provides access to 51 utility functions. The FUNCTION display appears when the [FUNCTION] button is pressed. In the FUNCTION display you can use the CATEGORY [ < ] and [ > ] buttons (page 41) to select 51 different function items. Press the CATEGORY button(s) as many times as necessary until the required function appears. You can then use the dial or the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons to adjust the value of the function as required. Function item Value 42 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation and Displays MAIN Display Items The MAIN display shows all of the current basic settings: Song, Style, Voice. It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions. Transpose (page 53) Measure number (page 36) OCTAVE (page 54) REGISTRATION memory / Song track indication Shows currently selected item: REGIST., TR 1–8, TR 9–16 (page 74) Tempo (page 49, 51) A-B Repeat Appears when the Repeat function is on for Song playback. (page 73) USB status (page 83) Chord Display (page 25) Registration memory bank status (page 77) Song track status (page 74) Main Voice (page 17) Dual Voice (page 18) Left Voice (page 19) Style (page 22) Song (page 27) Music Database (page 26) PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 43 Reference e erenc ef R Playing with the Effects Adding Harmony This feature adds Harmony, Tremolo or Echo effects to the Main Voice. 1 Press the [HARMONY] button to turn the Harmony function on. The [HARMONY] button lights indicating that Harmony is on. To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY] button again. 3 Use the dial to select a Harmony type. Refer to the Effect Type List on page 125 for information about the available Harmony types. Try playing the keyboard with the Harmony function. The effect and operation of each Harmony type is different—for details, refer to the section below “How to sound each Harmony Type” as well as the Effect Type List. NOTE • When you press the [HARMONY] button to turn this feature on, the appropriate Harmony type for the currently selected Main Voice is automatically selected. 2 Press and hold the [HARMONY] button for longer than a second. The currently selected Harmony type will be displayed. NOTE • The Harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual or Left Voices. • The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no Harmony notes when the Auto Accompaniment is on (ACMP ON lights). • When chord fingering is set to Full Keyboard, the Harmony function is turned off automatically. Hold for longer than a second Currently selected Harmony type. ● How to sound each Harmony Type • Harmony types 19 to 22 (Tremolo) • Harmony types 01 to 14 Keep holding down the keys. Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the Auto Accompaniment range of the keyboard when the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 23). • Harmony types 23 to 26 (Trill) • Harmony types 15 to 18 (Echo) Hold down two keys. Keep holding down the keys. 44 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 82). Playing with the Effects Changing the Reverb Type Reverb enhances the sound of the Voices with the rich ambience of a concert hall. When you select a Style or Song the optimum reverb type for the Voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different reverb type, use the operation described below. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up the FUNCTION display. 3 Use the dial to select a Reverb Type. You can check the sound of the selected Reverb Type by playing the keyboard. 2 Press the CATEGORY [<] and [>] but- tons as many times as necessary to call up Reverb Type. The currently selected Reverb Type will be displayed. Selected Reverb Type Refer to the Effect Type List on page 126 for information about the available Reverb Types. Reverb Type ● Adjusting the Reverb Level You can individually adjust the amount of reverb that is applied to the Main, Dual, and Left Voices. (See page 81). PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 45 Playing with the Effects Changing the Chorus Type The Chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same Voices being played in unison. When you select a Style or Song the optimum Chorus Type for the Voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different Chorus Type, use the procedure described below. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up the FUNCTION display. 3 Use the dial to select a Chorus Type. You can check the sound of the selected Chorus Type by playing the keyboard. 2 Press the CATEGORY [<] and [>] but- tons as many times as necessary to call up Chorus Type. The currently selected Chorus Type will be displayed. Selected Chorus Type Chorus Type Refer to the Effect Type List on page 127 for information about the available Chorus Types. ● Adjusting the Chorus Level You can individually adjust the amount of Chorus that is applied to the Main, Dual, and Left Voices. (See page 81). 46 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Playing with the Effects Panel Sustain This function adds sustain to the keyboard Voices. Use it when you want to add sustain to the Voices at all times, regardless of footswitch operation. The sustain function does not affect the Left Voice. Press the [SUSTAIN] button to turn the sustain function on. The [SUSTAIN] button lights indicating that Sustain is on. NOTE • For certain Voices, the sustain effect may not be obvious or audible, even when the panel sustain function is turned on. Adding DSP A total of 178 DSP effects can be added to the Main, Dual and Left Voices. These range from reverb-like ambience effects to distortion and other dynamic processing tools that let you enhance the sound, or completely transform it. DSP Type NOTE • DSP is term of abbreviated form of Digital Signal Processor and it uses a micro processor to change the audio in various ways. 1 Use the [DSP] button to turn the DSP function on. The [DSP] button lights indicating that DSP is on. To turn DSP off, press the [DSP] button again. Hold for longer than a second 3 Use the dial to select a DSP type. Refer to the DSP Type List on page 128 for information about the available DSP types. [DSP] button lights when DSP is on. NOTE • When DSP is turned on, the optimum DSP type for the current Voice is automatically selected. • The volume of the currently playing Voice changes when turning DSP on or off. This is not a malfunction. The amount of change differs depending on the selected Voice. • The DSP type is an overall setting—only one type can be selected. For this reason, when you play a newly loaded Song or Style, for example, the currently playing Voices may not sound as expected. This is normal, since the Song or Style has its own DSP type which replaces any selection you’ve made before loading. A similar phenomenon occurs when you use the [f], [r] buttons or A-B Repeat function during Song playback. 2 Press and hold the [DSP] button for longer than a second. The currently selected DSP type will be displayed. Currently selected DSP type. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 47 Playing with the Effects Pitch Bend The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. If you use this feature with a Voice such as the “042 Overdrive” guitar Voice (page 17), you can produce remarkably realistic string-bending effects. You can change the amount of pitch bend produced by the wheel, as described on page 81. NOTE • Pitch Bend is not applied to the Left Voice when accompaniment is turned on. 48 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual e erenc ef R Using Various Functions Playing with the metronome This instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature. Play and set the tempo that is most comfortable for you. ■Turn the metronome on● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Press the [METRONOME] button to start the metronome. To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME] button again. Tempo Time Signature 2 Use the dial to select a tempo from 5 to 280. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Main display. Beat number NOTE • The tempo can be changed by either pressing the TEMPO [+]/[-] buttons repeatedly or holding them down. ■Mute the bell ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● You can mute the Metronome bell which sounds at the first beat of each measure. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. ■Set the metronome tempo ● ● ● ● ● 1 Press the TEMPO [+]/[-] buttons to call up the tempo setting and use the buttons to raise or lower the tempo. 2 Press the CATEGORY [<] and [>] but- tons as many times as necessary to call up “Bell.” Tempo value 3 Rotate the dial and select ON (sound) or OFF (mute). PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 49 Using Various Functions ■Changing the Time Signature ● ● ● In this example we’ll set up a 3/8 time signature. 1 Press and hold the [METRONOME] button for longer than a second. The currently selected time signature is displayed. 4 Use the dial to select a beat length. Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or 16th note). For this example, select 8. The time signature should now be set to 3/8. Hold for longer than a second Press the [METRONOME] button to confirm the settings. Number of beats per measure Note value (the note value or length of one beat) 2 Use the dial to select the number of beats per measure. When the Bell setting is on, the Bell will sound on the first beat of each measure, while a metronome “click” will sound on all others. You can set the time signature from 01 to 60. Select 3 for this example. NOTE • When playing the Song or Style the beat value cannot be changed, since the beat is synchronized to the selected Song or Style. ■Adjusting the Metronome Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Press the CATEGORY [<] and [>] but- tons as many times as necessary to call up Metronome Volume. 3 Press the CATEGORY [>] button once to call up the Time Signature Denominator display. Metronome volume 3 Use the dial to set the metronome volume. 50 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Using Various Functions Using Tap Start You can also set the tempo by simply tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button at the required tempo—four times for time signatures in 4, and three times for time signatures in 3. You can change the tempo during Song or Style playback by pressing the button just twice. Touch Response ■Turning Touch Response on/off ● ● Keyboard Touch Response can be turned on by pressing the [TOUCH] button. When Touch Response is on you can control the volume of notes according to how hard you play the keys. The [TOUCH] button lights indicating Touch Response is turned on. To turn Touch Response off, press the [TOUCH] button again. When Touch Response is off, the same volume will be produced no matter how hard or soft you play the keys. ■Adjusting the Touch Response Sensitivity ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The sensitivity of the keyboard’s Touch Response can be adjusted in three steps (1–3). The higher the number, the greater the volume variation produced by the variation in how hard you play the keys— i.e., the keyboard becomes more “sensitive.” 1 Press and hold the [TOUCH] button for longer than a second. Touch Sensitivity [TOUCH] button lights indicating when Touch Response is turned on. 2 Use the dial to select a Touch Sensitiv- ity setting between 1 and 3. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics—i.e., greater sensitivity. NOTE • The initial default setting is 2. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 51 Using Various Functions EQ settings Five pre-programmed EQ settings are available. Settings 1 and 2 are best for listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers, setting 3 is for headphones, and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for listening via external speakers or when connecting to an external mixer. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. The currently selected function will appear in the display. 2 Press the CATEGORY [<] and [>] but- tons as many times as necessary to call up Master EQ Type. The currently selected EQ type will appear. 3 Use the dial to select an EQ Setting for the best sound. 52 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Using Various Functions Pitch Controls ◆ Large Pitch Changes (Transpose) The overall pitch of the instrument can be shifted up or down by a maximum of one octave in semitone increments. ◆ Small Pitch Changes (Tuning) The overall tuning of the instrument can be shifted up or down by a maximum of 1 semitone. The default setting is 440 Hz. 1 Press one of the TRANSPOSE [+]/[-] 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. buttons. The value is shown in the display, indicating the amount of transposition over or below the normal value. 2 Press the CATEGORY [<] and [>] but- tons as many times as necessary to call up Tuning. Current value 2 Use the dial to set the transpose value between -12 and +12 as required. Tuning The range is 415.3–466.2 Hz 3 Use the dial to set the tuning value between 415.3–466.2Hz as required. NOTE • This setting does not affect Drum Kit Voices. NOTE • This setting does not affect Drum Kit Voices. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Main display. Pressing the TRANSPOSE [+]/[-] buttons allows single-step changes. Pressing and holding either TRANSPOSE [+]/[-] button continuously increases or decreases the value. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 53 Using Various Functions Changing the pitch of the instrument in octaves You can change the playing pitch of the Main and Dual Voices in octave intervals. 1 Press the UPPER OCTAVE [+] button to raise the pitch by one octave. The newly changed value is shown in the LCD. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Main display. ● In the case of UPPER OCTAVE +1 2 Press the UPPER OCTAVE [-] button to lower the pitch by one octave. The newly changed value—now one octave lower—is shown in the LCD. Press the UPPER OCTAVE [-] button again to lower the pitch one more octave. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Main display. One octave up ● In the case of UPPER OCTAVE -1 NOTE • When a Drum Kit is selected, each percussion Voice assigned to the keyboard are shifted in location but not pitch. 54 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual One octave down e erenc ef R Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Basic operation of the Style (Auto Accompaniment) feature is described on page 22 of the Quick Guide. Included here is information on how you can play the Styles in various ways, how to adjust the Style volume, how you can play chords using the Styles, and more. Pattern Variation (sections) The instrument features a wide variety of Style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the Song you are playing. Fill-in Intro Main variation Ending ●INTRO section This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. ●MAIN VARIATION section This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are four variations on the basic pattern (A–D), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand. ●ENDING section This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the Auto Accompaniment stops automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. ●AUTO Fill-in section This is automatically added before the current section changes to a newly selected section. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 55 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions 1 Select the desired Style. (See page 22.) 2 Press the [ACMP] button to turn Auto 5 Press one of the MAIN VARIATION [A]– [D] buttons. The selected Main Variation button flashes. Accompaniment on. The [ACMP] button lights when ACMP is turned on. 3 Press the [AUTO FILL IN] button to turn the Auto Fill In function on. The initial default setting for Auto Fill In is “on.” 4 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn Synchro Start on. 6 Press one of the INTRO [I]–[III] buttons. The selected Intro button lights. 7 Play a chord in the accompaniment range and start the Intro section. Try playing a C major chord. (See “Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords” on page 25.) Split Point The [SYNC START] button flashes indicating Synchro Start is engaged. ● Synchro Start When Synchro Start is on you, can start the Style by playing any key in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. 56 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Auto Accompaniment range NOTE • The Baroque Air Style in the MOVIE & SHOW category does not have a Rhythm part, so there is no rhythm sound for this Style. Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions 8 Press one of the MAIN VARIATION [A]– [D] buttons. ● Synchro Stop When this function is selected, the accompaniment Style will only play while you are playing chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Style playback will stop when you release the keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC STOP] button. When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly into the selected Main section A–D. 9 Press one of the ENDING/rit. [I]–[III] buttons. This switches to the Ending section. When the Ending is finished, the Auto Accompaniment stops automatically. You can have the Ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing one of the ENDING/ rit. [I]–[III] buttons again while the Ending is playing back. The Style will play while you are playing the keys Style playback will stop when you release the keys PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 57 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions One Touch Setting Sometimes selecting the ideal Voice to play with a Song or Style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects four ideally matched Voices for the Style you’ve selected. 1 Select the desired Style. (See page 22.) 2 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4] buttons. 3 Play the chord in the accompaniment range and start the Style. Try selecting other ONE TOUCH SETTING [1]–[4] buttons and listen to the results. Split Point Auto Accompaniment range Variation Change and OTS (OTS LINK) When change the MAIN VARIATION [A]–[D] to other MAIN VARIATION [A]–[D] during OTS LINK is on, OTS 1–4 automatically change the number according to the selected variation number. (see below) Press the [OTS LINK] button to turn on the OTS link. Automatically change 58 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Setting the Split Point The initial default Split Point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the procedure described below. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to set the Split Point to any key from 036 (C1) through 096 (C6). Split Point (54: F#2) Left Voice Main Voice NOTE • Changing the Split Point here also changes the Auto Accompaniment Split Point. 2 Use the CATEGORY [<] and [>] buttons • The Left Voice sounds when the split-point key is played. as many times as necessary to call up Split Point. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 59 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Playing a Style with Chords but without Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) When Auto Accompaniment is on (ACMP button lights) and Synchro Start is off, you can play chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the Style is stopped and still hear the accompaniment chords. This is called “Stop Accompaniment,” and any of the chord fingerings recognized by the instrument can be used (page 25). Select a Style, then press the [ACMP] button to turn Auto Accompaniment on. [ACMP] button lights Auto Accompaniment range Adjusting the Style Volume If the instrument is in the Song mode, press one of the Style category buttons to enter the Style mode. (page 22) 2 Use the CATEGORY [<] and [>] buttons as many times as necessary to call up Style Volume. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to set the Style Volume between 000 and 127. 60 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Chord Basics Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”. The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the root, third, and fifth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major triad, for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third note of the C major scale), and G (the fifth note of the C major scale). 3rd Root 3rd In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for the lowest note results in “inversions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and anchors the other chord notes. The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third. Major third–four half steps (semitones) Minor third–three half steps (semitones) The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the triad is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce two additional chords, as shown below. Major chord CM Major 3rd Minor 3rd Minor chord Cm Minor 3rd Major 3rd Augmented chord C aug Major 3rd Major 3rd Diminished chord C dim Minor 3rd Minor 3rd The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to create different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for example, by choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”). ● Reading Chord Names Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a chord (other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what the root of the chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished chord, whether it requires a major or flatted seventh, what alterations or tensions it uses ... all at a glance. Cm Root note Chord type ● Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by the PSR-S550.) Suspended 4 th Perfect 5 th Perfect 4 th Minor/major 7 th C7 Flatted 7 th Minor chord Major chord 7 th, flatted 5 th Flatted 7 th 7 th chord Minor chord Minor 7 th, flatted 5 th (b5) C m7 C7 Flatted 5 th Major 7 th C m7 (b5) C mM7 Major 7 th Minor 7 th 7 th C sus4 Flatted 5 th Minor 7 th chord C M7 Major 7 th Major chord 7 th, suspended 4 th C 7sus4 Flatted 7 th Suspended 4 th chord PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 61 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions ■Recognized Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords. Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Major [M] 1-3-5 C Add ninth [(9)] 1-2-3-5 C Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 Display C (9) Cadd9 C6 (9) Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6 C 69 Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 C M7 CM7 Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7 1 - 3 - b5 (9) C M79 (#11) CM7#11 (b5) Cb5 (b5) C M7 C M7 C Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 C M7 CM7b5 Suspended fourth [sus4] 1-4-5 C sus4 Csus4 Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 C aug Caug Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 C M7aug CM7aug Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm (9) Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm add9 Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 C m6 Cm6 Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 C m7 Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 C m7 Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) C m7 (11) Cm711 Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 C mM7 CmM7 Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 (9) (9) C mM7 (b5) C m7 Cm7 Cm79 CmM79 Cm7b5 C mM7 C dim CmM7b5 C dim7 Cdim7 C7 C7 Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - b7 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 C7 Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 Diminished seventh [dim7] Seventh [7] Seventh ninth [7(9)] Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 (b5) Cdim (b9) C7b9 C7 (b13) C7b13 (9) C79 (#11) C7#11 (13) C713 (#9) C7 C7 C7 Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7 C7#9 Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7 C 7b5 C7b5 Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C 7aug C7aug Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 - b7 C 7sus4 C7sus4 Suspended second [sus2] 1-2-5 C sus2 Csus2 NOTE • Notes in parentheses can be omitted. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. • A perfect fifth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment based only on the root and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords. 62 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions User Style This instrument features 11 internal Style categories, but it also allows you to import additional Styles (only those with an “.sty” extension) that you’ve downloaded from the Internet or gotten from other sources, and load them into a User Style and use them in the same way as the internal Styles. For details on loading a Style file, see “Loading Registration Files, Style Files, Song Files or MDB Files ” on page 87. In order to load a Style file it is necessary to first either transfer the Style file to the instrument from a computer, or connect a USB flash memory containing the Style file to the USB TO DEVICE connector. Refer to “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument” on page 96 for details on the file transfer procedure. If you are using a USB flash memory device, refer to “Loading Registration Files, Style Files, Song Files or MDB Files” on page 87. You can directly play the User Style in the USB memory without loading (page 89). Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard In “Playing Along with a Style” on page 23 we described two methods of playing Styles (Multi, Full Keyboard) in which chords were either detected only to the left of the keyboard Split Point or over the entire keyboard. By making the settings described below, chord detection for Style accompaniment occurs over the entire range of the keyboard, allowing for even more dynamic Style performance. In this mode only chords played in the normal way (page 25) can be detected. 1 Press the [ACMP] button for longer than a second. 2 Use the dial to select 2 “FullKeyboard”. Hold for longer than a second PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 63 e erenc ef R Creating Original Styles (Style Creator) This instrument has a Style Creator feature that lets you record and save your own original Styles. Recorded Styles can be played in the same manner as the preset Styles. Style Structure Style data consists of eighteen sections, each of which has eight separate Parts. FILL IN A–D INTRO 1–3 MAIN A–D ENDING 1–3 8 Parts in each section Part 1 x8 Sections: INTRO 1–3, MAIN A–D, FILL IN A–D, ENDING 1–3 Main Display of the Style Creator The following display appears when entering the Style Creator function. Specified measure and beat Currently selected function by category [< ]/[ > ] buttons When playing or recording, the current measure number appears Current tempo Current section For example, set the beat number by using the dial Current selected section and selected Part in the section. 64 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Creating Original Styles (Style Creator) Follow the Style Creator instructions. Select a preset Style which is most similar to the Style you want to record. * If you are creating a Style from scratch, this step is not necessary. Enter the Style Creator. * A confirmation message appears asking if you want to create a Style from scratch. Entire settings • Beat: 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4 * If you want to change the beat settings, you should clear all the previous data. Section settings • Section: INTRO 1–3, MAIN A–D, FILL IN A–D, ENDING 1–3. • Measure Length: 1–32 Part Settings • Recording Part: RHY 1–2, BASS, CHD 1–2, PAD, PHR 1–2 • Voice: Select the recording Voice. • Part Volume: Determines the Part volume. • Pan: Determines the pan position. • Reverb level • Chorus level Recording the Part • Recording start/stop • Clear the recorded drum Voice Record another Part Editing • Quantize: 1/4, 1/6, 1/8, 1/12, 1/16, 1/24, 1/32 • Part clear Saving • Save the Style data Record another section Exit from the Style Creator * Press the [EXIT] button whenever you want to exit from the Style Creator (except during recording). PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 65 Creating Original Styles (Style Creator) Basic Operation 1 Press one of the [STYLE CATEGORY] A confirmation message appears. buttons. Select a [STYLE CATEGORY] button which is most similar to the Style you want to create. 4 Select the production manner of Style 2 Select a Style which is most similar to the Style you want to create. You can also select a Style from the User Styles. If you are creating a Style from scratch, go on to the next step. Creator. If you are creating a Style from scratch, press the [YES] button. If you are creating a Style by using a specified Style (step 2), press the [NO] button. 5 Set the desired measures and beats, and then record the Style for each Part and for each section. 6 Save the recorded Style data to a User Style. 3 Press [REC] and enter the Style Creator operation. 7 Press [EXIT] to exit from the Style Creator. ● Adjust individual track volumes before recording. NOTE • If there is not enough capacity left on the instrument to save the data, an appropriate message will appear in the display. Erase unwanted data from the instrument to make more memory available. 66 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual You can use the mixer function (page 75) to adjust individual track volumes before proceeding with step 3. Creating Original Styles (Style Creator) Parameter Settings, Recording and Saving Select the production manner of Style Creator (refer steps 1–4 on page 66) and go on to the next instructions. ■Entire settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Beat If you change the Beat value, you will need to clear all data and then make a new Style from scratch. 1 Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Beat” appears in the display. ■Section Settings: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Select a section 1 Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Section” appears in the display. 2 Rotate the dial or directly press the [SECTION] button in the STYLE CONTROL area to select a recorded section. Settings: INTRO 1–3, MAIN A–D, FILL IN A–D, ENDING 1–3 2 Rotate the dial and select the Beat number. Range: 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4 3 Press the [EXECUTE] button to set the Beat. or When you create a Style based on another Style, the following message appears. NOTE • You can also select the FILL IN A–D section by pressing the [AUTO FILL IN] button and then select FILL IN A–D by using the dial. If you want to clear the Style and make a new one, press the [+/YES] button. 3 Press the [EXECUTE] button to set the section. Measure Length 1 Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Length” appears in the display. 2 Rotate the dial and select the Measure Length. Range: 1–32 NOTE • If you set a length smaller than that of the previous one, any data existing beyond the new length will be deleted. 3 Press the [EXECUTE] button to set the Measure Length. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 67 Creating Original Styles (Style Creator) ■Part Settings:● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Select a Part 1 2 ■Recording a Part Part buttons indication Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Part” appears in the display. Rotate the dial and select a recorded Part. Range: RHYTHM 1–2, BASS, CHORD 1–2, PAD, PHRASE 1–2 3 Unlit, does not contain data or is a non-playing Part (mute) Lit in Green, contains data and selected as playing Part Lit in Red, recorded Part Press the [EXECUTE] button to set the Part. Select a Voice 1 2 3 Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Voice” appears in the display. Press a desired [VOICE CATEGORY] button to select the Voice category. Rotate the dial to select a Voice. Range: When RHY 1 is selected as the Part, all Voices can be selected. When RHY 2 is selected as the Part, drum Voices can be selected. When other Part is selected, all Voices excepting drums can be selected. Part Volume 1 2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Part Volume” appears in the display. Rotate the dial and set the Part Volume. Rhythm Part recording Confirm that desired section name appears at the upper right area in the display, and then follow the instructions below. 1 Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press a [RHY 1] or [RHY 2] button in the rhythm Part. “RHYTHM1” or “RHYTHM2” appears in the display. 2 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A REC mark appears at the recorded Part on the display. In this condition, the [PART] button also changes to red. Range: 0–127 Pan 1 2 Current measure number Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Pan” appears in the display. Rotate the dial and set the Pan position. Range: 0–64–127 Reverb Level 1 2 Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Reverb Level” appears in the display. Rotate the dial and set the Reverb depth. Range: 0–127 Chorus Level 1 2 Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Chorus Level” appears in the display. Rotate the dial and set the Chorus depth. Range: 0–127 68 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Contains no data Contains data, sounds (Part ON) Recorded part Contains data, but is muted (Part OFF) Play the keyboard to check that the appropriate drum Voices can be heard. You can mute the Parts during recording (except for the Part you’re recording), by simply pressing the [PART] button so that the mute mark is indicated at the Part. In this condition, the [PART] button also changes from green to unlit. Creating Original Styles (Style Creator) ● Rules for recording to non-rhythm Parts: If you want to rehearse a part before recording, press the [EXECUTE] button. The REC mark for the Part in the display will turn off. In this situation, you can start rehearsing by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Return to the Part record standby mode, after stopping rehearsal by pressing the [START/ STOP] button, and then press the [EXECUTE] button again. • Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the Bass and PHRASE Parts (i.e., C, D, E, G, A, and B). • Use only the C chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD Parts (i.e., C, E, G, and B). C R C 3 Press the [START/STOP] button to begin recording. 4 Play the keyboard and record the drum Voices. Press the [START/STOP] button to stop recording. NOTE • Any desired chord or chord progression can be used for the INTRO and ENDING sections. 5 1 Press and hold the [-] button and play the key or keys that correspond to the cleared Voice. 2 Press the [START/STOP] button to exit from the clear operation. Press the [START/STOP] button to stop recording. Record to other Parts in other sections. Clear the recorded drum Voices To clear the recorded drum Voices, after starting recording (refer to step 3 of the recording operation), follow the instructions below. Only the rhythm Part can be cleared in this operation; other Parts (e.g., bass or chord) cannot be cleared. C = Chord notes C, R = Recommended notes Using the data recorded here, the auto accompaniment (Style playback) is appropriately converted depending on the chord changes you make during your performance. Since the entire Style plays repeatedly, you can record at any point you like. 5 C R C 6 Save the Style data (page 71) Bass, Chord, Pad and Phrase Part recording 1 Press and hold the [REC] button and press the appropriate [PART] button to which you want to record. 2 Press the [EXECUTE] button and check that the REC mark appears at the Part in the display. In this condition, the [PART] button also changes to red. 3 Press the [START/STOP] button to begin recording. 4 Play the keyboard and record your playing. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 69 Creating Original Styles (Style Creator) ■Editing (Quantize and part clear) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Quantize Clearing a recorded Part This function allows you to automatically align the timing of all recorded notes. 1 measure Actual recorded note When Quantize is set to 1/8 When Quantize is set to 1/4 1/4 1/8 1/2 Select a desired section for clearing, and then follow the instructions below. 1 Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Part Clear” appears in the display. 2 Press and hold a desired [PART] button for longer than a second. 3/4 1/4 1/4 1/2 1 Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Quantize” appears in the display. 2 Rotate the dial and select the value. NOTE • You can also select a Part by rotating the dial. In this case, press the [EXECUTE] button to clear. Settings: 1/4, 1/6, 1/8, 1/12, 1/16, 1/24, 1/32 3 A confirmation message appears. Press the [EXECUTE] button. 3 The “UNDO” message appears. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button again if you want to replace with the previous Quantize value. NOTE • If the recorded Part is not specified, Quantize cannot be set. Specify the Part for recording and then use the quantize function. • The undo icon on the display will disappear if you exit from the current display. 70 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Press the [+/YES] button to clear the selected Part. Creating Original Styles (Style Creator) Saving the data Saving the recorded data 1 Press the CATEGORY[ < ]/[ > ] button repeatedly until “Save” appears in the display. A new user Style number is applied automatically and indicated in the display. 4 Press [+/YES] button to save the data. NOTE • If you select a User Style Number that already contains data, an “Overwrite?” confirmation prompt appears. If you wish to save and overwrite, press the [+/YES] button. The following display appears when saving is complete. You can go back and set other sections with the Section Settings (page 67) and then record additional parts. 2 To save the Style to USB flash memory, refer to the “Saving a User Song or User Style” section on page 86. If you want to change the user Style number, select the number by using the dial. CAUTION • If you select a User Style Number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. NOTE • If you want to exit from the Style Creator without saving, press the [EXIT] button. • A maximum of 50 Style files can be saved. 3 Press [EXECUTE] button to save the data. ● Deleting a User Style 1 Confirm that USB flash memory is not connected to the [TO DEVICE] terminal. 2 Press the [FILE MENU] button. 3 Use the Dial to select the user style data you want to delete. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button. 5 Press the [+/YES] button to delete the file. A confirmation message appears. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 71 e erenc ef R Song Settings Song Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [<] and [>] buttons as many times as necessary to call up Song Volume. Song Volume Can be set between 000 and 127 3 Use the dial to set the Song volume between 000 and 127. NOTE • Song volume can be adjusted while a Song is selected. Changing the Tempo When playing the Song you can change the tempo as required. Press the TEMPO [+]/[-] buttons. The tempo display will appear and you can use the dial or the TEMPO [+]/[-] buttons to set to tempo to anywhere from 5 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute. or You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing both the TEMPO [+] and [-] buttons. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Main display. Pressing the TEMPO [+]/[-] buttons allows single-step changes. Pressing and holding either button continuously increases or decreases the value. 72 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Song Settings A-B Repeat You can specify a section of a Song—“A” is the start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback. The A-B Repeat function is also very convenient for practicing when used along with the score display features of the instrument (page 30). A 1 Play the Song (page 27) and press the [A B] button at the beginning of the section you want to repeat (the “A” point). B 3 The specified A-B section of the Song will now play repeatedly. You can cancel A-B repeat playback at any time by pressing the [A B] button. NOTE • The current measure number is shown in the display during playback. • If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the Song press the [A B] button before starting playback of the Song. Point A 2 Press the [A B] button a second time at the end of the section you want to repeat (the “B” point). Point B PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 73 Song Settings Muting Independent Song Parts Each “track” of a Song plays a different part of the Song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc. You can mute individual tracks and play the muted part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute tracks other than the ones you want to listen to. Use the [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] button to select the TR 1–8, TR 9–16 and use the SONG PART [1/9]– [8/16] buttons to mute or un-mute the corresponding tracks ([1]–[8], [9]–[16]). Each track button is lit in green when that track is not muted, and is unlit when the track is muted. Furthermore, the border around the track number in the display disappears when that track is muted. Refer to page 32 for information about the Song track configuration. No track number ... No data. Track number without border ... Track contains data but is muted. Track number with border ... Track contains data and is not muted. 1 Press the [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] but- ton until the desired track is shown on the display. The following items appear on the display when you press the [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] button. “REGIST” ➝ “TR 1–8” ➝ “TR 9–16”. REGIST. TR 1 – 8 TR 9 – 16 74 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 2 Press the desired TRACK [1/9]–[8/16] buttons to set the mute track. To cancel the mute, press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY [1/9]–[8/16] buttons again. Display Setting TR 1–8 Specify the mute tracks of 1–8 by pressing the [1/9]–[8/16] buttons. TR 9–16 Specify the mute tracks of 9–16 by pressing the [1/9]–[8/16] buttons. e erenc ef R MIXER This instrument has a MIXER feature that lets you control the Part Volume, Pan, Reverb Level and Chorus Level during playing of the Song or Style. In the Song mode: Determine the group of track numbers, 1–8 or 9–16, then control the functions below. In the Style mode: Directly control the functions below. • Track ON/OFF • Select the Mixer Parameter (Volume, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level) Mixer Display Current track ON/ OFF and Value Track number Parameter Current track and its value are highlighted on the display. In this example, Track 1 is selected and is set to ON, and its volume is 110. Basic operation 1 Press and hold the [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] button for longer than a second so that the Mixer display appears. 2 When in the Song mode, press the [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] button and select the desired group of tracks, 1–8 or 9–16. The button toggles between tracks 1–8 and 9– 16. In the Style mode, tracks 9–16 are selected automatically. When track 1–8 is selected Control the parameter by using the dial or the [+/YES], [-/NO] buttons. To exit the mixer operation, press the [EXIT] button. When track 9– 16 is selected PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 75 MIXER 3 Press the desired [TRACK] button you want to control. 4 Control the Parameter ON/OFF or other parameters in each track. (Refer to the following instructions.) Repeat steps 2–4 and set other tracks if necessary. 5 Press [EXIT] to exit from the mixer operation. The selected track will be changed to ON automatically. Track ON/OFF and other parameter controls ■Track ON/OFF ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Determines whether each is track ON or OFF (unmuted or muted) Select the track you want to set ON/OFF (refer to steps 1–3 of basic operation on page 75), and then follow the instructions below. The selected track will be changed to ON automatically. 1 Press the [TRACK] button again to set it 1 Press the CATEGORY [<]/[>] button to select the desired item. 2 Rotate the dial and set the parameter. to OFF. The button toggles between ON and OFF, and the [TRACK] button also changes between Green to unlit. ■Parameter controls ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Enter the Mixer mode (refer to steps 1–3 of basic operation on page 75), and then set the Volume, Pan, Reverb Level and Chorus Level. Volume Determines the Part volume. Range: 0–127 Pan Determines the Pan position. Range: 0–64–127 Reverb Level Determines the Reverb depth. Range: 0–127 Chorus Level Determines the Chorus depth. Range: 0–127 76 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Current volume Repeat steps 1–2 and set other tracks if necessary. 3 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the mixer operation. e erenc ef R Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 64 complete setups can be saved (8 banks of 8 setups each). Up to 64 presets (eight banks of eight each) can be memorized. 8 Banks Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memory 4 Memory 5 Memory 6 Memory 7 Memory 8 Color is used to indicate the status of individual memory buttons for the selected bank. • Lit in Green .......Contains data • Unlit ..................Does not contain data • Lit in Red ..........Currently set button Saving to the Registration Memory 1 Set the panel controls as required— select a Voice, accompaniment Style, etc. 2 Press the REGIST BANK [+]/[-] buttons until the desired bank number is shown on the display. You can also use the dial in the Bank Select display. 3 To store the current panel settings, simultaneously hold down the [MEMORY] button and press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8] buttons. The button corresponding to the stored Registration lights in Red. NOTE • You can also save your panel settings memorized to registration memory button into USB flash memory as a user file (see page 85). CAUTION • If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. CAUTION Bank number • Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registration memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost. NOTE • Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during Song playback. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 77 Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings Recalling a Registration Memory Make sure that “REGIST” appears in the display (press the [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] button until it is shown). 1 Press the REGIST BANK [+]/[-] button to select the desired bank. You can also use the dial to select the bank number. ● Settings that can be saved to the Registration Memory • Style settings* Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF, Split Point, Style settings (Main A–D, INTRO 1– 3, ENDING 1–3), Style Volume, Tempo, Chord Fingering, Upper Octave • Voice settings Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP Level, Dry Level), Dual Voice settings (Dual ON/ OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP Level, Dry Level), Left Voice settings (Left ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP Level, Dry Level) Bank number 2 Press the REGISTRATION MEMORY button, [1]–[8], containing the settings you want to recall. The panel controls will be instantly set accordingly. The button to which the data is stored lights in green and the currently set button is in red. 78 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual • Effect settings Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Panel Sustain ON/ OFF, DSP ON/OFF, DSP Type • Harmony settings Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type, Harmony Volume • Other settings Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Upper Octave *Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when using the Song features. Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings Registration Clear—Deleting a Specified Registration Memory Keep in mind that groups of data cannot be deleted or cleared from the instrument at a single time. 1 Press the [REGIST/PART [MIXER]] but- ton a number of times until the “REGIST.” item appears. The item changes in order from “REGIST.” to “TR 1–8” to “TR 9–16”. 3 Press and hold the REGISTRATION MEMORY button corresponding to the Registration you want to clear for longer than a second. Hold for longer than a second A confirmation message will appear in the display. 2 Press the REGIST BANK [+]/[-] button a number of times until the desired bank number appears. The Registration Memory button is lit in green if Registration data is stored to the memory. 4 Press the [+/YES] button to clear a Reg- istration Memory. A confirmation message will appear again in the display. Use the [-/NO] button to cancel the clear operation. 5 Press the [+/YES] button again to clear the Registration Memory. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the Song is being cleared. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 79 e erenc ef R The Functions The “Functions” provide a wide range of both detailed and overall instrument parameters, such as adjusting the tuning, setting the split point, and editing the voices and effects. Selecting and Setting Functions There are 51 function parameters in all. 1 Find the function you want to set in the list that begins on page 81. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Select a function. Press the CATEGORY [ <] and [ >] buttons as many times as necessary until the function’s display name appears in the display. Take a look at the function list starting on page 81. The name of the previous item in the list appears to the upper left, and the name of the next item in the list appears to the upper right of the currently selected item. Function group Previous item Current selected item 80 Next item Parameter PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 4 Use the dial or the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons, to set the parameters. The [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons are used to make ON/ OFF type settings: [+/YES] = ON, [-/NO] = OFF. In some cases, pressing the [+/YES] button will execute the selected function, and pressing [-/NO] will cancel the selection. Press the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simultaneously to recall the default setting (excepting the initial setup of MIDI). Press these simultaneously to recall the default setting. • Increment value by 1. • ON • Execute • Decrement value by 1. • OFF • Cancel The Functions ■ Function Setting List Group VOLUME OVERALL Function Item Style Volume Song Volume Tuning Pitch Bend Range Split Point Display Indication Style Volume Song Volume Tuning Pitch Bend Range Split Point Range/Settings 000–127 000–127 415.3–466.2 01–12 Determines the volume of the Style. Determines the volume of the Song. Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound. Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments. 036–096 (C1–C6) Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets the Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. Determines the sensitivity of the feature. Touch Sensitivity Touch Sensitivity 1 (Soft), 2 (Medium), 3 (Hard) Chord Fingering Chord Fingering 1 (Multi Finger), 2 (FullKeyboard) MAIN VOICE Volume Octave Pan Main Volume Main Octave Main Pan 000–127 -2–+2 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Reverb Level 000–127 DSP Level Main Reverb Level Main Chorus Level Main DSP Level 000–127 Dry Level Main Dry Level 000–127 Volume Octave Pan Dual Volume Dual Octave Dual Pan 000–127 -2–+2 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Reverb Level 000–127 DSP Level Dual Reverb Level Dual Chorus Level Dual DSP Level 000–127 Dry Level Dual Dry Level 000–127 Left Volume Left Octave Left Pan 000–127 -2–+2 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) 000–127 DSP Level Left Reverb Level Left Chorus Level Left DSP Level 000–127 Dry Level Left Dry Level 000–127 Chorus Level DUAL VOICE Chorus Level LEFT VOICE Volume Octave Pan Reverb Level Chorus Level Description 000–127 000–127 000–127 Sets the chord detection mode. In the Multi Finger mode both normal chords and simple chords played to the left of the split point are detected. In the Full Keyboard mode normal chords played anywhere on the keyboard will be detected, and the notes played will sound as well. Determines the volume of the Main Voice. Determines the octave range for the Main Voice. Determines the pan position of the Main Voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect. Determines how much of the Main Voice’s unprocessed signal sounds (no Reverb, Chorus or DSP effect processing). Determines the volume of the Dual Voice. Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice. Determines the pan position of the Dual Voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect. Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s unprocessed signal sounds (no Reverb, Chorus or DSP effect processing). Determines the volume of the Left Voice. Determines the octave range for the Left Voice. Determines the pan position of the Left Voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Determines how much of the Left Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Determines how much of the Left Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Determines how much of the Left Voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect. Determines how much of the Left Voice’s unprocessed signal sounds (no Reverb, Chorus or DSP effect processing). PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 81 The Functions Reverb Type Display Indication Reverb Type 01–36 Chorus Type Chorus Type 1–45 DSP Type DSP Type 001–239 Master EQ Type Master EQ Type PC MODE Harmony Type Harmony Volume PC Mode Harmony Type Harmony Volume PC Mode 1 (Speaker 1), 2 (Speaker 2), 3 (Headphones), 4 (Line Out 1), 5 (Line Out 2) 01–26 000–127 PC1/PC2/OFF MIDI Local ON/OFF Local ON/OFF External Clock ON/OFF Keyboard Out External Clock ON/OFF Keyboard Out ON/OFF Style Out Style Out ON/OFF Song Out Song Out ON/OFF Initial Setup Initial Setup YES/NO Time Signature Numerator Time Signature Denominator Bell ON/OFF Time Signature Numerator Time Signature Denominator Bell 00–60 Optimizes the MIDI settings for connecting to a computer (page 95). Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 94) Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 94) Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB TO HOST or not (OFF) during Style playback. Determines whether Song data is transmitted (ON) via USB TO HOST or not (OFF) during Song playback. Allows you to instantly send a data ‘snapshot’ of all panel settings to a computer or sequencer. Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. Determines the time signature of the Metronome. 2, 4, 8, 16 Sets the length of each metronome beat. ON/OFF Volume Quantize Metronome Volume Quantize Determines whether the Metronome bell sounds at the first beat in each measure or not. Determines the volume of the Metronome. Right-Part Right-Part Left-Part Left-Part GuideTrack 1– 16 Demo Cancel Demo Cancel ON/OFF TG Mode TG Mode XG/Normal Language Language English/Japanese Group EFFECT HARMONY METRONOME SCORE UTILITY LANGUAGE Function Item Range/Settings 000–127 1 (1/4 note), 2 (1/4 note triplet), 3 (1/8 note), 4 (1/8 note triplet), 5 (1/16 note), 6 (1/16 note triplet), 7 (1/32 note), 8 (1/32 note triplet) GuideTrack 1– 16 Description Determines the Reverb type, including off (36). (See the list on page 126) Determines the Chorus type, including off (45). (See the list on page 127) Determines the DSP type, including off (239). (See the list on page 128) Sets the equalizer applied to the instrument output (including speakers, headphones or other output) for optimum sound in different listening situations. Determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 125) Determines the volume of the Harmony effect. Depending on the Song data, you can make the score more readable by adjusting the timing of the notes. This determines the minimum timing resolution used in the Song. For example, if there are both quarter notes and eighth notes in the Song, you should set this value to “eighth note.” Any notes or rests shorter than this value will not be shown in the score. Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is effective for Songs except for preset Songs. Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is effective for Songs except for preset Songs. Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed. Determines whether the external Song is played accurately in XG format or not. When it is set to XG, the external Song is played accurately in XG format, but the Song data may cause changes in the sound of your keyboardplayed parts. Determines the display language for the demo displays, Song file names, lyrics and certain display messages. All other messages and names are displayed in English. When this is set to Japanese, the file names are displayed in the Japanese font. The lyrics display follows the language setting originally made in the Song data; however, when no such setting exists, the setting here is used. * All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simultaneously. (The exception to this is Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.) 82 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual e erenc ef R Using USB Flash Memory USB flash memory is a memory medium used for storing data. When a USB flash memory device is inserted in this instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, user Songs and user Styles created on the instrument and the registered settings can be saved to or loaded from the device. USB flash memory can also be used to transfer Song, Style MDB data downloaded from the Internet to the instrument. Furthermore, user Songs saved to USB flash memory in MIDI file format can also be used with these features. In this section we’ll look at the procedures for setting up and formatting USB flash memory devices, as well as for saving and loading data to and from them. If you don’t have a USB flash memory device, you will need to purchase one (or more, as needed). The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB storage devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB storage devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB storage device, please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor (see list at end of the Owner’s Manual) for advice. Before using a USB device, read through the “Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal” section on page 93. For information about USB devices compatible with the instrument, see “Connection to a USB Storage Device” on page 90. Using USB Flash Memory 1 Connect a USB flash memory to the USB TO DEVICE terminal, being careful to insert it in the proper direction. (Do not try to force an improper connection.) CONNECT You can go to the FILE CONTROL display from which you can access USB flash memory operations by pressing the [FILE MENU] button from this display. (Do not press this button now, but only when instructed to in the sections below.) 2 Check that the “CONNECT” message is shown in the MAIN display. NOTE • No sound will be produced if you play the keyboard while the FILE CONTROL display is showing. Also, in this state only buttons related to file functions will be active. NOTE • The FILE CONTROL display will not appear in any of the following cases: • During style or song playback. • While data is being loaded from a USB flash memory. Menu Reference Page USB Format 84 Load 87 Regist Save 85 User Song Save 86 User Style Save 86 USB Delete 88 *User Delete 88 * This particular menu item has no relation to USB operations, but it can be used to delete a User Song. A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears in the display to facilitate operation. Refer to the “Messages” section on page 108 for an explanation of each message. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 83 Using USB Flash Memory Formatting USB Flash Memory A new USB flash memory device must be formatted before it can be used by this instrument. CAUTION • If you format a USB flash memory that already contains data, all of the data will be erased. Be careful not to erase important data when using the format function. 1 After connecting the USB flash memory to be formatted to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, check that the “CONNECT” message is shown in the MAIN display. 2 Press the [FILE MENU] button. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button and the display prompts you for confirmation. You can press the [-/NO] button at this point to cancel the operation. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button, and the format operation will begin. CAUTION • Once the format-in-progress message appears in the display, the format operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory device during this operation. 6 A message appears in the display indi3 Use the CATEGORY [<] and [>] buttons to select the USB Format item. The display prompts you for confirmation. 84 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual cating that the operation is complete. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • If the USB flash memory device has been write-protected, an appropriate message will appear in the display and you will not be able to execute the operation. Using USB Flash Memory Saving the Registration Data The registration data you created in the instrument can be saved to a USB flash memory device. 1 Make sure that a appropriately format- ted USB flash memory device has been properly connected to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that a “CONNECT” message is shown in the MAIN display. 2 3 Use the CATEGORY [<] and [>] buttons Press the [FILE MENU] button. Cursor left Cursor right Delete character Select characters to locate the Regist Save item. A default file name will automatically be created. Cursor 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis● To Overwrite an Existing File If you want to overwrite a file that already exists on the USB flash memory device, use the dial or the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons to select the file, then skip ahead to step 6. NOTE • If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate message will appear in the display and you will not be able to execute the operation. • If there is not enough capacity left on the USB flash memory device to save the data, an appropriate message will appear in the display and you will not be able to save the data. Erase unwanted files from the USB flash memory device to make more memory available (page 88), or use a different USB device. • Refer to the “Messages” list on page 108 for other possible errors that might prevent you from completing the operation. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor will appear below the first character in the file name. 5 Change the file name as necessary. • The [1] button moves the cursor to the left, and the [2] button moves it to the right. • Use the dial to select a character for the current cursor location. • The [8] button deletes the character at the cursor location. play prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the save operation at this point by pressing the [-/NO] button. 7 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button, and the save operation will begin. The Registration data will be stored to the USER FILE folder in the USB flash memory device. CAUTION • Once the save-in-progress message appears in the display, the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory device during this operation. 8 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • If an existing filename is specified the display prompts you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+/YES] if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-/NO] to cancel. • The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation depends on the particular USB flash memory device you are using. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 85 Using USB Flash Memory Saving a User Song or User Style This operation saves user Songs (Song numbers 001–005) or user Styles to USB flash memory. Songs are saved in SMF Format 0. ● What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)? ● To Overwrite an Existing File The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing sequence data. There are two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. If you want to overwrite a file that already exists on the USB flash memory device, use the dial or the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons to select the file, then skip ahead to step 8. 1 Make sure that a properly formatted USB flash memory device has been properly connected to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the “CONNECT” message is shown in the MAIN display. 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor will appear below the first character in the file name. 7 Change the file name as necessary. Refer to “Saving the Registration Data” on page 85 for filename entry. 2 Press the [FILE MENU] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [<] and [>] buttons to locate the User Song or User Style Save item. The SOURCE FILE—a user Song name or a user Style name—will be highlighted. Cursor The name of the file to be saved 8 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis- play prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the save operation at this point by pressing the [-/NO] button. 9 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or The source user Song name. 4 Use the dial to select the source user Song or Style. You can press the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simultaneously to select the first user Song or Style. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The destination Song or Style will be highlighted, and a default name will appear for the converted Song or Style file. the [+/YES] button, and the save operation will begin. The user Song will be stored to the USER FILE folder in the USB flash memory device. CAUTION • Once the save-in-progress message appears in the display, the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 10 A message appears in the display indicating that the operation is complete. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • If an existing filename is specified, the display prompts you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+/YES] if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-/NO] to cancel. • The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation depends on the particular USB flash memory device you are using. 86 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Using USB Flash Memory Loading Registration Files, Style Files, Song Files or MDB Files Registration files, Style files, Song files and MDB files residing on a USB flash memory can be loaded to the instrument. You can also play the Song or Style file directly without loading (see page 89). CAUTION • If the same file name already exists in the instrument’s internal memory, it will be overwritten. 1 With the USB flash memory device containing the file you want to load connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector, check that the “CONNECT” message is shown in the MAIN display. 2 Press the [FILE MENU] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [<] and [>] buttons to locate the Load item. 4 Use the dial to select the Registration, Style, Song or MDB file you want to load. All user files in the USB flash memory device will be displayed first, followed by the Registration files. NOTE • The instrument will not recognize the style file if it is moved out of the USER FILES folder. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis- play prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the load operation at this point by pressing the [-/NO] button. 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button, and the load operation will begin. CAUTION • Once the load-in-progress message appears in the display, the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 7 A message appears in the display indi- cating that the operation is complete. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 87 Using USB Flash Memory Deleting Data from USB Flash Memory This procedure deletes selected Registration files, Song files and Style files from a USB flash memory device. 1 Make sure that the USB flash memory device containing the file(s) you want to delete has been properly connected to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the “CONNECT” is shown in the MAIN display. 2 Press the [FILE MENU] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [<] and [>] buttons to locate the USB Delete item. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The display prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the delete operation at this point by pressing the [-/NO] button. 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+/YES] button, and the delete operation will begin. CAUTION • Once the delete-in-progress message appears in the display, the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 7 A message appears in the display indi- cating that the operation is complete. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate message will appear in the display and you will not be able to execute the operation. ● User Delete This procedure deletes the selected User Songs in the instrument’s internal memory. 4 Select the file you want to delete. You can press the [+/YES] and [-/NO] buttons simultaneously to select the first Song or user file on the USB flash memory. 88 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 1 Press the [FILE MENU] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ < ] and [ > ] buttons to locate the User Delete item. 3 Follow the procedure described above from step 4. Using USB Flash Memory Playing Songs or Styles Saved to USB Flash Memory 1 Make sure that the USB flash memory device containing the Song or Style you want to play has been properly connected to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the “CONNECT” is shown in the MAIN display. 2 To play a Song file, press the [SONG MODE] button so that it lights. To play a Style file, press the [SONG MODE] button so that it is unlit. 3 Press the [USB] button. 4 Use the dial to select a Song or a Style you want to play. Songs can be saved in a hierarchy when saved to USB flash memory using a computer (refer to page 91). You can move the directory in the USB memory by pressing the CATEGORY [ < ]/[ > ] button. 5 Press the [>/■] button. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 89 e erenc ef R Connections Connectors q w q USB TO HOST terminal This terminal allows direct connection to a personal computer. Refer to “Connecting a Personal Computer” on page 92 for more information. w USB TO DEVICE terminal This terminal allows connection to USB storage devices. Refer to “Connection to a USB Storage Device” below. Connection to a USB Storage Device By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you can save data you’ve created, as well as read or play the data from the connected device. ■Compatible USB storage devices ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ■Connection to a USB storage device ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● A USB storage device, such as a floppy disk drive and flash memory can be connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. Before purchasing USB storage devices, please consult your Yamaha dealer, or an authorized Yamaha distributor (see list at end of the Owner’s Manual) for advice. CAUTION • Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the cable too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as in the Save and Delete operations), do NOT unplug the USB cable, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. 90 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual CAUTION • Some USB memory devices may require more current than the instrument can supply, causing the instrument’s over-current protection function to be activated and making it impossible to use the device. If this occurs “OverCurrent” will appear in the lowerright area of the MAIN display. To restore normal operation remove the USB device from the USB TO DEVICE connector and turn the instrument’s power off and then back on again. Connections Backing up the instrument data to a computer Once you’ve saved data to a USB flash memory device, you can copy the data to the hard disk of your computer, then archive and organize the files as desired. Simply reconnect the device as shown below. Saves internal data to a USB flash memory. USB TO DEVICE terminal Instrument Copying files from a computer hard disk to USB flash memory and then playing back the Songs on the instrument Files on a computer’s hard disk can be transferred to the instrument by first copying them to a USB flash memory device, then connecting/inserting the media to the instrument. User files, Style files and MIDI Songs can be copied to a USB flash memory device from the hard disk of the computer. Once you’ve copied the data, connect the device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal of the instrument and play back the MIDI Songs, or load the user file or Style file on the instrument. Copying files from the computer’s hard disk to the USB storage device USB flash memory USB terminal Disconnect the USB flash memory device from the computer and connect it to the instrument. Computer Backing up data to a computer and organizing files/folders USB flash memory USB terminal Computer Disconnect the USB storage device from the computer and connect it to the instrument. Reading files on the USB storage device from the instrument USB flash memory USB TO DEVICE terminal Instrument USB flash memory IMPORTANT • In order to play Songs or Styles copied to a USB flash memory from a computer or other device, the files must be stored either in the USB flash memory’s root directory or a first, second, or third level folder. Songs stored here can be selected and played as USB Song (page 28). Songs stored in fourth-level-folders created inside a third-level folder cannot be selected and played by this instrument. USB flash memory (Root) Song File Song Folder Song File Song Folder root Song File Song Folder The directory can be moved using the CATEGORY [ < ]/[ > ] buttons. Can be selected/ played. Song File Song Folder Cannot be selected/ played. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 91 Connections Connecting a Personal Computer The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer. ● Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 94). ● Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 96). The connection procedure is as follows: 1 Install the USB-MIDI driver on your computer. The USB-MIDI driver is included on the CDROM. Installation of the USB MIDI driver is described on pages 101–102. 2 Connect the USB terminal of the com- puter to the USB terminal on the instrument using a standard USB cable (USB cable sold separately). The supplied CD-ROM includes instructions on how to download the Musicsoft Downloader application from the Internet. This application lets you transfer Song files from your computer to the instrument’s flash memory. For instructions about how to install Musicsoft Downloader and how to transfer Song files, see pages 103, 96. USB TO HOST terminal Computer Instrument USB cable 92 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual ■ Precautions when using the [USB TO HOST] terminal When connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again. CAUTION • Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters. • Before connecting the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby). • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the [USB TO HOST] terminal. • Quit any open application software on the computer. • Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a Song.) • While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. Connections ■ Precautions when using the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal This instrument features a built-in [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below. NOTE • For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device. ● Compatible USB devices • USB storage devices (flash memory, floppy disk drive, hard disk drive, etc.) The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please visit the following web page: http://music.yamaha.com/download/ NOTE • Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. ● Connecting USB device • When connecting a USB device to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction. • Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1.1. ● Using USB Storage Devices By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. NOTE • Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data. The number of USB storage device to be used Up to one USB storage device can be connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. Formatting USB storage media When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation (page 84). CAUTION • The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data. To protect your data (write-protect) To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to disable write-protect. Connecting/removing USB storage device Before removing the media from the device, make sure that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save, Copy and Delete operations). CAUTION • Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Copy, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection), do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 93 Connections Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the computer, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument. ● When the instrument is connected with computer, it transmits/receives performance data. USB terminal USB terminal Computer Instrument USB cable ■MIDI settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception. Item Range/Settings Description Local ON/OFF Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when local control is off. External Clock ON/OFF These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to a clock signal from an external device (ON). Keyboard Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Song data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback. CAUTION • If Local is set to OFF, the instrument will not produce any sound when the keyboard is played. 2 Use the CATEGORY [<] and [>] buttons to select the item you want to change its value. CAUTION • If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from an external device, the Song, Style, and Metronome functions will not start. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to select ON or OFF. 94 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Connections ■PC Mode ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● A number of MIDI settings need to be made when you want to transfer performance data between the computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item can conveniently make multiple settings for you in one operation. Three settings are available: PC1, PC2, and OFF. This setting is not necessary when transferring Song or backup data between the computer and the instrument. 1 Press and hold the [DEMO] button for longer than a second so that the PC Mode item appears. Hold for longer than a second * Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Notebook. PC1 PC2* OFF Local OFF OFF ON External Clock ON OFF OFF Song Out OFF OFF OFF Style Out OFF OFF OFF Keyboard Out OFF ON ON 2 Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF. NOTE • When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s Style, song, demo, song recording, and lesson features cannot be used. NOTE • You can also access the PC Mode item by first pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ < ] and [ > ] buttons to locate it (page 80). Initial Send This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to first send and record the panel setup data before the actual performance data. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. 2 Use the CATEGORY [<] and [>] buttons to select the Initial Setup item. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 95 Connections Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument MIDI Songs and Style files stored to a computer can be transferred to the instrument. Backup data can also be transferred from the instrument to the computer and back. In order to transfer Songs between your computer and the instrument you will need to install the USB MIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM on your computer, and then install the Musicsoft Downloader from the Internet. Refer to Installation Guide on page 99 for details. ● Data that can be transferred from a computer • Data capacity (max): 1,895 KB • The number of files that can be shown on the display is as follows: 100 Songs 50 Styles 50 MDBs • Data Format: SMF format 0, SMF format 1, Style file (extension: .sty), Backup data NOTE • Even if the number of Songs transferred is less than 100, if the amount of data exceeds 1,895 KB, the Song data cannot be transferred to the instrument. ■With the Musicsoft Downloader You Can ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●Transfer MIDI Songs and Style files you have downloaded from the Internet or created on your computer from the computer to the instrument’s flash memory. ⇒ Refer to the procedure described below. ■Use Musicsoft Downloader to Transfer Songs from the Computer to the Instrument’s Flash Memory ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● NOTE • If a Song or Style is being played, stop playback before proceeding. 1 Install the Musicsoft Downloader and USB MIDI driver to your computer, then connect the computer and the instrument (pages 103, 101). 2 After selecting the language, double- click the Musicsoft Downloader shortcut icon that is created on the desktop. This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and the main window will appear. NOTE • The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader is running. 3 Click the “Add File” button and the Add File window will appear. 4 Click the button to the right of “Look in” and select the folder from the dropdown menu that appears. Double-click the “SongData” Folder on the window. Select the file you want to transfer to the instrument, and click “Open”. q Click a Song file ●Backup data can be transferred from the instrument to a computer and back. ⇒ Refer to the procedure described on page 98. Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher. w Click “Open” 96 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Connections 5 A copy of the selected MIDI Song file will appear in the “List of files stored temporarily” at the top of the window. The memory medium will also be displayed at the bottom of the window to specify the destination for the transfer. Click “Instrument,” and then “Flash memory.” “Flash memory” here refers to the internal memory of the instrument. 7 Close the window to close the Musicsoft Downloader. NOTE • Before playing back the Song transferred from your computer, make sure to close the Musicsoft Downloader program. 8 To playback a Song stored in the mem- ory of the instrument, press the [USER] button. Use the dial to select the Song you want to play, then press the [>/■] button to start playback. CAUTION • Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the memory media may become unstable and its contents may disappear. CAUTION • Stored data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a copy of all important data stored on your computer. q Click “Electronic Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash Memory” 6 After selecting the file in the “List of files stored temporarily,” click the downward [Move] button and a confirmation message will appear. Click [OK] and the Song will be transferred from the “List of files stored temporarily” to the instrument’s memory. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 97 Connections ■Transferring Backup data from the Instrument to a Computer ● ● You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer Backup data (page 39) to a computer. If you click “Electronic Musical Instruments” in the Musicsoft Downloader display, and then “System Drive,” a file named “PSR-S550.BUP” will appear in the lower right corner of the Musicsoft Downloader display. This is the backup data. For details about how to transfer backup data using the Musicsoft Downloader application, refer to the Online help in the application. NOTE • Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument. CAUTION • The backup data, including the five User Songs’ is transmitted/ received as a single file. As a result, all backup data will be overwritten every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when transferring data. CAUTION • Do not rename the backup data on the computer. If you do so it will not be recognized when transferred to the instrument. 98 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual ● Using Songs with Notation In order to use Songs with notation (SMF format 0 only) transferred from a computer for lessons and practice, you’ll need to specify which channels are to be played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts. 1 Press the [USER] button and select the Song residing in internal memory for which you want to set the guide track. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ < ] and [ > ] buttons to select the R-Part or L-Part item. 4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to play back as the specified right- or left-hand part. We recommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part. e erenc ef R Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide SPECIAL NOTICES • The software and this Installation Guide are exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation. • Use of the software and this guide is governed by the SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT which the purchaser fully agrees to upon breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the AGREEMENT at the end of this guide before installing the application.) • Copying of the software or reproduction of this guide in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden without the written consent of the manufacturer. • Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this guide and the software. • Copying of the commercially available music data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • Software such as the USB-MIDI driver may be revised and updated without prior notice. Make sure to check and download the latest version of the software from the following site. http://music.yamaha.com/download • Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be announced separately. Important Notices about the CD-ROM ● Data Types This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 101 for software installation instructions. CAUTION • This CD-ROM is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD player, DVD player, etc.). Never attempt to use the disk on equipment other than a computer. ● Operating System (OS) The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems. ■ CD-ROM Installation Procedure ● ● Before breaking the seal of the software packaging, please read carefully the Software License Agreement at the end of this guide. 1 Check the system requirements to make sure that the software will run on your computer (page 100). 2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The Start window should appear automatically. (Users of Windows Vista will need to click [Start.exe] to open the Start window after inserting the CD-ROM.) 3 Connect the instrument to the computer (page 92). 4 Install the USB-MIDI driver to the computer (pages 101–102). 5 Install the software (page 103). 6 Start up the software. For subsequent operations, refer to the owner’s manual for each software program (online help/PDF manual). If you have any problems in driver installation, refer to the “Troubleshooting” on page 104. NOTE • To view PDF files, you must install Adobe Reader on your computer. If you do not have Adobe Reader, you can download the application from the Adobe website at the following URL: http://www.adobe.com PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 99 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide Contents of the CD-ROM The start window as shown below will appear automatically when you insert the included CD-ROM. (Users of Windows Vista will need to click [Start.exe] to open the Start window after inserting the CD-ROM.) By clicking each menu on the Start window, you can access the User Registration page on the Internet and download some of the wide variety of application software available. e q Application / Data Name USB-MIDI Driver (Windows 2000/XP) USB-MIDI Driver (Windows Vista/XP x64) q w e w Folder Name USBdrv2k_ USBdrvVista_ Digital Music Notebook DMN_ Digital Music Notebook Flash Demo DMN_FlashDemo Musicsoft Downloader (Available at Yamaha website.) Contents This software is necessary when using your instrument with a computer via a USB connection. It enables MIDI communication and control between the instrument and the computer. Digital Music Notebook is a combination music learning program and online service that makes it easy and fun to practice and master your favorite Songs. You can use the convenient and powerful Digital Music Notebook functions with the demo song after installing Digital Music Notebook. Full-motion demo software which introduces all features of the Digital Music Notebook, from within the program. Utilizing a connection between the instrument and a computer, this application allows you to directly download Song data to the instrument. Microsoft Downloader can be downloaded from the Internet. * All the applications listed above are supplied with online/PDF manuals. ■Minimum System Requirements● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Application/Data OS USB Driver for Windows 2000/XP Windows 2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional USB Driver for Windows Vista/XP x64 Windows Vista/XP Professional x64 Edition Digital Music Notebook Windows XP Home/ Professional Edition, Service Pack 1a (SP1a) more/ Windows Vista * Only 32-bit is supported. Digital Music Notebook (Requirements for playing content with video included.) Windows 2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional/ Vista * Only 32-bit is supported. CPU 166 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® Processor family 800 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® Processor family or Intel® 64 compatible processor 400 MHz or higher processor clock speed (Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® Processor family, or compatible processor recommended) 1 GHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® Processor family (1.4 GHz or more is recommended) Memory 32 MB or more (64 MB or more is recommended) 512 MB or more 128 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended) Hard Disk Display at least 3 MB of free space - at least 3 MB of free space - at least 150 MB of free space 1024 x 768 HighColor (16-bit) 256 MB or more NOTE • For the System Requirements of the other software available in the CD-ROM, see the respective download page on the web. The download page can be displayed by clicking the software menu on the Start window and the “download” button in the next page. 100 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide Software Installation ■ USB-MIDI Driver ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 6 To operate the instrument from your computer via USB, you’ll need to install the appropriate driver software. The USB-MIDI driver is software that transfers MIDI data back and forth between sequence software and the instrument via a USB cable. Computer PSR-S550 Sequence software USB Cable Driver • For Windows XP: See below. • For Windows 2000: See page 102. • For Windows Vista: See page 102. 7 NOTE • See the Yamaha Download page at the following URL for up-to-date news on USB-MIDI driver: http://music.yamaha.com/download/ NOTE • If during the installation the system displays “...has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP,” click [Continue Anyway]. 8 Check the drive name of the CD-ROM drive you will be using (D:, E:, Q:, etc.) The drive name is displayed beside the CD-ROM icon in your “My Computer” folder. The root directory of the CD-ROM drive will be D:\ , E:\ , or Q:\ , respectively. Installing the driver on Windows XP 1 2 3 4 5 Start the computer and use the “Administrator” account to log on to Windows XP. Select [Start] ➔ [Control Panel]. If the control panel appears as “Pick a category”, click “Switch to Classic View” in the upper left of the window. All control panels and icons will be displayed. Go to [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver Signing Options] and check the radio button to the left of “Ignore” and click [OK]. Click the [OK] button to close System Properties, and then click “X” in the upper right of the window to close the Control Panel. Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The Start window will appear automatically. First, make sure the POWER switch on the instrument is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the USB connector of the computer to the USB TO HOST connector of the instrument. When the instrument is turned on, the computer automatically displays the “Found New Hardware Wizard.” If the Wizard window is not displayed automatically, refer to “Troubleshooting.” If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in the lower right corner, wait until “Found New Hardware Wizard” is displayed. (The Wizard window may take a while to display on some computers.) If the Wizard window prompts you to specify whether or not to connect to Windows Update, select the radio button for “No, not this time,” then click [Next]. Check the radio button to the left of “Install the software automatically (Recommended).” Click [Next]. The system starts the installation. 9 When the installation is complete, the system displays “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard.” Click [Finish]. (The Wizard window may take a while to display on some computers.) Restart the computer. If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in the lower right corner, wait until “System Settings Change” is displayed. (The Wizard window may take a while to display on some computers.) NOTE • This Wizard window will not appear when using Windows XP Professional x64 Edition. There is no need to restart the computer. 10 When using Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, the Support Module must be installed. After installing the USB-MIDI drivers for all the connected USB devices, select “My Computer” from the Start menu. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Select “USBdrvVista_” → “XPx64SupportModule” → “Setup.exe” and launch “Setup.exe.” Follow the onscreen directions. NOTE • Once the Support Module is installed, this step is not necessary, even if you’ve connected a new USB device or updated the USBMIDI driver. The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 101 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide Installing the driver on Windows 2000 Installing the driver on Windows Vista 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 Start the computer and use the “Administrator” account to log on to Windows 2000. Select [My Computer] ➔ [Control Panel] ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver Signing] ➔ [File Signature Verification], and check the radio button to the left of “Ignore-Install all files, regardless of file signature” and click [OK]. Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The Start window will appear automatically. First, make sure the POWER switch on the instrument is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the USB connector of the computer to the USB TO HOST connector of the instrument. When the instrument is turned on, the computer automatically displays the “Found New Hardware Wizard.” Click [Next]. (The Wizard window may take a while to display on some computers.) If the Wizard window is not displayed automatically, refer to “Troubleshooting” (page 104). Check the radio button to the left of “Search for a suitable driver for my device (Recommended).” Click [Next]. Check the “CD-ROM drives” box and uncheck all other items. Click [Next]. 2 3 4 NOTE • If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue]. 5 6 NOTE • The system may ask you to insert a Windows CD-ROM while it checks for the driver. Specify the “USBdrv2k_” folder of the CD-ROM drive (such as D:\USBdrv2k_\) and continue the installation. 7 Click [Next]. NOTE • If the Wizard panel informs you that “The software you are about to install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature,” click [Yes]. 8 9 When the installation is complete, the system displays “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard.” Click [Finish]. (The Wizard window may take a while to display on some computers.) Restart the computer. The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete. 102 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Start the computer and use the “Administrator” account to log on to Windows Vista. Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The AutoPlay window will appear. Click [Run Start.exe]. The Start window will appear automatically. First, make sure the POWER switch on the instrument is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the USB connector of the computer to the USB TO HOST connector of the instrument. When the instrument is turned on, the computer automatically displays the “Found New Hardware” window. Click “Locate and install driver software (recommended)”. If the window is not displayed automatically, refer page 104 for “Troubleshooting.” (Some computers may take a while to display the window.) If a message allowing Windows to search online for driver software appears, click “Don’t search online.” If a message prompting you to insert the disk that came with your device appears, click [Next]. The system starts the installation. NOTE • If the “Windows Security” window appears, confirm this software is authored by Yamaha Corporation then click [Install]. 7 When the installation is complete, the system displays the message “The software for this device has been successfully installed.” Click [Close]. (Some computers may take a while to display the window.) The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete. Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide ■Digital Music Notebook ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ■Musicsoft Downloader IMPORTANT • When installing Digital Music Notebook to Windows XP, or Vista, make sure to log on to the Administrator account. IMPORTANT • When installing Musicsoft Downloader to Windows XP, 2000 or Vista, make sure to log on to the Administrator account. • When installing the Digital Music Notebook, make sure that Internet Explorer 6.0 (with SP1) or higher is installed to your computer. • To install Musicsoft Downloader, your computer must be connected to the Internet and be online. • For the instrument including this Accessory CD-ROM, you can use only the Musicsoft Downloader as a file transfer application software. Other applications such as File Utility and Song Filer cannot be used. • Credit card settlement is required to purchase Digital Music Notebook content. Credit card processing may not be possible for some areas, so please check with your local authorities to make sure that your credit card can be used. NOTE • Use of the DMN (Digital Music Notebook) is governed by the SIBELIUS SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT, which the purchaser fully agrees to when using the application. Please read carefully the AGREEMENT on page 106 in English, before using the application. 1 2 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer. The Start window appears on the screen. Each menu on the window indicates the application or data contained in the Accessory CD-ROM. Click “DIGITAL MUSIC NOTEBOOK” on the Start window. Click the “Install” button, and follow the onscreen instructions to install the software. For Digital Music Notebook operating instructions see the help menu: launch the Digital Music Notebook application and click “Help”. 1 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer. The Start window appears on the screen. Each menu on the window indicates the application or data contained in the Accessory CD-ROM. 2 Click “Musicsoft Downloader” on the Start window. The page which explains the details about Musicsoft Downloader is displayed on the window. 3 Click “Musicsoft Downloader Download” button at the bottom of the window. The Download page on the web is displayed. Verify that your system meets the requirements before installing the software. ● Uninstall (Removing the installed application) To remove any installed application software: Select [START] → [Settings] → [Control Panel] → [Add/Remove Programs] → [Install/Uninstall], then select the application to be removed and click [Add/Remove...]. Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the application. NOTE • The button names or menus may differ depending on the computer OS. • For instructions on uninstalling the USB-MIDI driver, refer to “How can I remove the driver?” in the “Troubleshooting” section (page 104). PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 103 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide ■Troubleshooting ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The driver cannot be installed. ● Playback response is delayed. • Is the USB cable connected correctly? Check the USB cable connection. Disconnect the USB cable, then connect it again. • Is the USB function enabled on your computer? When you connect the instrument to the computer for the first time, if the “Add New Hardware Wizard” does not appear, the USB function on the computer may be disabled. Perform the following steps. • Does your computer satisfy the system requirements? • Is any other application or device driver running? 1 Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows XP/2000), or select [Control Panel] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows Vista). * Classic View only in Windows XP. 2 Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear at “Universal serial bus controller” or “USB Root Hub.” If you see an “!” or “x” mark, the USB controller is disabled. ● How can I remove the driver? Start the computer and use the “Administrator” account to log on to Windows. Close all applications and windows that are open. 2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. 3 Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows XP/2000), or select [Control Panel] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows Vista). Select [Start] ➔ [My Computer] (for Windows XP), or select [My Computer] (for Windows 2000), or select [Start] ➔ [Computer] (for Windows Vista). 4 Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select “Open” from the pop-up menu. * Classic View only in Windows XP. 5 Select “USBdrvVista_” or “USBdrv2k_” folder ➔ “uninstall” folder ➔ “uninstall.exe” file and launch the “uninstall.exe.” file. Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the driver. 2 Look for “Other devices” in the menu “View devices by type.” 3 If you find “Other devices,” double-click it to extend the tree to look for “Unknown device.” If one appears, select it and click the [Remove] button. 4 Remove the USB cable from the instrument, and make the connection again. 5 Install the driver again. (See pages 101–102.) ● When controlling the instrument from your computer via USB, the instrument does not operate correctly or no sound is heard. • Did you install the driver (pages 101–102)? • Is the USB cable connected correctly? • Are the volume settings of the instrument, playback device, and application program set to the appropriate levels? • Have you selected an appropriate port in the sequence software? • Are you using the latest USB-MIDI driver? The latest driver can be downloaded from the web site (page 101). 104 • Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI application is running. • You may not be able to suspend/resume normally, depending on the particular environment (USB Host Controller, etc.). Even so, simply disconnecting and connecting the USB cable will allow you to use the instrument functions again. 1 • Is any unknown device registered? If driver installation fails, the instrument will be marked as an “Unknown device,” and you will not be able to install the driver. Delete the “Unknown device” by following the steps below. 1 ● Cannot suspend or resume the computer correctly. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual NOTE • When using a 64-bit OS, click “uninstall_x64.exe.” from the “USBdrvVista_” folder. • If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue]. ATTENTION SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT IS BETWEEN YOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”). BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE USE THIS SOFTWARE. 1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s) and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFTWARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data. The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is protected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFTWARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant copyrights. • • • You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer. You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce Yamaha’s copyright notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy of the SOFTWARE. You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFTWARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads and agrees to the terms of this Agreement. 2. RESTRICTIONS • • • • • You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method whatsoever. You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFTWARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE. You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers. You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that violates public policy. You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without permission by Yamaha Corporation. Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained by means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which you must observe. • • • Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any commercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner. Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, transferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public without permission of the copyright owner. The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be removed nor may the electronic watermark be modified without permission of the copyright owner. 3. TERMINATION This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFTWARE and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provisions of this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate automatically and immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such termination, you must immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accompanying written documents and all copies thereof. 5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS” and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SPECIFICALLY, BUT WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YAMAHA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. 6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PERMIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action (whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFTWARE. 7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data accompanying the Software, Yamaha identifies any software and data as THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must abide by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is responsible for any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE or your use thereof. • • • Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including, without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages, expenses, lost profits, lost data or other damages arising out of the use, misuse or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. 8. GENERAL 4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media if it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media damaged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese law without reference to principles of conflict of laws. Any dispute or procedure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any portion of this Agreement to be unenforceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect. 9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a fully authorized representative of Yamaha. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 105 SIBELIUS SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT By installing and/or using this Product you (an individual or legal entity) agree with the Licensor to be bound by the terms of this License which will govern your use of the Product. If you do not accept these terms, do not install or use this Product. The Product is copyright © 1987-2007 Sibelius Software, a division of Avid Technology, Inc, and its licensors. 1. Definitions 4. Disclaimer of Liability In this License the following words and expressions have the following meanings: “License”: this agreement between you and the Licensor and, if permitted by the context, the conditional license granted to you in this agreement. “Licensor”: Avid Technology, Inc., of Avid Technology Park, One Park West, Tewksbury, MA 01876 USA, through its division Sibelius Software, of 20-23 City North, Fonthill Road, London N4 3HF, UK “Product”: the Software and the Documentation. “Software”: the Sibelius Scorch web browser plug-in, Opus, Helsinki, Inkpen2 and Reprise font families, any other programs or files supplied by the Licensor which are included in or with the Sibelius Scorch installer, and the Sibelius Scorch installer. “Documentation”: any documentation in any form relating to the Software supplied to you with the Software or by the Licensor. 4.1 In consideration of the fact that the Product is licensed hereunder free of charge, (a) the Licensor disclaims any and all warranties with respect to the Product, whether expressed or implied, including without limitation any warranties that the Product is free from defects, will perform in accordance with the Documentation, is merchantable, or is fit for any particular purpose, and (b) the Licensor shall not have or incur any liability to you for any loss, cost, expense or claim (including without limitation any liability for loss or corruption of data and loss of profits, revenue or goodwill and any type of special, indirect or consequential loss) that may arise out of or in connection with your installation and use of the Product. 2. License 2.1 The Licensor grants to you a non-exclusive non-transferable license to use this Software in accordance with the Documentation on any number of computers. Title to the Product is not transferred to you. Ownership of the Product remains vested in the Licensor and its licensors, subject to the rights granted to you under this License. All other rights are reserved. 2.2 You may make one printout for your own use of any part of the Documentation provided in electronic form. You shall not make or permit any third party to make any further copies of any part of the Product whether in eye or machine-readable form. 2.3 You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to, (1) translate, enhance, modify, alter or adapt the Product or any part of it for any purpose (including without limitation for the purpose of error correction); (2) create derivative works based on the Product, or cause the whole or any part of the Product to be combined with or incorporated into any other program, file or product, for any purpose; or (3) use the Software to create files in any format (other than temporary files created and required by your computer’s operating system or web browser), including without limitation screen capture files, files generated from the Software’s playback, graphics files and print files, for any purpose, except for creating MIDI files (if permitted by the Software) for private non-commercial use. 2.4 You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to, decompile, decode, disassemble or reverse engineer the Software in whole or in part for any purpose. 2.5 You shall not, and shall not cause any third party to, translate, convert, decode or reverse engineer any file capable of being read by any copy or version of the Software or any data transmitted to or from any copy or version of the Software, in whole or in part for any purpose. 2.6 The Product or any part of it must not be used to infringe any right of copyright or right of privacy, publicity or personality or any other right whatsoever of any other person or entity. 3. Copyright 3.1 You acknowledge that copyright in the Product as a whole and in the components of the Product as between you and the Licensor belongs to the Licensor or its licensors and is protected by copyright laws, national and international, and all other applicable laws. 106 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 5. Termination 5.1 This License shall terminate automatically upon your destruction of the Product. In addition, the Licensor may elect to terminate this License in the event of a material breach by you of any condition of this License or of any of your representations, warranties, covenants or obligations hereunder. Upon notification of such termination by the Licensor, you will immediately delete the Software from your computer and destroy the Documentation. 6. Miscellaneous 6.1 No failure to exercise and no delay in exercising on the part of the Licensor of any right, power or privilege arising hereunder shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any single or partial exercise of any right, power or privilege preclude any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right, power or privilege. The rights and remedies of the Licensor in connection herewith are not exclusive of any rights or remedies provided by law. 6.2 You may not distribute, loan, lease, sub-license, rent or otherwise transfer the Product to any third party. 6.3 You agree to the use of your personal data in accordance with the Licensor’s privacy policy (available from the Licensor or on www.sibelius.com), which may change from time to time. 6.4 This License is intended by the parties hereto to be a final expression of their agreement with respect to the subject matter hereof and a complete and exclusive statement of the terms of such agreement. This License supercedes any and all prior understandings, whether written or oral, between you and the Licensor relating to the subject matter hereof. 6.5 (This section only applies if you are resident in the European Union:) This License shall be construed and governed by the laws of England, and both parties agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts. 6.6 (This section only applies if you are not resident in the European Union:) This License shall be construed and enforced in accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of California. Any suit, action or proceeding arising out of or in any way related or connected to this License shall be brought and maintained only in the United States District Court for the Northern District of California, sitting in the City of San Francisco. Each party irrevocably submits to the jurisdiction of such federal court over any such suit, action or proceeding. Each party knowingly, voluntarily and irrevocably waives trial by jury in any suit, action or proceeding (including any counterclaim), whether at law or in equity, arising out of or in any way related or connected to this License or the subject matter hereof. (License v5.0 (DMN), 30 July 2007) Appendix Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a song or style is being played back. The style or song does not play back when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 94.) Is the FILE CONTROL display showing? The instrument’s keyboard, etc., will not produce any sound while the FILE CONTROL display is showing. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to “External Clock” on page 94. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 81) is set to an appropriate level. The style does not sound properly. Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the chords you are playing? Set the split point at an appropriate key (page 59). Is the [ACMP] button lit? If it is not lit, press the [ACMP] button so it lights. No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/STOP] button is pressed after selecting the BaroqueAir Style in the MOVIE & SHOW category. This is not a malfunction. Style BaroqueAir Style does not have a Rhythm part, so there is no rhythm sound for this Style. Also, this Style does not have a Fill-In section. The other parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or song. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. The Demo display is shown in Japanese, and/or there are Japanese characters in the display messages. Make sure the Language setting in the FUNCTION display is set to English. (See page 12) The ACMP indicator does not appear when the [ACMP] button is pressed. Always press desired style category button first when you are going to use any style-related function. There is no harmony sound. The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their type. Types 01–05 function when style playback is on, chords are played in the accompaniment range of the keyboard, and a melody is played in the right-hand range. Types 06–26 will function whether style playback is on or off. For types 06–12 you need to play two notes at the same time. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 107 Messages LCD Message Comment Access error! Indicates the failure in reading or writing from/to the media, USB flash memory or the internal flash memory. All Memory Clearing... Displayed while erasing all data in the flash memory. Never turn the power off during data transmission. Are you sure? Confirms whether Song Clear or Track Clear is executed or not. Backup Clearing... Displayed while clearing the back-up data in the flash memory. Cancel Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send is cancelled. Can’t clear TrackA. Displayed when a track clear error occurs. Clearing... Displayed while executing Song Clear or Track Clear of the user songs. Com Mode Displayed when the Musicsoft Downloader is started on the PC connected to the keyboard. This will not be displayed while the instrument is played back. Completed Indicates the specified job completion such as data saving and transmission. Create Directory Displayed while creating a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader application. Data Error! Displayed when the user song contains illegal data. Delete File Displayed while deleting a file in the Musicsoft Downloader. Delete OK ? Confirms whether the Delete job is executed or not. Delete Directory Displayed while deleting a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader. Deleting... Displayed while the delete function is engaged. End Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send has been completed. Exit. Displayed when the record standby mode is exited because an inappropriate style has been selected during style record standby. “File information area is not large enough.” Indicates that saving data in the media cannot be executed since the total number of files have become too many. File is not found. Indicates there is no file. “File too large. Loading is impossible.” Indicates that loading data cannot be executed since the file data is too large. Flash Clearing... Displayed while clearing the song or style data transmitted to the internal flash memory. Format OK ? [EXECUTE] Confirms whether formatting the media is executed or not. Formatting... Displayed while formatting. Load OK ? Confirms whether loading is executed or not. Loading... Displayed while loading data. Media is not inserted. Displayed when accessing the media while it is not inserted. Media capacity is full. Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the media memory becomes full. Memory Full Displayed when the internal memory becomes full during recording. “MIDI receive buffer overflow.” Displayed when too much MIDI data was received at one time and failed to proceed. Move File Displayed while moving a file in the Musicsoft Downloader. “Now Writing... (Don’t turn off the power now, otherwise the data may be damaged.)” Displayed while writing data in the memory. Never turn the power off while writing. Doing so may result in data loss. 108 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Messages LCD Message Comment OverCurrent Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument. Overwrite ? Confirms whether overwriting is executed or not. Please Wait... Displayed when executing the jobs that take some time, such as displaying scores and lyrics, or stopping recording. Rename File Displayed while rewriting the file name in the Musicsoft Downloader. Save OK ? Confirms whether saving is executed or not. Saved data is not found. Displayed when the data to be saved doesn’t exist. Saving... Displayed while saving data in the memory. Never turn the power off while saving. Doing so may result in data loss. Send OK? Confirms whether the data transmission is executed or not. Sending... Displayed while transmitting data. “Since the media is in use now, this function is not available.” Indicates that the file control function is currently unavailable since the media is being accessed. Sure ? [YES/NO] Reconfirms whether each operation is executed or not. “The limit of the media has been reached.” Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the folder/directory structure has become too complicated. The media is not formatted. Indicates the inserted media has not been formatted. “The media is write-protected.” Indicates that the inserted media cannot be written since it is write-protected. Set to the write-protect switch to the “overwrite” position before use. “The song data is too large to be converted to notation.” Indicates that the score cannot be displayed since the song data is too large. There are too many files. Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the total number of files exceeds the capacity. “This function is not available now.” Indicates the designated function is not available since the instrument is executing another job. [nnn] “file name” Indicates the file name of the currently transmitting. “nnn” indicates the receiving block. NOTE • Not all the messages are listed in the table: the messages necessary to be explained only. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 109 Voice List ■ Maximum Polyphony ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The instrument has 64-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 64 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note priority). NOTE • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device. • Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Program Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program Numbers and Program Change Numbers differ by a value of 1. Remember to take this into consideration. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held. ● Panel Voice List Voice No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 110 Bank Select MIDI Voice Program No. MSB LSB Change# (category) (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) Piano 1 0 113 1 2 0 112 2 3 0 114 1 4 0 112 7 5 0 113 7 6 0 112 4 7 0 112 3 8 0 113 4 9 0 114 4 10 0 113 3 E.Piano 1 0 114 5 2 0 118 5 3 0 115 5 4 0 118 6 5 0 113 6 6 0 119 5 7 0 120 5 8 0 116 6 9 0 112 5 10 0 112 6 11 0 116 5 12 0 114 6 13 0 115 6 14 0 113 5 15 0 117 6 16 0 117 5 17 0 112 8 18 0 113 8 Strings 1 0 117 50 2 0 116 50 3 0 122 50 4 0 114 49 5 0 113 41 6 0 112 49 7 0 113 49 8 0 112 52 9 0 112 50 10 0 116 49 11 0 113 50 12 0 112 45 13 0 115 50 14 0 112 51 15 0 112 46 16 0 125 49 17 0 112 42 18 0 112 43 19 0 112 44 20 0 113 111 21 0 112 47 22 0 113 47 23 0 113 108 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Voice Name Live! Grand Piano Live! Bright Piano Live! WarmGrand Harpsichord GrandHarpsi HonkyTonk MidiGrand Oct.Piano1 Oct.Piano2 CP80 Cool! GalaxyEP Cool! SuitcaseEP PolarisEP JazzChorus HyperTines Cool! E.Piano PhaseEP NewTines FunkEP DX Modern VintageEP VenusEP ModernEP TremoloEP SuperDX StageEP Clavi WahClavi Live! Strings Live! Orchestra Allegro Strings Symphon.Str Sweet! Violin Strings OrchStrings AnalogStrs ChamberStrs BowStrings SlowStrings TremoloStrs MarcatoStrs SynStrings1 PizzStrings Watariyat Viola Cello Contrabass Er Hu Harp Hackbrett Kanoun Voice No. 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 Bank Select MIDI Voice Program No. MSB LSB Change# (category) (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 24 0 112 111 25 0 112 106 26 0 112 108 27 0 112 107 28 0 113 106 29 0 112 105 30 0 113 105 31 0 119 106 32 0 112 41 33 0 112 56 Guitar&Bass 1 0 116 25 2 0 117 26 3 0 115 27 4 0 114 29 5 0 114 26 6 0 118 26 7 0 117 29 8 0 125 28 9 0 113 26 10 0 115 31 11 0 116 26 12 0 117 30 13 0 112 28 14 0 115 25 15 0 115 28 16 0 116 30 17 0 126 28 18 0 117 31 19 0 117 28 20 0 119 27 21 0 115 30 22 0 113 31 23 0 115 26 24 0 118 28 25 0 123 28 26 0 115 29 27 0 114 30 28 0 124 28 29 0 120 28 30 0 113 27 31 0 114 28 32 0 113 28 33 0 114 31 34 0 122 28 35 0 112 31 36 0 119 28 37 0 113 30 38 0 112 29 39 0 113 29 40 0 116 31 41 0 112 26 42 0 112 30 43 0 114 34 Voice Name Fiddle Banjo Koto Shamisen Oud Sitar1 Sitar2 Pi Pa SoloViolin Orch.Hit Dynamic Nylon Live! SteelGuitar Cool! JazzGuitar Cool! Elec.Gtr Sweet! Mandolin Live! SlideSteel Cool! SlideClean Cool! VintageLead Live! 12StringGtr Cool! PowerLead Live! DynamicSteel Cool! BluesGuitar Cool! CleanGuitar Classic Guitar PedalSteel RockGuitar VintageStrum PowerChord 60’sClean SmoothLead VintageAmp CrunchGtr CampfireGtr SolidGuitar VintageOpen VintageMute LeadGuitar ChorusGtr VintageTrem OctaveGtr DeepChorus TremoloGtr HeavyStack WahGuitar Distortion Elec.12Str FeedbackGtr MutedGuitar FunkGuitar VodooLead FolkGuitar Overdrive Cool! ElectricBass Voice List Voice No. 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 Bank Select MIDI Voice Program No. MSB LSB Change# (category) (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 44 0 112 33 45 0 112 35 46 0 112 36 47 0 112 37 48 0 114 40 49 0 114 39 50 0 112 39 51 0 113 36 52 0 113 37 53 0 114 33 54 0 112 40 55 0 116 40 56 0 115 40 57 0 113 39 58 0 112 38 59 0 115 39 60 0 112 34 Saxophone 1 0 117 67 2 0 114 66 3 0 113 65 4 0 118 67 5 0 112 68 6 0 112 65 7 0 112 67 8 0 112 66 9 0 113 67 Flute&Woodwind 1 0 114 74 2 0 114 72 3 0 113 76 4 0 112 70 5 0 112 71 6 0 115 74 7 0 112 73 8 0 112 72 9 0 112 69 10 0 112 74 11 0 113 74 12 0 112 79 13 0 112 76 14 0 112 78 15 0 112 75 16 0 112 80 17 0 112 110 18 0 114 78 19 0 118 74 20 0 116 110 Organ 1 0 118 19 2 0 117 17 3 0 117 19 4 0 115 19 5 0 118 17 6 0 116 19 7 0 112 19 8 0 113 18 9 0 112 17 10 0 114 19 11 0 118 18 12 0 115 17 13 0 113 17 14 0 113 19 15 0 112 18 16 0 119 17 17 0 115 18 18 0 116 17 19 0 116 18 20 0 120 17 21 0 114 17 22 0 114 18 23 0 113 20 Voice Name Aco.Bass PickBass Cool! Fretless SlapBass SubBass HardBass ResoBass SuperFretless FusionBass Bass&Cymbal AnalogBass DrySynBass 80’sSynBass HiQBass FunkBass ClickBass MellowFinger Sweet! TenorSax Sweet! AltoSax Sweet! SopranoSax GrowlSax BaritoneSax SopranoSax TenorSax AltoSax WoodwindEns Sweet! Flute Sweet! Clarinet Sweet! PanFlute EnglishHorn Bassoon Sweet! Class.Flute Piccolo Clarinet Oboe Flute PanFlute Whistle EthnicFlute Shakuhachi Recorder Ocarina Bagpipe Nay Di Zi Sheng Cool! Organ Cool! JazzOrgan Cool! RotorOrgan Cool! FullRocker StadiumOrg RotaryDrive RockOrgan1 DanceOrgan JazzOrgan1 PurpleOrg Elec.Organ DrawbarOrg JazzOrgan2 RockOrgan2 ClickOrgan GospelOrg MellowDraw BrightDraw 60’sOrgan JazzOrgan3 Tibia 16+4 Tibia Full ChapelOrgn1 Voice No. 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 Bank Select MIDI Voice Program No. MSB LSB Change# (category) (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 24 0 114 20 25 0 115 20 26 0 112 20 27 0 112 21 28 0 114 21 29 0 115 21 Trumpet 1 0 115 57 2 0 117 58 3 0 116 57 4 0 112 57 5 0 113 57 6 0 116 58 7 0 115 58 8 0 112 58 9 0 114 58 10 0 112 60 11 0 113 59 12 0 114 59 13 0 112 59 14 0 113 34 Brass 1 0 117 63 2 0 118 63 3 0 116 63 4 0 112 61 5 0 115 67 6 0 112 62 7 0 125 62 8 0 121 62 9 0 113 60 10 0 120 62 11 0 116 62 12 0 113 63 13 0 123 62 14 0 114 62 15 0 118 58 16 0 115 62 17 0 113 64 18 0 122 62 19 0 119 62 20 0 113 62 21 0 118 62 22 0 112 64 23 0 113 58 24 0 117 62 25 0 114 64 26 0 115 63 27 0 114 63 28 0 112 63 Choir 1 0 112 55 2 0 113 54 3 0 118 89 4 0 121 89 5 0 112 53 6 0 112 54 Pad 1 0 113 95 2 0 115 90 3 0 113 100 4 0 112 96 5 0 112 100 6 0 112 92 7 0 112 95 8 0 112 89 9 0 112 93 10 0 113 89 11 0 114 89 12 0 112 90 13 0 113 90 14 0 115 95 Voice Name ChapelOrgn2 ChapelOrgn3 PipeOrgan ReedOrgan Harmonium1 Harmonium2 Sweet! Trumpet Sweet! Trombone JazzTrumpet SoloTrumpet FlugelHorn Trombone SoftTromb SoloTromb MellowTromb MutedTrump BaritonHorn BaritonHit Tuba AlpBass Live! PopBrass Live! HyperBrass Live! OctaveBrass Live! FrenchHorns BrassCombo BrassSection Sforzando BigBrass BallroomBrs BrightBrass MellowBrass 80’sBrass SoftBrass FullHorns SmoothTromb HighBrass OberBrass TrumpetEns MellowHorns BigBandBrs PopBrass AnalogBrs Trb.Section SmallBrass SoftAnalog FunkyAnalog TechnoBrass SynthBrass AirChoir GothicVox SweetHeaven DreamHeaven Choir VoxHumana Insomnia NeoWarmPad CyberPad Wave2001 Atmosphere XenonPad Equinox Fantasia DX Pad Symbiont Stargate Area51 DarkMoon Ionosphere PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 111 Voice List Voice No. 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 112 Bank Select MIDI Voice Program No. Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (category) (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 15 0 115 89 GoldenAge 16 0 114 95 Solaris 17 0 117 89 Millennium 18 0 114 90 Dunes Synth.&FX 1 0 122 82 Oxygen 2 0 123 82 Matrix 3 0 120 82 WireLead 4 0 113 81 HipLead 5 0 117 81 HopLead 6 0 116 82 FireWire 7 0 115 82 Analogon 8 0 114 82 Blaster 9 0 115 85 Skyline 10 0 112 81 SquareLead 11 0 112 82 Saw.Lead 12 0 118 81 TinyLead 13 0 121 82 FunkyLead 14 0 114 85 Paraglide 15 0 112 85 Portatone 16 0 113 82 BigLead 17 0 117 82 Warp 18 0 119 82 Fargo 19 0 113 85 Adrenaline 20 0 112 99 Stardust 21 0 112 84 AeroLead 22 0 114 81 MiniLead 23 0 113 88 Impact 24 0 113 99 SunBell 25 0 112 88 UnderHeim 26 0 116 81 HiBias 27 0 115 81 Vinylead 28 126 0 1 SFXKit1 29 126 0 2 SFXKit2 30 126 0 112 AnimalKit Accordion&Harmonica 1 0 112 22 Musette 2 0 117 22 Steirisch 3 0 113 22 TuttiAccrd 4 0 115 22 SmallAccrd 5 0 116 22 Accordion 6 0 112 24 BallroomAcc 7 0 113 24 Bandoneon 8 0 114 22 SoftAccrd 9 0 113 23 ModernHarp 10 0 114 23 BluesHarp Percussion 1 0 112 12 Vibraphone 2 0 113 12 JazzVibes 3 0 112 13 Marimba 4 0 112 14 Xylophone 5 0 112 115 SteelDrums 6 0 112 9 Celesta 7 0 112 10 Glocken 8 0 112 11 MusicBox 9 0 112 15 TubularBell 10 0 112 109 Kalimba 11 0 112 16 Dulcimer 12 0 112 48 Timpani Drum Kit 1 127 0 1 StandardKit1 2 127 0 2 StandardKit2 3 127 0 5 HitKit 4 127 0 33 JazzKit 5 127 0 41 BrushKit 6 127 0 9 RoomKit 7 127 0 17 RockKit 8 127 0 25 ElectroKit 9 127 0 26 AnalogKit 10 127 0 28 DanceKit 11 127 0 49 SymphonyKit PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 Bank Select MIDI Voice Program No. MSB LSB Change# (category) (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 12 126 0 41 13 126 0 44 14 126 0 36 15 126 0 37 16 126 0 65 17 126 0 115 18 126 0 125 19 127 0 128 Voice Name CubanKit PopLatinKit ArabicKit ArabicKit 2 ArabicMixKit IndianKit ChineseKit ChineseMixKit ● GM&XG Voice List Voice No. 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 Bank Select MIDI Voice Program No. MSB LSB Change# (category) (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 1 0 0 1 2 0 1 1 3 0 18 1 4 0 40 1 5 0 41 1 6 0 0 2 7 0 1 2 8 0 0 3 9 0 1 3 10 0 32 3 11 0 40 3 12 0 41 3 13 0 0 4 14 0 1 4 15 0 0 5 16 0 1 5 17 0 18 5 18 0 32 5 19 0 40 5 20 0 45 5 21 0 64 5 22 0 0 6 23 0 1 6 24 0 32 6 25 0 33 6 26 0 34 6 27 0 40 6 28 0 41 6 29 0 42 6 30 0 45 6 31 0 0 7 32 0 1 7 33 0 25 7 34 0 35 7 35 0 0 8 36 0 1 8 37 0 27 8 38 0 64 8 39 0 65 8 40 0 0 9 41 0 0 10 42 0 0 11 43 0 64 11 44 0 0 12 45 0 1 12 46 0 45 12 47 0 0 13 48 0 1 13 49 0 64 13 50 0 97 13 51 0 98 13 52 0 0 14 53 0 0 15 54 0 96 15 55 0 97 15 56 0 0 16 Voice Name GrandPiano GrndPianoKSP MellowGrPno PianoStrings Dream BrightPiano BritePnoKSP ElecGrandPno ElecGrPnoKSP DetunedCP80 LayeredCP1 LayeredCP2 Honkytonk HonkytonkKSP El.Piano1 El.Piano1KSP MellowEP1 ChorusEP1 HardEl.Piano VXfadeEl.P1 60sEl.Piano1 El.Piano2 El.Piano2KSP ChorusEP2 DXEPHard DXLegend DXPhaseEP DX+AnalogEP DXKotoEP VXfadeEl.P2 Harpsichord Harpsi.KSP Harpsichord2 Harpsichord3 Clavi. Clavi.KSP Clavi.Wah PulseClavi. PierceClavi. Celesta Glockenspiel MusicBox Orgel Vibraphone VibesKSP HardVibes Marimba MarimbaKSP SineMarimba Balimba LogDrums Xylophone TubularBells ChurchBells Carillon Dulcimer Voice List Voice No. 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 Bank Select MIDI Voice Program No. MSB LSB Change# (category) (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 57 0 35 16 58 0 96 16 59 0 97 16 60 0 0 17 61 0 32 17 62 0 33 17 63 0 34 17 64 0 35 17 65 0 36 17 66 0 37 17 67 0 38 17 68 0 40 17 69 0 64 17 70 0 65 17 71 0 66 17 72 0 67 17 73 0 0 18 74 0 24 18 75 0 32 18 76 0 33 18 77 0 37 18 78 0 0 19 79 0 64 19 80 0 65 19 81 0 66 19 82 0 0 20 83 0 32 20 84 0 35 20 85 0 40 20 86 0 64 20 87 0 65 20 88 0 0 21 89 0 40 21 90 0 0 22 91 0 32 22 92 0 0 23 93 0 32 23 94 0 0 24 95 0 64 24 96 0 0 25 97 0 16 25 98 0 25 25 99 0 43 25 100 0 96 25 101 0 0 26 102 0 16 26 103 0 35 26 104 0 40 26 105 0 41 26 106 0 96 26 107 0 0 27 108 0 18 27 109 0 32 27 110 0 0 28 111 0 32 28 112 0 0 29 113 0 40 29 114 0 41 29 115 0 43 29 116 0 45 29 117 0 0 30 118 0 43 30 119 0 0 31 120 0 40 31 121 0 41 31 122 0 0 32 123 0 65 32 124 0 66 32 125 0 0 33 126 0 40 33 127 0 45 33 Voice Name Dulcimer2 Cimbalom Santur DrawbarOrgan DetDrawOrgan 60sDrawOrg1 60sDrawOrg2 70sDrawOrg1 DrawbarOrg2 60sDrawOrg3 EvenBarOrg 16+2'2_3Org OrganBass 70sDrawOrg2 CheezyOrgan DrawbarOrg3 Perc.Organ 70sPercOrg1 DetPercOrgan LightOrgan Perc.Organ2 RockOrgan RotaryOrgan SlowRotary FastRotary ChurchOrgan ChurchOrgan3 ChurchOrgan2 NotreDame OrganFlute Trem.OrganFl ReedOrgan PuffOrgan Accordion AccordIt Harmonica Harmonica2 TangoAccord TangoAccord2 NylonGuitar NylonGuitar2 NylonGuitar3 VelGtrHarmo Ukulele SteelGuitar SteelGuitar2 12StrGuitar Nylon&Steel Steel&Body Mandolin JazzGuitar MellowGuitar JazzAmp CleanGuitar ChorusGuitar MutedGuitar FunkGuitar1 MuteSteelGtr FunkGuitar2 JazzMan Overdriven GuitarPinch Distortion FeedbackGtr FeedbackGtr2 GtrHarmonics GtrFeedback GtrHarmonic2 AcousticBass JazzRhythm VXUprghtBass Voice No. 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 Bank Select MIDI Voice Program No. MSB LSB Change# (category) (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 128 0 0 34 129 0 18 34 130 0 27 34 131 0 40 34 132 0 43 34 133 0 45 34 134 0 65 34 135 0 0 35 136 0 28 35 137 0 0 36 138 0 32 36 139 0 33 36 140 0 34 36 141 0 96 36 142 0 97 36 143 0 0 37 144 0 27 37 145 0 32 37 146 0 0 38 147 0 43 38 148 0 0 39 149 0 18 39 150 0 20 39 151 0 24 39 152 0 35 39 153 0 40 39 154 0 64 39 155 0 65 39 156 0 66 39 157 0 96 39 158 0 0 40 159 0 6 40 160 0 12 40 161 0 18 40 162 0 19 40 163 0 32 40 164 0 40 40 165 0 41 40 166 0 64 40 167 0 0 41 168 0 8 41 169 0 0 42 170 0 0 43 171 0 0 44 172 0 0 45 173 0 8 45 174 0 40 45 175 0 0 46 176 0 0 47 177 0 40 47 178 0 0 48 179 0 0 49 180 0 3 49 181 0 8 49 182 0 24 49 183 0 35 49 184 0 40 49 185 0 41 49 186 0 42 49 187 0 45 49 188 0 0 50 189 0 3 50 190 0 8 50 191 0 40 50 192 0 41 50 193 0 64 50 194 0 65 50 195 0 0 51 196 0 27 51 197 0 64 51 198 0 65 51 Voice Name FingerBass FingerDark FlangeBass Bass&DistEG FingerSlap FingerBass2 Mod.Bass PickBass MutePickBass FretlessBass Fretless2 Fretless3 Fretless4 Syn.Fretless SmthFretless SlapBass1 ResonantSlap PunchThumb SlapBass2 Velo.Sw.Slap SynthBass1 SynBass1Dark FastResoBass AcidBass ClaviBass TechnoBass Orbiter SquareBass RubberBass Hammer SynthBass2 MellowSyBass SequenceBass ClickSynBass SynBass2Dark SmoothSyBass ModulrSyBass DXBass XWireBass Violin SlwAtkViolin Viola Cello Contrabass Trem.Strings SlwAtTremStr SuspenseStr PizzicatoStr Orch.Harp YangChin Timpani Strings1 StereoStrngs SlwAtkStrngs ArcoStrings 60’sStrings Orchestra Orchestra2 TremOrchstra Velo.Strings Strings2 S.SlowStrngs LegatoStrngs WarmStrings Kingdom 70’sStrings Strings3 SynStrings1 ResoStrings SynStrings4 SynStrings5 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 113 Voice List Voice No. 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 114 Bank Select MIDI Voice Program No. MSB LSB Change# (category) (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 199 0 0 52 200 0 0 53 201 0 3 53 202 0 16 53 203 0 32 53 204 0 40 53 205 0 0 54 206 0 0 55 207 0 40 55 208 0 41 55 209 0 64 55 210 0 0 56 211 0 35 56 212 0 64 56 213 0 0 57 214 0 16 57 215 0 17 57 216 0 32 57 217 0 0 58 218 0 18 58 219 0 0 59 220 0 16 59 221 0 0 60 222 0 0 61 223 0 6 61 224 0 32 61 225 0 37 61 226 0 0 62 227 0 35 62 228 0 40 62 229 0 41 62 230 0 42 62 231 0 0 63 232 0 12 63 233 0 20 63 234 0 24 63 235 0 27 63 236 0 32 63 237 0 45 63 238 0 64 63 239 0 0 64 240 0 18 64 241 0 40 64 242 0 41 64 243 0 45 64 244 0 64 64 245 0 0 65 246 0 0 66 247 0 40 66 248 0 43 66 249 0 0 67 250 0 40 67 251 0 41 67 252 0 64 67 253 0 0 68 254 0 0 69 255 0 0 70 256 0 0 71 257 0 0 72 258 0 0 73 259 0 0 74 260 0 0 75 261 0 0 76 262 0 0 77 263 0 0 78 264 0 0 79 265 0 0 80 266 0 0 81 267 0 6 81 268 0 8 81 269 0 18 81 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Voice Name SynStrings2 ChoirAahs StereoChoir ChoirAahs2 MellowChoir ChoirStrings VoiceOohs SynthVoice SynthVoice2 Choral AnalogVoice OrchestraHit OrchestrHit2 Impact Trumpet Trumpet2 BriteTrumpet WarmTrumpet Trombone Trombone2 Tuba Tuba2 MutedTrumpet FrenchHorn Fr.HornSolo FrenchHorn2 HornOrchestr BrassSection Tp&TbSection BrassSect2 HighBrass MellowBrass SynthBrass1 QuackBrass ResoSynBrass PolyBrass SynthBrass3 JumpBrass AnaVelBrass1 AnalogBrass1 SynthBrass2 SoftBrass SynthBrass4 ChoirBrass AnaVelBrass2 AnalogBrass2 SopranoSax AltoSax SaxSection HyperAltoSax TenorSax BreathyTenor SoftTenorSax TenorSax2 BaritoneSax Oboe EnglishHorn Bassoon Clarinet Piccolo Flute Recorder PanFlute BlownBottle Shakuhachi Whistle Ocarina SquareLead SquareLead2 LMSquare Hollow Voice No. 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 Bank Select MIDI Voice Program No. MSB LSB Change# (category) (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 270 0 19 81 271 0 64 81 272 0 65 81 273 0 66 81 274 0 0 82 275 0 6 82 276 0 8 82 277 0 18 82 278 0 19 82 279 0 20 82 280 0 24 82 281 0 25 82 282 0 40 82 283 0 41 82 284 0 45 82 285 0 96 82 286 0 0 83 287 0 65 83 288 0 0 84 289 0 64 84 290 0 0 85 291 0 64 85 292 0 65 85 293 0 0 86 294 0 24 86 295 0 64 86 296 0 0 87 297 0 35 87 298 0 0 88 299 0 16 88 300 0 64 88 301 0 65 88 302 0 0 89 303 0 64 89 304 0 0 90 305 0 16 90 306 0 17 90 307 0 18 90 308 0 64 90 309 0 65 90 310 0 0 91 311 0 64 91 312 0 65 91 313 0 66 91 314 0 67 91 315 0 0 92 316 0 64 92 317 0 66 92 318 0 67 92 319 0 0 93 320 0 64 93 321 0 65 93 322 0 0 94 323 0 64 94 324 0 65 94 325 0 0 95 326 0 0 96 327 0 20 96 328 0 27 96 329 0 64 96 330 0 66 96 331 0 0 97 332 0 45 97 333 0 64 97 334 0 65 97 335 0 66 97 336 0 0 98 337 0 27 98 338 0 64 98 339 0 0 99 340 0 12 99 Voice Name Shroud Mellow SoloSine SineLead SawtoothLead SawtoothLd2 ThickSaw DynamicSaw DigitalSaw BigLead HeavySynth WaspySynth PulseSaw Dr.Lead VelocityLead Seq.Analog CalliopeLead PureLead ChiffLead Rubby CharangLead DistortedLd WireLead VoiceLead SynthAahs VoxLead FifthsLead BigFive Bass&Lead Big&Low Fat&Perky SoftWhirl NewAgePad Fantasy WarmPad ThickPad SoftPad SinePad HornPad RotaryStrngs PolySynthPad PolyPad80 ClickPad AnalogPad SquarePad ChoirPad Heaven Itopia CCPad BowedPad Glacier GlassPad MetallicPad TinePad PanPad HaloPad SweepPad Shwimmer Converge PolarPad Celestial Rain ClaviPad HarmoRain AfricanWind Carib SoundTrack Prologue Ancestral Crystal SynthDr.Comp Voice List Voice No. 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 Bank Select MIDI Voice Program No. MSB LSB Change# (category) (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 341 0 14 99 342 0 18 99 343 0 35 99 344 0 40 99 345 0 41 99 346 0 42 99 347 0 64 99 348 0 65 99 349 0 66 99 350 0 67 99 351 0 68 99 352 0 69 99 353 0 70 99 354 0 71 99 355 0 72 99 356 0 0 100 357 0 18 100 358 0 19 100 359 0 40 100 360 0 64 100 361 0 65 100 362 0 66 100 363 0 67 100 364 0 0 101 365 0 64 101 366 0 96 101 367 0 0 102 368 0 64 102 369 0 65 102 370 0 66 102 371 0 67 102 372 0 68 102 373 0 70 102 374 0 71 102 375 0 96 102 376 0 0 103 377 0 8 103 378 0 14 103 379 0 64 103 380 0 65 103 381 0 66 103 382 0 67 103 383 0 68 103 384 0 69 103 385 0 0 104 386 0 64 104 387 0 0 105 388 0 32 105 389 0 35 105 390 0 96 105 391 0 97 105 392 0 0 106 393 0 28 106 394 0 96 106 395 0 97 106 396 0 98 106 397 0 0 107 398 0 0 108 399 0 96 108 400 0 97 108 401 0 0 109 402 0 0 110 403 0 0 111 404 0 0 112 405 0 64 112 406 0 96 112 407 0 97 112 408 0 0 113 409 0 96 113 410 0 97 113 411 0 98 113 Voice Name Popcorn TinyBells RoundGlocken GlockenChime ClearBells ChorusBells SynthMallet SoftCrystal LoudGlocken ChristmasBel VibeBells DigitalBells AirBells BellHarp Gamelimba Atmosphere WarmAtmos. HollwRelease NylonElPiano NylonHarp HarpVox Atmos.Pad Planet Brightness FantasyBells Smokey Goblins GoblinsSynth Creeper RingPad Ritual ToHeaven Night Glisten BellChoir Echoes Echoes2 EchoPan EchoBells BigPan SynthPiano Creation StarDust Reso&Panning Sci-Fi Starz Sitar DetunedSitar Sitar2 Tambra Tamboura Banjo MutedBanjo Rabab Gopichant Oud Shamisen Koto Taisho-kin Kanoon Kalimba Bagpipe Fiddle Shanai Shanai2 Pungi Hichiriki TinkleBell Bonang Altair GamelanGongs Voice No. 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 Bank Select MIDI Voice Program No. MSB LSB Change# (category) (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 412 0 99 113 413 0 100 113 414 0 101 113 415 0 0 114 416 0 0 115 417 0 97 115 418 0 98 115 419 0 0 116 420 0 96 116 421 0 0 117 422 0 96 117 423 0 0 118 424 0 64 118 425 0 65 118 426 0 66 118 427 0 0 119 428 0 64 119 429 0 65 119 430 0 0 120 431 0 0 121 432 0 0 122 433 0 0 123 434 0 0 124 435 0 0 125 436 0 0 126 437 0 0 127 438 0 0 128 439 64 0 1 440 64 0 2 441 64 0 4 442 64 0 17 443 64 0 33 444 64 0 34 445 64 0 35 446 64 0 36 447 64 0 37 448 64 0 38 449 64 0 49 450 64 0 50 451 64 0 51 452 64 0 55 453 64 0 56 454 64 0 65 455 64 0 66 456 64 0 67 457 64 0 68 458 64 0 69 459 64 0 70 460 64 0 71 461 64 0 81 462 64 0 82 463 64 0 83 464 64 0 84 465 64 0 85 466 64 0 86 467 64 0 87 468 64 0 88 469 64 0 89 470 64 0 90 471 64 0 91 472 64 0 97 473 64 0 98 474 64 0 99 475 64 0 100 476 64 0 101 477 64 0 113 478 64 0 114 479 64 0 115 480 64 0 116 Voice Name StereoGamlan RamaCymbal AsianBells Agogo SteelDrums GlassPerc. ThaiBells Woodblock Castanets TaikoDrum GranCassa MelodicTom MelodicTom2 RealTom RockTom SynthDrum AnalogTom ElectroPerc. Rev.Cymbal GtrFretNoise BreathNoise Seashore BirdTweet TelephonRing Helicopter Applause Gunshot CuttingNoise CuttingNoiz2 StringSlap Fl.KeyClick Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Dog Horse BirdTweet2 Ghost Maou PhoneCall DoorSqueak DoorSlam ScratchCut ScratchSplit WindChime TelphonRing2 CarEngineIgn CarTiresSqel CarPassing CarCrash Siren Train JetPlane Starship Burst RollrCoaster Submarine Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat FootSteps MachineGun LaserGun Explosion Firework PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 115 Drum Kit List • “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “1: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released. • Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.) • *: XG optional kit. Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note# C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 116 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off Group 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O 2 2 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 1 127/000/001 2 127/000/002 3 127/000/005 4 127/000/033 5 127/000/041 6 127/000/009 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Hit Kit* Jazz Kit Brush Kit Room Kit Snare Electro Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2 Kick Jazz Kick Small Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Caanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba While H Samba While L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Snare Roll 2 Snare Soft 2 Kick Tight L Open Rim Shot H Short Snare Pitched Kick Tight Short Kick Wet Kick Short Kick Tight H Stick Ambient Snare Short Snare Ambient Snare Tight H Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Snare Snappy Snare Tight 2 Hybrid Tom 1 Hi-Hat Close 2 Hybrid Tom 2 Hi-Hat Pedal 2 Hybrid Tom 3 Hi-Hat Open 2 Hybrid Tom 4 Hybrid Tom 5 Snare Jazz M Tom Jazz 1 Brush Tap 2 Tom Brush 1 Snare Tight Snappy Tom Room 1 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Room 2 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Room 3 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 4 Tom Brush 5 Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Hybrid Tom 6 Tom Jazz 6 Tom Brush 6 Tom Room 6 Drum Kit List Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note# C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off Group 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O 2 2 1 127/000/001 7 127/000/017 8 127/000/025 9 127/000/026 Standard Kit 1 Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Caanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba While H Samba While L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree 10 127/000/28 Dance Kit Kick Dance 1 Kick Dance 2 Scratch Dance 1 Scratch Dance 2 Reverse Cymbal Snare Noisy Hi Q 2 Snare Snappy Electro Kick Tight 2 Kick 3 Kick 2 Kick Gate Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Rock Rim Tom Rock 1 Snare Noisy 3 Tom Electro 1 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 Dance Percussion 1 Reverse Dance 1 Dance Percussion 2 Hi Q Dance 1 Snare Aanalog 3 Vinyl Noise Snare Analog 4 Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Reverse Dance 2 Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Snare Noisy 4 Snare Techno Snare Dance 1 Kick Tight 2 Kick Techno Q Rim Gate Kick Analog Short Kick Techno L Kick Analog Kick Techno Side Stick Analog Side Stick Analog Snare Analog Snare Clap Dance Clap Snare Analog 2 Snare Dry Tom Analog 1 Tom Analog 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog Hi-Hat Closed Analog3 Tom Analog 2 Tom Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4 Tom Analog 3 Tom Analog 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog Hi-Hat Open Analog 2 Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Tom Analog 6 Tambourine Analog Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Cowbell Analog Cowbell Analog Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Vibraslap Analog Ride Analog Bongo Analog H Bongo Analog L Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Maracas 2 Maracas 2 Claves 2 Claves 2 Dance Percussion 3 Dance Percussion 4 Dance Breath 1 Dance Breath 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 3 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 117 Drum Kit List Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note# C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 118 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off Group 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O 2 2 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 1 127/000/001 Standard Kit 1 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Caanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba While H Samba While L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree 11 127/000/049 Symphony Kit 12 126/000/41 CubanKit 13 126/000/44 PopLatinKit 14 126/000/36 Alternate Group ArabicKit Hand Clap Kick Soft 2 Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Band Snare Band Snare 2 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Jazz 5 Hand Cymbal Tom Jazz 6 Hand Cymbal Short Conga H Tip Conga H Heel Conga H Open Conga H Mute Conga H Slap Open Conga H Slap Conga H Slap Mute Conga L Tip Conga L Heel Conga L Open Conga L Mute Conga L Slap Open Conga L Slap Conga L Slide Bongo H Open 1 finger Bongo H Open 3 finger Bongo H Rim Bongo H Tip Bongo H Heel Bongo H Slap Bongo L Open 1 finger Bongo L Open 3 finger Bongo L Rim Bongo L Tip Bongo L Heel Bongo L Slap Timbale L Open Conga H Tip Conga H Heel Conga H Open Conga H Mute Conga H Slap Open Conga H Slap Conga H Slap Mute Conga L Tip Conga L Heel Conga L Open Conga L Mute Conga L Slap Open Conga L Slap Conga L Slide Bongo H Open 1 finger Bongo H Open 3 finger Bongo H Rim Bongo H Tip Bongo H Heel Bongo H Slap Bongo L Open 1 finger Bongo L Open 3 finger Bongo L Rim Bongo L Tip Bongo L Heel Bongo L Slap Timbale L Open Paila L Timbale H Open Paila L Timbale H Open Nakarazan Dom Cabasa Nakarazan Edge Hager Dom Hager Edge Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Zagrouda H Zagrouda L Kick Soft Snare Soft Arabic Hand Clap Snare Crash Cymbal 2 Duhulla Dom Duhulla Tak Hand Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal 2 Short Paila H Cowbell Top Paila H Cowbell Top Guiro Short Guiro Long Guiro Short Guiro Long Tambourine Tambourine Maracas Shaker Cabasa Maracas Shaker Cabasa Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Bell Tree 1 1 Duhulla Sak Claves Doff Dom Katem Dom Katem Tak Katem Sak Katem Tak Doff Tak Tabla Dom Tabla Tak1 Tabla Tik Tabla Tak2 Tabla Sak Tabla Roll of Edge Tabla Flam Sagat 1 Tabel Dom Sagat 3 Tabel Tak Sagat 2 Rik Dom Rik Tak 2 Rik Finger 1 Rik Tak 1 Rik Finger 2 Rik Brass Tremolo Rik Sak Rik Tik Drum Kit List Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note# C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off Group 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O 2 2 1 127/000/001 Standard Kit 1 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Caanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba While H Samba While L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree 15 126/000/037 Arabic Kit 2 Zarb Back mf Zarb Tom f Zarb Eshareh Zarb Whipping Tombak Tom f Neghareh Tom f Tombak Back f Neghareh Back f Tombak Snap f Neghareh Pelang f Tombak Trill Khaligi Clap 1 Arabic Zalgouta Open Khaligi Clap 2 Arabic Zalgouta Close Arabic Hand Clap Tabel Tak 1 Sagat 1 Tabel Dom Sagat 2 Tabel Tak 2 Sagat 3 Riq Tik 3 Riq Tik 2 Riq Tik Hard 1 Riq Tik 1 Riq Tik Hard 2 Riq Tik Hard 3 Riq Tish Riq Snouj 2 Riq Roll Riq Snouj 1 Riq Sak Riq Snouj 3 Riq Snouj 4 Riq Tak 1 Riq Brass 1 Riq Tak 2 Riq Brass 2 Riq Dom Katem Tak Doff Katem Dom Katem Sak 1 Katem Tak 1 Katem Sak 2 Katem Tak 2 Daholla Sak 2 Daholla Sak 1 Daholla Tak 1 Daholla Dom Daholla Tak 2 Tablah Prok Tablah Dom 2 Tablah Roll of Edge Tablah Tak Finger 4 Tablah Tak Trill 1 Tablah Tak Finger 3 Tablah Tak Trill 2 Tablah Tak Finger 2 Tablah Tak Finger 1 Tablah Tik 2 Tablah Tik 4 Tablah Tik 3 Tablah Tik 1 Tablah Tak 3 Tablah Tak 1 Tablah Tak 4 Tablah Tak 2 Tablah Sak 2 Tablah Tremolo Tablah Sak 1 Tablah Dom 1 16 126/000/065 Arabic Mix Kit Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Vibraslap Kick Techno L Side Stick Arabic Mix Snare Techno Guiro Long Kick Techno Q Open Rim Shot Funk Snare 2 Kick Arabic Mix Funk Snare 1 Snare Arabic Mix Hand Clap Snare Tom Electro 1 Hi-Hat Closed Arabic Mix Tom Electro 2 Hi-Hat Half Arabic Mix Tom Electro 3 Hi-Hat Open Arabic Mix Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Crash Cymbal 1 Tom Electro 6 Hi-Hat Open 3 Reverse Cymbal Timbale L Conga H Open Timbale H Conga H Mute Tambourine Conga L Cowbell Claves Bongo H Wood Block H Bongo L Wood Block L Kurdish Dohol Low f Cabasa Kurdish Dohol High f Shaker Snap 1 Maracas Snap 2 Khaligi Twaisat 3 Khaligi Twaisat 1 Khaligi Twaisat 2 Khaligi Twaisat 5 Open Khaligi Twaisat 4 Open Khaligi Tablah Small Dom Khaligi Tar Barashim Group Dom Khaligi Tablah Small Snap Khaligi Tar Barashim Group Sak Khaligi Tablah Small Sak Khaligi Tar Barashim Group Tak Khaligi Tablah Small Tik Khaligi Tablah Big Dom 1 Khaligi Tar Segal Dom Khaligi Tablah Big Tak 1 Khaligi Tar Segal Tak Khaligi Tablah Big Sak 1 Tablah Dom 1 Tablah Tak 1 Tablah Tremolo Tablah Tak 2 Tablah Tik 1 Tablah Sak 1 Tablah Tik 3 Tablah Tik 2 17 126/000/115 Alternate Group 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 Indian Kit Indian Hand Clap Dafli Open Dafli Slap Dafli Rim Duff Open Duff Slap Duff Rim Hatheli Long Hatheli Short Baya ge Baya ke Baya ghe Baya ka Tabla na Tabla tin Tablabaya dha Dhol 1 Open Dhol 1 Slap Dhol 1 Mute Dhol 1 Open Slap Dhol 1 Roll Dandia Short Dandia Long Chutki Chipri Khanjira Open Khanjira Slap Khanjira Mute Khanjira Bendup Khanjira Benddown Dholak 1 Open Dholak 1 Mute Dholak 1 Slap Dhol 2 Open Dhol 2 Slap Dhol 2 Rim Mridangam na Mridangam din Mridangam ki Mridangam ta Mridangam Chapu Mridangam Lo Closed Mridangam Lo Open Chimta Normal Chimta Ring Dholki Hi Open Dholki Hi Mute Dholki Lo Open Dholki Hi Slap Dholki Lo Slide Khol Open Khol slide Khol Mute Manjira Open Manjira Close Jhanji Open Jhanji Close Mondira Open Mondira Close Indian Bhangra Scat 1 Indian Bhangra Scat 2 Indian Bhangra Scat 3 indian Bhangra Scat 4 Khomokh Normal Khomokh Mute Khomokh mltatk Thavil Open Thavil Slap Thavil Mute Khartaal Dholak 2 Open Dholak 2 Slide Dholak 2 Rim 1 Dholak 2 Rim 2 Dholak 2 Ring Dholak 2 Slap G Dholak Body PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Alternate Group 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 3 5 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 12 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 119 Drum Kit List ● Synth. & FX Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note# C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 120 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off Group 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O 2 2 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 1 127/000/001 18 126/000/125 Standard Kit 1 Chinese Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Caanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba While H Samba While L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Da Cha Da Gu mp Da Gu rim Da Gu f Da Gu hand Da Gu roll Pai Gu 4 Pai Gu 4 High Pai Gu 3 Pai Gu 3 High Pai Gu 2 Pai Gu 2 High Pai Gu 1 Luo High 1 Gong batter Jin Luo Luo High 2 Luo Mid-Low Luo Jin Luo Low Da Cha Da Cha effect Zhong Cha Xiao Cha effect Xiao Cha Mang Luo Low Mang Luo Mid Qing Finger Bell Luo big Mu Yu Low Mu Yu Mid-Low Mu Yu Mid Mu Yu High Nan Bang Zi roll Nan Bang Zi Ban Gu Ban Ban Gu roll Chinese Opera Voice 1 Chinese Opera Voice 2 Chinese Opera Voice 3 Yun Luo F4 Yun Luo F#4 Yun Luo G4 Yun Luo G#4 Yun Luo A4 Yun Luo A#4 Yun Luo B4 Yun Luo C5 Yun Luo C#5 Yun Luo D5 Yun Luo D#5 Yun Luo E5 Yun Luo F5 Yun Luo F#5 Yun Luo G5 Yun Luo G#5 Yun Luo A5 Yun Luo A#5 Yun Luo B5 Yun Luo C6 19 127/000/127 Alternate Alternate Group Chinese Mix Kit Group 28 126/000/001 29 126/000/002 30 126/000/112 SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Animal Kit 2 2 2 2 Cutting Noise Phone Call Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Door Slam String Slap Scratch Cut Scratch H 3 Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 5 5 5 1 1 Rooster Elephant Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine 3 3 4 4 4 Dagu Mute Zhongcha Mute Dagu Heavy Zhongcha Open Paigu Middle Paigu Low Xiaocha Mute Bangu Xiaocha Open Bangzi Muyu Low Zhongluo Mute Muyu Mid-Low Zhongluo Open Muyu Middle Xiaoluo Open Muyu Mid-High Muyu High 4 5 4 5 6 Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footeps Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework 6 7 7 Ghost Maou Horse Cricket Cow Tiger Rattlesnake Monkeies Crow Style List Style No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 Style No. Style Name (Category) Pop&Rock 1 FunkPopRock 2 AcousticRock 3 Cool8Beat 4 60’sRock1 5 60’sRock2 6 VintageGtrPop 7 60’sGuitarPop 8 70’s8Beat 9 90’sGuitarPop 10 KoolShuffle 11 BubblegumPop 12 BritPopSwing 13 JazzPop 14 HardRock 15 RootRock 16 RockShuffle 17 Unplugged Ballad 1 8BeatAdria 2 OrganBallad 3 PianoBallad 4 8BeatBallad 5 EPBallad 6 6-8Modern 7 Chillout1 8 NewR&BBallad 9 16BeatBallad 10 PowerBallad 11 EasyBallad Dance 1 ModChartPop 2 RetroClub 3 USChartHit 4 ClubBeat 5 Electronica 6 FunkyHouse 7 ChartR&B 8 MellowHipHop 9 SoulR&B 10 Chillout2 11 Ibiza 12 TechnoParty 13 DiscoHouse 14 DiscoPhilly 15 70’sDisco 16 80’sDisco 17 DreamDance 18 House 19 FrenchHouse 20 Garage 21 ClassicHipHop 22 NewHipHop 23 HipHopGroove 24 LatinDJ’s Swing&Jazz 1 OrchBigBand 2 OrchestraSwing1 3 OrchestraSwing2 4 BigBandFast 5 BigBandShuffle 6 MidnightSwing 7 JumpJive Style No. 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 Style No. Style Name (Category) 8 OrganGroove 9 JazzClub 10 Five-Four 11 JazzWaltzFast 12 Dixieland 13 Ragtime 14 Charleston R&B 1 BluesRock 2 BluesBallad 3 Soul 4 FranklySoul 5 6-8Soul 6 SoulBrothers 7 OldiesR&R 8 60’sRock&Roll 9 Rock&Roll 10 Twist 11 GospelSisters 12 WorshipMed 13 DetroitPop 14 ModernR&B 15 ComboBoogie Country 1 NewCountry 2 CountryHits 3 CountryBallad 4 CountryPop 5 CountryShuffle 6 Country2-4 7 FingerPickin 8 Bluegrass 9 Hoedown 10 CountryWaltz Latin 1 BrazilianSamba 2 BossaNova 3 FastBossa 4 Pop Bossa 5 Forro 6 Beguine 7 Mambo 8 Salsa 9 Calypso 10 Merengue 11 Bachata 12 CubanSon 13 RumbaIsland 14 RumbaFlamenca 15 HappyReggae 16 LatinDisco 17 Joropo 18 Parranda 19 Reggaeton Ballroom 1 VienneseWaltz 2 EnglishWaltz 3 Slowfox 4 Foxtrot 5 Quickstep 6 Tango 7 Swingfox 8 Pasodoble Style No. 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 Style No. Style Name (Category) 9 Samba 10 ChaChaCha 11 Rumba 12 Jive 13 OrganSwing 14 OrganSamba 15 OrganQuickstep 16 9-8Waltz 17 TraditionalWaltz Movie&Show 1 70’sTVTheme 2 Sci-fiMarch 3 WildWest 4 SaturdayNight 5 Showtune 6 Moonlight6-8 7 ClassicPianoBld 8 BaroqueAir 9 OrchestralBolero 10 OrchestralMarch 11 ChristmasSwing 12 ChristmasWaltz Entertainer 1 DiscoFox 2 DiscoHands 3 AlpBallad 4 ScandSlowRock 5 ScandShuffle 6 70’sFrenchHit 7 SchlagerPop 8 SchlagerBeat 9 SchlagerPolka 10 PolkaPop 11 Tijuana 12 Carnival 13 PubPiano World 1 IrishDance 2 SpanishPaso 3 FrenchMusette 4 Sirtaki 5 PopFlamenco 6 Reel 7 Jig 8 Tarantella 9 OberPolka 10 OberWaltzer 11 GermanMarch 12 USMarch 13 6-8March 14 Duranguense 15 CumbiaGrupera 16 Saeidy 17 WehdaSaghira 18 Laff 19 ArabicEuro 20 OrientalPop 21 Bhajan 22 Bhangra 23 Xi Qing Luo Gu 24 Jing Ju Jie Zou PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 121 Music Database List No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 122 MDB Name All Time Hits A Bridge To Cross Troubled Water All Of My Loving All OK Now A Song For New England Blowing In The Folk Boots For Walking Call Me When You Rock Don’t Be Bad To Me Get Back To Where You Belong Guitar Wheels Heaven? Nobody Gets Too Much I Was Born Smiling I Watch My Tears Go By Leave Me Tender, Love Me True Let Me Hold Your Hand Letters Of Love Living In A Colored Submarine Love? Don’t Throw It Away Makin’ It Thru The Night Mrs. Robin’s Son My Heart Is Very Simple My Lover’s A Dream My Shell Swing Party? Oh, Blah Di! Please Do Love Me In Liverpool Riding Ticket These Ones Are Young This Game Makes You Cry This Night Has Been A Hard Day! Till The Moon Deserts The Sky Woods Of Norway You’re Just OK! You’re So Young At Heart Modern Pop A Cosy Life In Italy All Get Up Angles of Charlie A Sunshine Walk Bossa Woman Cross The Mersey By Ferry Dream Of A Lover Everything’s Changed I’m Torn It Is Always Raining On Me It’s Only Words It’s Simply Love Life Groove Life’s Walk Love Goes This Way Not Full Time Love Our Current Love Rollercoaster Through Life Seriously Dippy She’s One For Me Shining Light For Love Sorry May Be Hard To Say Stars To Reach For Sure Of That? Swinging Sultan Tell Her Your Feelings The Girl Belongs To Me This Affair’s In The Family This Thing’s Called Love Time Riding What’s Taken So Long? You Only Need Love Sing Alongs Danny’s Boy Dear, My Clementine Deep In Texas’s Heart Ease Up Mother Brown PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual No. 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 MDB Name Espana Viva Good Night For The Ladies Here Are Happy Days Again High Old Silver Lining My Dad’s A Dustman My Man Is Old My Sunshine Is You Old Smokey Smiling Irish Eyes Song For Susanna Song Of The Sideboard This Iron Is Old! Tipperary’s A Long Way Easy Listening Balloon Bossa I’m Gonna Leave Durham La Mer Is Swinging Making It Through The Rain Morning’s New World Mother! Portugal In April Raindrops On My Head The Wind And Me This Is Something Silly! Whistling A Last Goodbye Pop Classics All On My Own Are You Standing Still? Boxing Song Broken Heart Complete Eclipse Don’t Break My Heart Beat Drifting On Broadway Easier To Say It Than Do It Girl Belonging To Bobby Girl With Brown Eyes Give Thanks For Music Heartache Beat Holiday In Summer Season I’m Your Venus It’s Really Not Usual In Wales John B’s Sloop Lane Of Pennies Loves You She Does My Religion Is Mislaid Paradise Can’t Be As Nice Portatone Man? Raindrop Walk Rocking My Life Sally’s Got A Mustang Shape Me And Bend Me Sky Spirits Somebody Needs Someone Else Spin The Wheel Suzie Wake Up Sweden Takes A Chance Sweet Lord Song This Afternoon’s Sunny This Day’s Just Perfect This Is My Party To Love Some Reggae Tulsa Is 24 Hours Away We Are Together And Happy With My Friends To Help Me You Can Help Yourself Pop Ballads Don’t Let The Sun Set For Me Heavenly Creatures With Halo It’s Crazy How I Miss You Missing You Like Crazy No Matter What The Boys Do Tell What Is One More Year? No. 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 MDB Name Where Are You Going To? Ballad At Once Ballad Ballad For A Hero Ballad For A Woman Candle On The Piano Don’t Leave Me Now Do You Know Me Yet Eyes Of Blue Friends Are For Singing Hard To Say Sorry Hello, Do You Hear Me Playing? I Can’t Live Without You I Will Be There For You I’ll Make Soul With You I Love You In French I’m Saving It All For You! I Will Fly Away One Day London Streets Love’s Glory Love’s Vision Nothing Will Change My Love One Time When We Touch San Francisco Heart Soft Songs Are Killing Me! Take It Back For Good The World Is What We Are Up? It’s Where We Belong You Are Inspiring You Lift My Wings Your True Color Rock 69 Summers Long Alabama’s Sweet Home Born To Be Mild Can’t Get Satisfied Can We Stick Together Dave On The Road Don’t Think About Tomorrow Dusting The Wind Go For A Spin Is The Heat On? I Want You To Want Rock Jumping Rock Just Give Me Love And Rock Last Countdown Nobody Else Is A Champion This Woman Plays Honky Tonk Tiger’s Eye Velvet Is Black Wanting To Break Free Whatever You Rock Your Kindness Is Magic Rock&Roll All Shaken Up Beethoven’s Rocking Crazy Little Love Thing Don’t Hurry Love Good Looking Charm Good Molly, Miss Golly Great Fire Balls I’m A Wanderer I Won’t Be Cruel Julie Does The Twist Let’s Play The Twist Let’s Sue Peggy Particularly No Place To Go Rock & Roll Jail Rocking Blue Shoes Rocking For 24 Hours Shouting Twist Teddy Is A Bear Music Database List No. 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 MDB Name The Music Is Rock&Roll What A Day That Will Be You Got Me Going, Really! Oldies All I Need Is The Air Are You Sorry Now? Breaking Up Isn’t Easy To Do Diana’s Twist Final Waltz Girl From Uptown Going Down Town Golden Silence Guitar For An Apache Have I Got It? Heaven Has Three Steps He Kissed Crystal! Hey, Let’s Rock Tonight! I’m A Pola! Magic Puff Marina’s Song Mend A Chino Motion Of Poetry My Pillow Has Tears On Pete Retite Please Be Mine, Baby Star Of Movie Teenie Bikini The Ghetto Is In Me The Lovin’ Feeling Has Gone These Lips Are Lucky This Doll’s Alive! This Land Is Wonderful! This Woman’s Pretty! Tomorrow Will You Love Me Tonight Do You Feel Lonesome Twisting Again Walking Right Back We Don’t Want Milk Today Words Aren’t Easy You & You Alone Organist Bamba Party Cat Groove El Ranchero Face Of A Child Form Guagli On Organ Guide Me To My Home It’s Dolly, Say Hello! Nowhere It Came Out Of Ribbon Of Yellow Samba Cavaquinho Samba Delicado Side By Side In The Barn Steam Train Samba Tico Samba Two Times Yeh! Whispering Organ White And Pale Dance Floor Adagio From Ibiza Baa Bee Girl Baby I Love Loving You Buy Me Bailame, Please Catch 22 Children In Trance? Girl High In The Sky It’s So Horny Janeiro Samba Life Is High London, R U Prepared? No. 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 MDB Name Love First Time I Saw You My Eyes Can’t Take Off! No Dinero, No Tengo Once More Rose From The Desert She Believes In Life After Love Tambor DJ This Song Is Something! Up Is The Way To Move Disco A Day’s Difference Babylon Rivers Born Alive Disco Brown Girl At The Disco Cool Daddy Disco Dee Eye Ess See Oh! Disco Hustle Don’t Misunderstand Me Do You Love To Love? Fever At Night Go Where The Music Takes You I Love That Boat! It Really Is A Funky Town I’ve Never Known Love LikeIt Keepin’ Alive Khan Disco Local New Yorker Make My Fire Burn Again Mother Is Baking Never Give Up On You Philadelphia Sound Russia’s Mad Priest Searching For Freedom Swedish Queen Theme Of Love Train Of Love Wear It Out? Or Use It Up? Why Am See A? You’re Everything For Me Swing Big Kiss For Dream Building Blue Roses For The Lady Call The Whole Thing Off Charles On Get Out Of Bed Goodbye To Blues Swing High Hope Swing Joy I Love Her So Just Chickens Here! My Shadow And Me Not Forgettable Not Misbehaving Out Of Your Kick Rag Band Time For Alex? Ragtime Tiger Safari Swing Smiling Swing Steam Train Boogie Swing Yourself Up Tap Dancing Bo Thank You In Germany The Importance Of Roses The Sandman Gives Me A Dream Two Foot Five Yes Sir, My Baby Can Swing You’re My Coffee’s Cream Jazz I Have All That Rhythm My Home Is Pasadena Not Decided That Indigo Feeling These Winners Are Easy No. 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 MDB Name Wild Cat Dixie BigBand Big Band Patrol If Only I Could Chime Jiving Wailing And Jumping Leroy Is Bad. Very Bad L Is For The Way You Look At Me Please Fly And Swing With Me So What Is Not Old? Tasty Honey This Lady? She’s A Tramp Wintry Wind Blowing R&B/Gospel Admire As Played On Portatone Baby Groove Boys At The End Of The Road Don’t Change Your Mind Baby Don’t Get Excited! It’s Soul, Man! Knocking Wood Loco Twist On The Rivers Side Sir Duke Is Wondering Unchained Heart When Man Loves Someone Will I See You Again Wish I Could Groove You Should Think Frankly Country A Boy From The Country Back On The Road Blue Grass Bonanza Forever In My Mind Hi, Mary Home On Country Highways I Only Ever Need You Lucille Left Me Road Of The King Special Orange This Song Is Crazy! Waltz In Tennessee Latin At Daylight The Bananaboat Comes At The Copa Bossa Gets The Blame Bossa In Blue Cherry And Apple - Colored Corazon un Tengo Don’t Worry, Reggae! Eyes From Spain Farewell To Jamaica Flea From Spain Frenetic Beguine Guitar For Volare Have You Been In Guantanamera I Can’t Bear More Than This Italian Mambo It Is A Band, Aah! Jamaican Sun Just A Little Spanish City Lots Of Besame Love’s Amor In Latin Luminous Mambo Jamming Mentiroso Es My Sweet Calypso Girl Not Less Only One Note Makes A Samba Pasodoble Cani Patricia Is Dancing The Cha Cha Rumba For Volare PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 123 Music Database List No. 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 124 MDB Name Rushing Fools Say No More In Brazil Start The Beguine Swaying Rumba Taxi In Tijuana Thirty Second Bossa Three Times Perhaps Vida De Los Caminos Latin Pop Dance In The Morning You’re Mine Baby Ballroom Cumparsita Tango He’s Got To Go Moon Waltz Old St. Bernards On Sunday? I Never Will! Perfidious One Quando Samba Say Magnifique! This House Is Not Young Yellow Bird Rumba Christmas Christmas Jingle It’s The Most Wonderful Time Rednosed Rudolph Silent Christmas This Boy Child Is Mary’s Waltz At Christmas Classical Cannot Remember My Dreams Classical Maria Dream Of Love Gladiators Entry Skaters Dance Sonata In The Moonlight Song In The Key Of F Spring Voices Strings In The Air The March Of Radetzky Tristesse Third Etude Waltz Of The Fledermaus Family Califragidocilistic? It’s Super! Necessary Bear Noisy Old Car? Instrumentals Acapulco Swings In The 20s Adagio Chillout Birds Played At Night Concerto Of Love Dancing Musicbox Infant’s Pavane Chillout Invitation To The Shak Jerry’s Binx Lonely Piper Maple Ragtime Paris Has Many Poor People Petite Clarinet Piece Of Funk Rumba For Elena String Holiday Waltz Around The World Yak This Sax Party Time Aga Doo Big Samba Bamboo Blankenesenolop Dancing Bird Going With A Good Thing Hands Up Party PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual No. 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 MDB Name I Love To Drink Cider Kreuzberg Louie’s My Brother Mexican Trumpet Mr. Schmidtchen No Beer on Hawaii Russ’ Ozone Party Song Of The Chicken The Bucklehuck Schlager Autobahnpolka Blind Passenger Capri Beat Deep Love Glaube An Wunder Goodbye Amor I Have Sad Love In Ewigkeit Italian Guy Mexican Fiesta Moscow City No Tears Oh Maria Paloma Pop Spanish Island The Little House Where Can I Find Love? Wonderful Blonde Worship Forever Singing Your Love I Am Everything Lord Is Great Love Cannot Be Greater Our God Is Mighty Rain Down Holy Spirit With My Total Heart Screen Theme Ark Raiders March A Spy Does It Better Bank Robbers Ballad Best On The Bill Bills Barnacles Dart Playing TV Theme Daughters And Sons Don’t Be A Muppet! Do You Think England’s Done? Farm Based Soap Theme Fighting Stars Flash Disco Holiday Camp Rock It’s A Big Country June & Terry’s Theme Lovin’ Summer Magnificent Flying Men Main For Rain Mi-Re-Do My Prince Will Come One Day Only Friends But Good Ones Paradise Conquest Seven Magnificent Cowboys Song Of The Trolley The Fantastic Getaway These Are My Favorites! Tie, Tails, And A Hat Twelve O’Clock Theme You’re The Only One I Want Showtime A Nickel In The Nickelodeon Dance Lord Dance Of Fire Entertainment That Is It’s Only A Day Away! No. 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 MDB Name It’s Time For Cabaret! I Wished I Danced All Night No Business Like It! Parade At Easter The Cat’s Memory The Greatest Times The Roses Are Coming Up The Sun Sets, The Sun Rises Tonight At The Westside Traditional Abide This Hymn Ave Maria No More Can Can Orpheus? Fun In the Forest Moulin Heart Texas Yellow Rose March & Polka Marching RAF Rosa That Polka Is Happy! Vienna Forever Waltz Amsterdam’s Favorite Flowers Amsterdam’s Old Windmill Charmaine’s Waltz Daisy’s Bicycle Fascination Waltz I’m Trying To Remember Is It True Love? Lover Waltz Samson’s Girl Snow Waltz The Little Pub Waltzing To Whatever Will Be Waltz In Raggy Time Waltz Of Amore Waltz Of The Cuckoo Waltz Of The Emperor Waltz To Skate In Wintertime World Alabina Orient Close Your Face Die Sabber josija Goodbye Roma I Land On The Sun La Ballade De Gerard La Cucarumba La Maison Viens La Puntualidad Latin Cuccuru Musette De Reine Oh Beautiful Italian Sun Only Say Hello Populaire Chanson Santa Lou Cheer Shenandoah’s Far Away The Classy Trumpeter Van Maas Land Ya Salama Voice Effect Type List ● Harmony Types No. Harmony Type 1 01(Standard Duet) 2 02(Standard Trio) 3 03(Full Chord) 4 04(Rock Duet) 5 05(Country Duet) 6 06(Country Trio) 7 07(Block) 8 08(4-Way Close 1) 9 09(4-Way Close 2) 10 10(4-Way Open) 11 11(1+5) 12 12(Octave) 13 13(Strum) 14 14(Multi Assign) 15 15(Echo 1/4) 16 16(Echo 1/6) 17 17(Echo 1/8) 18 18(Echo 1/12) 19 19(Tremolo 1/8) 20 20(Tremolo 1/12) 21 21(Tremolo 1/16) 22 22(Tremolo 1/32) 23 23(Trill 1/12) 24 24(Trill 1/16) 25 25(Trill 1/24) 26 26(Trill 1/32) Description Harmony types 01–14 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the single-note melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing songs that contain chord data. Types 15–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in time with the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompaniment is on or not; however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo setting (page 72). The individual note values in each type let you synchronize the effect precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets, 1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note triplets. • The Echo effect Types (15–18) create delayed repeats of each note played. • The Tremolo effect Types (19–22) repeat all held notes (up to four). • The Trill effect Types (23–26) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two notes are held. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 125 Voice Effect Type List ● Reverb Types No. 1 Type Description HALL1 MSB LSB 1 0 16 2 HALL2 1 3 HALL3 1 17 4 HALL4 1 18 5 HALL5 1 1 1 6 Reverb simulating the acoustics of a hall. 6 HALL M 7 HALL L 1 7 8 BASIC HALL 1 30 9 LARGE HALL 1 31 10 ATMO HALL 1 23 11 ROOM1 2 16 12 ROOM2 2 17 13 ROOM3 2 18 14 ROOM4 2 19 15 ROOM5 2 0 16 ROOM6 2 1 17 ROOM7 2 2 18 ROOM S 2 5 19 ROOM M 2 6 20 ROOM L 2 7 21 ACOSTIC ROOM 2 20 22 DRUMS ROOM 2 21 23 PERC ROOM 2 22 24 STAGE1 3 16 25 STAGE2 3 17 26 STAGE3 3 0 27 STAGE4 3 1 28 PLATE1 4 16 29 PLATE2 4 17 30 PLATE3 4 0 31 GM PLATE 4 7 32 TUNNEL Simulates a cylindrical space expanding to left and right. 17 0 33 CANYON A hypothetical acoustic space which extends without limit. 18 0 34 BASEMENT A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance. 19 0 35 WHITE ROOM A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay. 16 0 36 NO EFFECT No effect. 0 0 126 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room. Reverb suitable for a solo instrument. Reverb simulating a plate reverb unit. Voice Effect Type List ● Chorus Types No. MSB LSB 1 CHORUS1 Type Description 66 17 2 CHORUS2 66 8 3 CHORUS3 66 16 4 CHORUS4 66 1 5 CHORUS5 65 2 6 CHORUS6 65 0 7 CHORUS7 65 1 8 CHORUS8 9 65 8 CHORUS FAST 65 16 10 CHORUS LITE 65 17 11 GM CHORUS1 65 3 12 GM CHORUS2 65 4 13 GM CHORUS3 65 5 14 GM CHORUS4 65 6 15 FB CHORUS 65 7 16 CELESTE1 66 0 17 CELESTE2 66 2 68 16 18 SYMPHONIC1 19 SYMPHONIC2 20 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound. Adds more stages to the modulation of Celeste. 68 0 FLANGER1 67 8 21 FLANGER2 67 16 22 FLANGER3 67 17 23 FLANGER4 67 1 24 FLANGER5 67 0 25 GM FLANGER 67 7 Adds a sweeping effect to the sound. 26 ROTARY SP1 69 16 27 ROTARY SP2 71 17 28 ROTARY SP3 71 18 29 ROTARY SP4 70 17 30 ROTARY SP5 66 18 31 ROTARY SP6 69 0 32 ROTARY SP7 71 22 33 2WAY ROT SP 86 0 71 16 34 AUTO PAN1 35 AUTO PAN2 36 EP AUTOPAN 37 T_AUTO PAN1 Simulates a rotary speaker. Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right, front, back). Tempo synchronized Auto PAN. 71 0 71 21 121 0 38 TREMOLO1 70 16 39 TREMOLO2 71 19 40 TREMOLO3 70 0 41 EP TREMOLO 70 18 42 GT TREMOLO1 71 20 43 GT TREMOLO2 70 19 44 T_TREMOLO 120 0 45 NO EFFECT 0 0 Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation. No effect. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 127 Voice Effect Type List ● DSP Types No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 Type HALL1 HALL2 HALL3 HALL4 HALL5 HALL M HALL L BASIC HALL LARGE HALL ATMO HALL ROOM1 ROOM2 ROOM3 ROOM4 ROOM5 ROOM6 ROOM7 ROOM S ROOM M ROOM L ACOSTIC ROOM DRUMS ROOM PERC ROOM STAGE1 STAGE2 STAGE3 STAGE4 PLATE1 PLATE2 PLATE3 GM PLATE TUNNEL CANYON BASEMENT WHITE ROOM CHORUS1 CHORUS2 CHORUS3 CHORUS4 CHORUS5 CHORUS6 CHORUS7 CHORUS8 CHORUS FAST CHORUS LITE GM CHORUS1 GM CHORUS2 GM CHORUS3 GM CHORUS4 FB CHORUS CELESTE1 CELESTE2 SYMPHONIC1 SYMPHONIC2 ENS DETUNE1 ENS DETUNE2 KARAOKE1 KARAOKE2 KARAOKE3 ER1 ER2 GATE REVERB REVERS GATE 64 EQ DISCO 65 EQ TEL 66 2BAND EQ 128 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Description Reverb simulating the acoustics of a hall. Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room. Reverb suitable for a solo instrument. Reverb simulating a plate reverb unit. Simulates a cylindrical space expanding to left and right. A hypothetical acoustic space which extends without limit. A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance. A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay. Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound. Adds more stages to the modulation of Celeste. Chorus effect without modulation, created by adding a slightly pitch-shifted sound. Echo for karaoke. This effect isolates only the early reflection components of the reverb. Simulation of gated reverb. Simulation of gated reverb played back in reverse. Equalizer effect that boosts both high and low frequencies, as is typical in most disco music. Equalizer effect that cuts both high and low frequencies, to simulate the sound heard through a telephone receiver. Stereo EQ which emphasizes low and high frequencies. MSB 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 17 18 19 16 66 66 66 66 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 66 66 68 68 87 87 20 20 20 9 9 10 11 LSB 0 16 17 18 1 6 7 30 31 23 16 17 18 19 0 1 2 5 6 7 20 21 22 16 17 0 1 16 17 0 7 0 0 0 0 17 8 16 1 2 0 1 8 16 17 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 16 0 0 16 0 1 2 0 1 0 0 76 16 76 17 77 0 Voice Effect Type List No. 67 Type 3BAND EQ 68 ST 3BAND EQ 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 HM ENHANCE1 HM ENHANCE2 FLANGER1 FLANGER2 FLANGER3 FLANGER4 FLANGER5 GM FLANGER V_FLANGER TEMPO FLANGER DELAY LCR1 DELAY LCR2 DELAY LR ECHO CROSS DELAY TEMPO DELAY TEMPO ECHO TEMPO CROSS V_DST ROCA V_DST FUSION V_DST CRUNC V_DST VINTAG V_DST HARD2 V_DST HEAVY V_DST HARD1 V_DST SOFT DIST HARD1 DIST HARD2 DIST SOFT1 DIST SOFT2 DIST HEAVY OVERDRIVE1 OVERDRIVE2 ST DIST ST OD ST DIST HARD ST DIST SOFT AMP SIM1 AMP SIM2 ST AMP1 ST AMP2 ST AMP3 ST AMP4 ST AMP5 ST AMP6 DST+DELAY1 DST+DELAY2 OD+DELAY1 OD+DELAY2 CMP+DST+DLY1 CMP+DST+DLY2 CMP+OD+DLY1 CMP+OD+DLY2 V_DST H+DLY V_DST S+DLY DST+TDLY OD+TDLY COMP+DIST1 COMP+DIST2 CMP+DST+TDLY CMP+OD+TDLY1 CMP+OD+TDLY2 CMP+OD+TDLY3 CMP+OD+TDLY4 CMP+OD+TDLY5 CMP+OD+TDLY6 Description Mono EQ which emphasizes low and high frequencies, and attenuates mid-range frequencies. Stereo EQ which emphasizes low and high frequencies, and attenuates mid-range frequencies. Adds new harmonics to the input signal to make the sound stand out. Adds a sweeping effect to the sound. Flanger which simulates vintage tube and fuzz sounds. Tempo synchronized flanger. Produces three delayed sounds: L, R and C (center). Produces two delayed sounds: L and R. Two feedback delays are provided. Two delayed sounds (L and R), and independent feedback delays for L and R. The feedback of the two delayed sounds is crossed. Tempo synchronized delay. Tempo synchronized delay. Tempo synchronized L&R delay. Vintage Distortion. Hard-edge distortion. Soft, warm distortion. Heavy distortion. Adds mild distortion to the sound. Stereo distortion. Stereo Overdrive. Hard-edge stereo distortion. Soft, warm soft distortion. A simulation of a guitar amp. Stereo amp simulator. Distortion and Delay are connected in series. Overdrive and Delay are connected in series. Compressor, Distortion and Delay are connected in series. Compressor, Overdrive and Delay are connected in series. V Distortion and Delay are connected in series. Distortion and Tempo Delay are connected in series. Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series. Compressor and Distotion are connected in series. Compressor, Distotion and Tempo Delay are connected in series. Compressor, Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series. MSB LSB 76 0 76 18 81 81 67 67 67 67 67 67 104 107 5 5 6 7 8 21 21 22 103 103 98 98 98 98 98 98 75 75 75 75 73 74 74 73 74 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 95 95 95 95 96 96 96 96 98 98 100 100 73 73 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 16 0 8 16 17 1 0 7 0 0 16 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 18 19 28 29 30 31 0 2 16 22 17 23 0 0 9 8 8 18 19 0 1 20 21 8 24 25 26 16 0 17 1 16 0 17 1 1 3 0 1 16 1 0 1 16 17 18 19 20 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 129 Voice Effect Type List No. 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 Type V_DST H+TDL1 V_DST H+TDL2 V_DST S+TDL1 V_DST S+TDL2 COMP MED COMP HEAVY COMP MELODY COMP BASS MBAND COMP 144 COMPRESSOR 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 NOISE GATE VCE CANCEL AMBIENCE TALKING MOD ISOLATOR PHASER1 PHASER2 PHASER3 T_PHASER1 T_PHASER2 EP PHASER1 EP PHASER2 EP PHASER3 PITCH CHG1 PITCH CHG2 PITCH CHG3 DUAL ROT BRT D ROT BRT F DUAL ROT WRM D ROT WRM F DUAL ROT SP1 DUAL ROT SP2 ROTARY SP1 ROTARY SP2 ROT SP2 FAST ROTARY SP3 ROT SP3 FAST ROTARY SP4 ROT SP4 FAST ROTARY SP5 ROT SP5 FAST ROTARY SP6 ROTARY SP7 ROT SP7 FAST ROTARY SP8 ROT SP8 FAST ROTARY SP9 ROT SP9 FAST 2WAY ROT SP DST+ROT SP DST+2ROT SP OD+ROT SP OD+2ROT SP AMP+ROT SP AMP+2ROT SP AUTO PAN1 AUTO PAN2 AUTO PAN3 EP AUTOPAN T_AUTO PAN1 T_AUTO PAN2 TREMOLO1 TREMOLO2 TREMOLO3 EP TREMOLO GT TREMOLO1 GT TREMOLO2 VIBE VIBRATE T_TREMOLO 130 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Description V Distotion and Tempo Delay are connected in series. Holds down the output level when a specified input level is exceeded. A sense of attack can also be added to the sound. This effect independently compresses the level of certain frequency bands in the sound. Holds down the output level when a specified input level is exceeded. A sense of attack can also be added to the sound. Gates the audio signal when the audio signal falls below a specified level. Attenuates the audio in the center position. Blurs the stereo positioning of the sound to add spatial width. Adds a vowel sound to the input signal. Attenuates the level of audio signals only at mid-range frequencies. Cyclically modulates the phase to add modulation to the sound. Changes the pitch of the input signal. Rotary speaker simulation with speed switching. Simulates a rotary speaker. Distortion and rotary speaker connected in series. Distortion and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series. Overdrive and rotary speaker connected in series. Overdrive and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series. Amp simulator and rotary speaker connected in series. Amp simulator and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series. Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right, front, back). Tempo synchronized pan. Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation. Vibraphone effect. Tempo synchronized tremolo. MSB 103 103 103 103 83 83 105 105 105 LSB 0 17 1 16 16 17 16 17 0 83 0 84 85 88 93 115 72 72 72 108 108 72 72 72 80 80 80 99 99 99 99 99 99 69 71 71 71 71 70 70 66 66 69 71 71 69 69 69 69 86 69 86 69 86 69 86 71 71 71 71 121 121 70 71 70 70 71 70 119 120 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 19 0 16 17 18 16 16 0 1 16 30 17 31 0 1 16 17 23 18 24 17 20 18 19 0 22 25 17 18 19 20 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 16 0 1 21 0 1 16 19 0 18 20 19 0 0 Voice Effect Type List No. 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 Type AUTO WAH1 AUTO WAH2 AT WAH+DST1 AT WAH+DST2 AT WAH+OD1 AT WAH+OD2 TEMPO AT WAH TOUCH WAH1 TOUCH WAH2 TOUCH WAH3 TC WAH+DST1 TC WAH+DST2 TC WAH+OD1 TC WAH+OD2 WH+DST+DLY1 WH+DST+DLY2 WH+DST+TDLY WH+OD+DLY1 WH+OD+DLY2 WH+OD+TDLY1 WH+OD+TDLY2 CLVI TC WAH1 CLVI TC WAH2 EP TC WAH1 EP TC WAH2 PEDAL WAH PEDAL WH+DST P.WH+DIST HD P.WH+DIST HV P.WH+DIST LT PEDAL WH+OD P.WH+OD HD P.WH+OD HV P.WH+OD LT NO EFFECT THRU Description Cyclically modulates the center frequency of a wah filter. The output of an Auto Wah can be distorted by Distortion. The output of an Auto Wah can be distorted by Overdrive. Tempo synchronized auto wah. Changes the center frequency of a wah filter according to the input level. The output of an Touch Wah can be distorted by Distortion. The output of an Touch Wah can be distorted by Overdrive. Wah, Distortion and Delay are connected in series. WAH, Distortion and Tempo Delay are connected in series. Wah, Overdrive and Delay are connected in series. WAH, Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series. Clavinet Touch Wah. EP Touch Wah. Pedal position changes the center frequency of the wah filter. Distortion applied to the pedal wah output. Overdrive (distortion) applied to the pedal wah output. No effect. Bypass without applying an effect. MSB 78 78 78 78 78 78 79 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 97 97 102 97 97 102 102 82 82 82 82 122 122 122 122 122 122 122 122 122 0 64 LSB 16 0 17 1 18 2 0 0 8 20 16 1 17 2 16 0 0 17 1 1 16 18 28 19 29 0 1 21 23 25 2 22 24 26 0 0 • Effect types cannot be adjusted, except for the following: Reverb level, Chorus level, DSP level on page 81 (For example, delay time cannot be changed in DELAY LCR1). • The actual effect may not be audible depending on the particular Voice. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 131 132 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Mode Key's Ch's After Touch Change Control 0,32 1,5,7,10,11 6,38 64-67 71-74 84 91,93,94 96-97 98-99 100-101 Pitch Bend Note ON Note OFF Velocity o o o o o o o x o o o 0-24 semi x x o 9nH,v=1-127 x 9nH,v=0 0 - 127 : True voice ************** 3 x ************** Default Messages Altered Note Number 1 - 16 1 - 16 Default Changed Basic Channel Function... Transmitted Recognized o o o o o o o o o o o 0-24 semi x o o 9nH,v=1-127 x 0 - 127 0 - 127 3 x x 1 - 16 1 - 16 YAMAHA [ Digital Keyboard ] Model PSR-S550 MIDI Implementation Chart Sound Controller Portament Cntrl Effect Depth RPN Inc,Dec NRPN LSB,MSB RPN LSB,MSB Data Entry Bank Select Remarks Date:11-APR-2008 Version:1.0 MIDI Implementation Chart : True # x x x x o x Aux Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY :All Sound OFF :Reset All Cntrls :Local ON/OFF :All Notes OFF Mes- :Active Sense sages:Reset Notes: o o x x x o o(120,126,127) o(121) o(122) o(123-125) o x o o x x x o o 0 - 127 Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO o 0 - 127 ************** System : Clock Real Time: Commands Common : Song Pos. : Song Sel. : Tune System Exclusive Prog Change o : Yes x : No MIDI Implementation Chart PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 133 MIDI Data Format NOTE: 1 By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily functions as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming data does not affect the panel voices or panel settings. However, the MIDI messages listed below do affect the panel voices, auto accompaniment, and songs. • MIDI Master Tuning • System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type, Chorus Type and DSP Type. 2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be transmitted from the instrument itself. However, they may be transmitted when playing the accompaniment, song or using the Harmony effect. 3 Exclusive <GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H • This message automatically restores all default settings for the instrument, with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning. <MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H • This message allows the volume of all channels to be changed simultaneously (Universal System Exclusive). • The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume. (Values for “ll” are ignored.) <XG Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 00H, 00H, 00H, ddH, ddH, ddH, ddH, F7H • This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of all channels. • The values of “dd” are used for XG Master Tuning. • The default value of “dd” are 00H, 04H, 00H, 00H, respectively. 134 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual <Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Reverb Type MSB • ll : Reverb Type LSB Refer to the Effect Type List (page 126) for details. <Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Chorus Type MSB • ll : Chorus Type LSB Refer to the Effect Type List (page 127) for details. <DSP Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 40H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm: DSP Type MSB • ll: DSP Type LSB Refer to the Effect Type List (page 128) for details. 4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is transmitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is transmitted. When the clock is set to External, both FAH (accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment stop) are recognized. 5 Local ON/OFF <Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F <Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00 Value for “n” is ignored. Specifications Keyboards • 61 Standerd-size keys (C1–C6), with Touch Response. Display • 320 x 240 dots LCD display (backlit) Setup • STANDBY/ON • MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX • LCD CONTRAST Panel Controls • DEMO, SONG MODE • SONG-PRESET, SONG-USER, SONG-SCORE, SONG-LYRICS, SONG-REC • USB • STYLE CATEGORY, VOICE CATEGORY • TRANSPOSE [-] [+], METRONOME, TAP TEMPO, TEMPO [-] [+] • OTS LINK, AUTO FILL IN, ACMP, INTRO [1]–[3], MAIN VARIATION [A]–[D], ENDING/rit. [1]–[3] (REW) (FF), SYNC STOP (A-B REPEAT), SYNC START (PAUSE), START/STOP • REGIST/PART [MIXER], MEMORY, REGIST BANK [-] [+], REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]–[8], STYLE [1]–[8], SONG [1/9]–[8/16], EXIT, CATEGORY [ < ] [ > ], Dial, [+/YES] [-/NO] • EXECUTE, MDB, FILE MENU, FUNCTION, ONE TOUTCH SETTING [1]–[4], LEFT, DUAL, HARMONY, TOUCH, SUSTAIN, DSP, UPPER OCTAVE [-] [+] Realtime Control • Pitch Bend Wheel Voice • 294 Voices + 12 Drum Kits + 10 SFX kits + 480 XG Voices (Included 11 Regional Voices and 8 Regional Drum/Percussion Kits) • Polyphony: 64 • LEFT • DUAL Style • 176 • Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO [1]–[3], MAIN VARIATION [A]–[D], ENDING/rit. [1]–[3], AUTO FILL IN • Style Creator • Fingering: Multi Finger, Full Keyboard • Style Volume Music Database • 600 Registration Memory • 8 banks x 8 memories • Regist Clear Mixer • Volume, Pan, Reverb, Chorus Function • VOLUME: • OVERALL: • • • • • • • • • • • Style Volume, Song Volume Tuning, Pitch Bend Range, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Chord Fingering MAIN VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP Level, Dry Level DUAL VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP Level, Dry Level LEFT VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP Level, Dry Level EFFECT: Reverb Type, Chorus Type, DSP Type, Master EQ Type HARMONY: Harmony Type, Harmony Volume PC: PC Mode MIDI: Local On/Off, External Clock, Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out, Initial Setup METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature Denominator, Bell On/Off, Metronome Volume SCORE: Quantize, Right-Part, Left-Part UTILITY: Demo Cancel, TG Mode LANGUAGE: Language Effects • • • • Harmony: Reverb: Chorus: DSP: 26 types 35 types 44 types 237 types Song • • • • 9 Preset Songs + User Songs + USB Memory Song Clear, Track Clear Song Volume Song Control: A-B REPEAT, PAUSE, REW, FF, START/STOP Recording • Song User Song: Recording Tracks: • Style Creator 5 Songs 1–16, STYLE MIDI • Local On/Off • Initial Setup • External Clock • Keyboard Out • Style Out • Song Out Auxiliary jacks • PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 16V, USB TO HOST, USB TO DEVICE, SUSTAIN Amplifier • 12W x 2 Speakers • (12cm + 3cm) x 2 Power Consumption • 25W Power Supply • Adaptor: PA-301, PA-300 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Dimensions (W x D x H) • 946 x 402 x 130 mm (37-1/4" x 15-7/8" x 5-1/8") Weight • 7.5kg (16 lbs., 9 oz.) Supplied Accessories • Music Rest • Accessory CD-ROM • Owner’s Manual • AC Power adaptor (May not be included depending on your particular area.) Optional Accessories • Headphones: HPE-150 • Keyboard Stand: L6 • Footswitch: FC4/FC5 * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 135 Index +/YES, -/NO button ...................... 14, 41 >/■ button.............................. 14, 28, 41 button ........................................ 14, 28 A B button................................. 14, 73 f button...................................... 14, 28 r button ..................................... 14, 28 Dual Voice DSP Level.........................81 Dual Voice Octave...............................81 Dual Voice Pan ....................................81 Dual Voice Reverb Level ....................81 Dual Voice Volume .............................81 E A A-B Repeat.......................................... 73 Accessories............................................ 7 ACMP button ................................ 14, 23 Auto Accompaniment Region............. 23 AUTO FILL IN button........................ 55 Auto Fill-in.......................................... 55 Effect Type List .................................125 Ending..................................................55 ENDING/rit. I–III buttons .............14, 55 EXECUTE button ..........................15, 84 EXIT button ...................................14, 42 External Clock .....................................94 External Song.......................................29 B F Backup................................................. 39 Backup Clear ....................................... 39 Backup data (Transfer)........................ 98 Bank .................................................... 77 Beat ..................................................... 50 FF .........................................................28 File Control ..........................................83 FILE MENU button .................15, 83–84 File Save (File Menu) ..........................85 Footswitch............................................10 Format (File Menu)..............................84 FullKeyboard .......................................63 FUNCTION button ........................15, 80 FUNCTION display.............................42 Function Settings ...........................80–82 C Category ............................ 17, 22, 27, 40 Category < and > buttons ............ 15, 41 CD-ROM......................................... 7, 99 Chord................................. 23, 25, 61–62 Chord Fingering ............................ 25, 63 Chorus ................................................. 46 Chorus Type ...................................... 127 Clear (Song Track) .............................. 38 Clear (User Song)................................ 37 Computer........................... 91–92, 94, 96 Contrast ............................................... 12 CONTRAST knob......................... 12, 15 D DC IN 16V jack ............................ 10, 15 Delete (File Menu) .............................. 88 DEMO button................................ 14, 16 Demo Cancel ....................................... 82 Demo Song.......................................... 16 Dial ................................................ 14, 41 Display ................................................ 42 Drum Kit ............................................. 21 Drum Kit List .................................... 116 DSP ..................................................... 47 DSP button .................................... 15, 47 DSP Type .......................................... 128 DUAL button ................................ 15, 18 Dual Voice .......................................... 18 Dual Voice Chorus level ..................... 81 Dual Voice Dry Level ......................... 81 136 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Left Voice Pan..................................... 81 Left Voice Reverb Level ..................... 81 Left Voice Volume.............................. 81 Load (File Menu)................................. 87 Loaded Song........................................ 29 Local.................................................... 94 Lyrics................................................... 31 LYRICS button.............................. 14, 31 M Initial Send...........................................95 Initial Setup..........................................95 Initialization .........................................39 INTRO I–III buttons ......................14, 55 Main..................................................... 55 MAIN A–D buttons....................... 14, 55 MAIN Display..................................... 42 MAIN VARIATION (Style) ............... 55 Main Voice .......................................... 17 Main Voice Chorus Level ................... 81 Main Voice Dry Level......................... 81 Main Voice DSP Level........................ 81 Main Voice Octave.............................. 81 Main Voice Pan ................................... 81 Main Voice Reverb level..................... 81 Main Voice Volume ............................ 81 Master EQ Type .................................. 52 MASTER VOLUME control .. 11, 14, 40 MDB button................................... 15, 26 Measure ............................................... 36 MEMORY button.......................... 14, 77 MEMORY Clear ................................. 39 Message (LCD) ................................. 108 Metronome .......................................... 49 METRONOME button ............ 14, 49–50 Metronome Volume ............................ 50 MIDI.................................................... 94 MIDI Data Format............................. 134 MIDI Implementation Chart.............. 132 Multi Recording .................................. 34 Music Database ................................... 26 Music Database List .......................... 122 Music Rest........................................... 13 Mute..................................................... 74 K O Keyboard Out.......................................94 Octave.................................................. 54 One Touch Setting (OTS).................... 58 ONE TOUCH SETTING 1–4 buttons ................................................... 15, 58 Options .............................................. 135 OTS LINK button.......................... 14, 58 H Harmony ..............................................44 HARMONY button........................15, 44 Harmony Type .............................44, 125 Harmony Volume ................................82 Headphones..........................................10 I L Language..............................................12 LEFT button...................................15, 19 Left Part ...............................................98 Left Voice ............................................19 Left Voice Chorus Level......................81 Left Voice Dry Level...........................81 Left Voice DSP Level..........................81 Left Voice Octave................................81 P Part Assign .......................................... 35 PAUSE ................................................ 28 PC ........................................................ 95 PHONES/OUTPUT jack............... 10, 15 Index Pitch Bend ........................................... 48 Pitch Bend Range ................................ 81 PITCH BEND wheel..................... 15, 48 Power Adaptor .................................... 10 PRESET button ............................. 14, 27 Preset Song.......................................... 29 SUSTAIN button ...........................15, 47 SUSTAIN jack...............................10, 15 SYNC START button..............14, 23, 56 SYNC STOP button.......................14, 57 Synchro Start........................................56 Synchro Stop........................................57 Q T Quantize .............................................. 82 Quick Recording ................................. 33 Tap Start...............................................51 TAP TEMPO button ......................14, 51 Tempo ..................................................72 TEMPO +, - buttons ................14, 49, 72 Time Signature.....................................50 TOUCH button ..............................15, 51 Touch Sensitivity .................................51 Track ..............................................32, 74 Track Clear ..........................................38 Transfer..........................................96, 98 Transpose .............................................53 TRANSPOSE +, - buttons .............14, 53 Troubleshooting (Installation Guide).104 Troubleshooting (Instrument) ............107 Tuning..................................................53 R REC button.................................... 14, 33 Record ................................................. 32 REGIST BANK +, - buttons ......... 14, 77 REGIST/PART [MIXER] button.. 14, 74 Registration Memory .......................... 77 REGISTRATION MEMORY 1–8 buttons ................................ 14, 77 Repeat (A-B Repeat) ........................... 73 Reverb ................................................. 45 Reverb Type ...................................... 126 REW .................................................... 28 Right Part ............................................ 98 U S Score.................................................... 30 SCORE button............................... 14, 30 Section................................................. 55 SMF (Standard MIDI File).................. 86 SMF Save ............................................ 86 SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT ....................................................... 105 Song............................................... 27–29 SONG category buttons ................ 14, 27 Song Clear ........................................... 37 Song Memory................................ 32, 35 SONG MODE button .................... 14, 27 Song Out.............................................. 94 Song Volume....................................... 72 Specifications .................................... 135 Split Point...................................... 19, 59 STANDBY/ON switch.................. 11, 14 START/STOP button .............. 14, 22, 41 Stop Accompaniment .......................... 60 Store (Registration) ............................. 77 Style............................................... 22, 55 STYLE category buttons............... 14, 22 Style File ............................................. 63 Style List ........................................... 121 Style Out.............................................. 94 Style Volume....................................... 60 SUSTAIN (Footswitch) ...................... 10 Sustain (Panel) .................................... 47 UPPER OCTAVE +, - buttons ......15, 54 USB......................................................90 USB button ....................................14, 27 USB MIDI Driver ......................101–102 USB Song ............................................29 USB TO DEVICE terminal .....15, 83, 90 USB TO HOST terminal..........15, 90, 92 USER (Song) button ......................14, 27 USER (Style) button ............................63 User File.........................................85, 87 User Song.......................................29, 32 User Style.............................................63 V Voice....................................................17 VOICE category buttons................15, 17 Voice List...........................................110 Volume.................................................40 X XG..........................................................6 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 137 138 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC. By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. [For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information. [Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union] This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual 139 Limited Warranty 90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models included in the following series of products: PSR SERIES OF DIGITAL KEYBOARDS If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor. If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as warranty replacements. THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state. CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities: 1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below. 2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts under warranty. 3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely. *Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days. IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed. 4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and to follow all safety precautions. EXCLUSIONS This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of: 1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity. 2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha. 3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia, and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country. Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below. Model___________________________ Serial #________________________________ Sales Slip #________________________________ Purchased from____________________________________________________________ (Retailer) Date______________________________________ YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue Buena Park, CA 90620 KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL! 140 PSR-S550 Owner’s Manual For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. ASIA THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 011-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria, CEE Department Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-868-07-57 Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West), Jingan, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 080-004-0022 GREECE Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 PHILIPPINES DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE FINLAND Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 TAIWAN NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) Office 4015, entrance 2, 21/5 Kuznetskii Most street, Moscow, 107996, Russia Tel: 495 626 0660 Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AFRICA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 THAILAND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Digital Musical Instruments Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 EKB45 Yamaha Global Home http://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division © 2008 - 2011 Yamaha Corporation WN55250 103PO***.*-01C1 Printed in China